0% found this document useful (0 votes)

48 views359 pages

Batch Operator

The Batch Operator User Guide for COMMANDbatch V1.03 provides detailed instructions on navigating and utilizing the COMMANDbatch system, including batch monitoring, ticket selection, and report generation. It is intended for batch control operators and contains information on various functionalities such as logging in, managing materials, and performing end-of-day processes. The document also includes a revision history and disclaimers regarding the information's accuracy and usage rights.

Uploaded by

Yu2nsp

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

48 views359 pages

Batch Operator

Uploaded by

Yu2nsp

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 359

Batch Operator User Guide

COMMANDbatch V1.03 & Later

Last Updated 12/21/16

www.commandalkon.com
© Command Alkon Incorporated 2003-2017. All rights reserved.
The contents of this document are for informational purposes only and are subject to
change without notice. Command Alkon Incorporated ("CAI") may, without notice, modify
its products in a way that affects the information contained in this publication.
CAI HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. In no event will CAI be liable for any direct, indirect, or consequential damages
arising out of the use of, inability to use, or implementation of any information contained
in this publication, even if CAI has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for
any claim by any other party.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and may contain
inaccuracies or errors. CAI assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this document. This publication is intended only for the direct benefit of authorized users
of CAI products. This publication may not be used for any purposes other than those for
which it is provided, and it is subject to the terms of the applicable software license or
subscription agreement. This publication and the information disclosed herein is the
property of CAI, and, except for rights granted by written consent, may not be disclosed,
disseminated, or duplicated in whole or in part.

Command Alkon Incorporated

1800 International Park Drive, Suite 400
Birmingham, AL 35243-4232
1 (205) 879-3282
www.commandalkon.com
Main Customer Support Phone Number: 1 (800) 624-1872

COMMANDseries (and the names of its components, such as COMMANDconcrete and

COMMANDnetwork), Spectrum, Eagle, and COMMANDbatch are registered trademarks of
Command Alkon Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other names may be
trademarks of their respective owners.

2 12/21/16
Contents

Contents ........................................................................................ 3

Introduction .................................................................................. 9
Purpose ................................................................................................ 9
Audience ............................................................................................... 9
Revision Summary ............................................................................... 10

Logging In to COMMANDbatch ..................................................... 14

Checking Your COMMANDbatch Version ....................................... 15

Changing Plants (To Control a Remote Plant) .............................. 16

COMMANDbatch Main Screen ....................................................... 17

Screen vs. Form ................................................................................... 17
Pull-Down Menus ................................................................................. 18
Toolbar ............................................................................................... 19
Status Bar ........................................................................................... 20

Menus - Customizing .................................................................... 21

Menu Bar and Open Form Menu ............................................................. 21
All Forms Pull-Down Menu ..................................................................... 25
AutoRun Forms .................................................................................... 28
To Rename a Folder .............................................................................. 29

Forms - Navigating and Using ...................................................... 30

Grid vs. Form Area ............................................................................... 30
Tabs ................................................................................................... 32
Grid vs. Subform .................................................................................. 33
To Open Forms ..................................................................................... 34
To Open Forms from the Menu Bar ....................................................... 34
To Open Forms with Explorer ............................................................... 35
To Open Forms with <Ctrl + R> ........................................................... 36
To Open Forms with Pull-Down Menus .................................................. 37
To Switch Among Open Forms ................................................................ 39
Scroll Bars .......................................................................................... 40
Records vs. Fields ................................................................................ 41
Field Colors ......................................................................................... 43
Field Drop-Down Lists ........................................................................... 43
Field Right-Click Menus ......................................................................... 43
Field-Level Help ................................................................................... 44

12/21/16 3
To Add, Edit, Delete & Save Records ....................................................... 45
To Add a New Record ......................................................................... 45
To Edit an Existing Record ................................................................... 46
To Delete an Existing Record ............................................................... 48
To Save a Record ............................................................................... 49
Records Marked as Modified ................................................................... 50
To Filter Records .................................................................................. 51
Filtering for All Records ...................................................................... 51
Filtering on a Text Field ...................................................................... 51
Filtering on a Date Field ..................................................................... 52
Filtering to View Deleted Records ......................................................... 52
To Copy Records .................................................................................. 55
To Create a Template Record .................................................................. 55
Workspaces ......................................................................................... 56

Accessing Help, Manuals, Release Notes ...................................... 59

Form Help ........................................................................................... 60
Field/Button Help ................................................................................. 62
Task Help from a Form .......................................................................... 64
Browsing Help Topics ............................................................................ 65
Searching for Topics ............................................................................. 66
Printing Help Topics .............................................................................. 67
Accessing Manuals and Setup Guides ...................................................... 68
Links to Common Batching Tasks ............................................................ 68
Accessing COMMANDbatch Release Notes ................................................ 68

Shortcut Keys .............................................................................. 69

Materials and Mixes - Setting Up .................................................. 71

Vendors .............................................................................................. 72
Mix Entry Unit of Measure Defaults ......................................................... 72
To Enter an Aggregate Material .............................................................. 74
To Enter a Cement Material .................................................................... 81
To Enter an Admix Material .................................................................... 88
To Enter a Water Material ...................................................................... 96
To Enter Other Products ...................................................................... 103
To Enter a Mix Design ......................................................................... 106
To Enter an Admix Design .................................................................... 113
To Copy a Material .............................................................................. 117
To Copy an Other Product .................................................................... 118
To Enter an Item-Specific Unit Conversion Factor .................................... 119

Material-Device Assignments - Checking ................................... 120

Auto-Batching ............................................................................ 121

Batching Overview ............................................................................. 122

4 12/21/16
Batching Cycle ................................................................................ 122
Discharge Cycle ............................................................................... 126
Batch Bar Buttons and Connection Statuses ........................................... 127
Load Statuses .................................................................................... 131
Logging Manual Events When a Connection Goes Down ........................... 132
SYSTEM UP Custom Equation for RTC Connection Only ......................... 132
SYSTEM UP Custom Equation for ALL Connections ................................ 133
Preparing a Batch ............................................................................... 135
To Create a Ticket (with no Order) ..................................................... 135
To Create a Ticket (from an Order) .................................................... 136
Adjusting Batch Information BEFORE Load Start ..................................... 137
To Add Materials or Edit Targets on Batch Setup ................................... 137
To Adjust Water on a PER YARD Basis ................................................. 140
To Adjust Water on a PER LOAD Basis ................................................. 140
To Change In Truck Water Volume ...................................................... 141
To Change Mix Slump ....................................................................... 141
To Adjust Moisture for an Aggregate ................................................... 141
To Adjust Truck Charge Rate on Batch Setup ....................................... 142
Trimming Materials ............................................................................. 144
To Automatically Trim Admix Designs ................................................. 144
To Automatically Trim a Single Admix ................................................. 144
To Automatically Trim a Water Reducer ............................................... 145
To Set Up Ulink Admix Trims ............................................................. 146
To Manually Trim Materials ................................................................ 151
To Start a Load .................................................................................. 154
To Start a Load from a Current Load ..................................................... 155
Low Inventory Can Be Used to Prevent Load Start .................................. 156
Idle Time Reconciliation Alarm (Optional) .............................................. 157
Reconciling a Dry Up Load ................................................................... 158
Confirm Tolerance .............................................................................. 159
Inventory Recordation When Manual Feeds Occur During Auto-Batching .... 160
To Hold/Resume Batching .................................................................... 161
To Abort a Load .................................................................................. 162
To Abort the Current and All Queued Loads ......................................... 162
To Abort a Load on Load Summary and Loads Below ............................ 163
Adjusting Batch Information AFTER Load Start ....................................... 164
To Edit Trim, Adjust, and Target Amounts During a Batch ...................... 164
To Change Truck and/or Driver During a Batch ..................................... 165
To Adjust Truck Charge Rate On Batch Graphics ................................... 165
To Start Discharge .............................................................................. 168
Reprinting a Ticket ............................................................................. 169
To Reprint a Ticket (from Batch Setup) ............................................... 169
To Reprint a Ticket (from Ticket Editor) ............................................... 169
Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge ................................................ 170
To Enable Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge ............................... 170
To Start Continuous Run ................................................................... 171
To Start Continuous Discharge ........................................................... 171

12/21/16 5
To Stop Continuous Run ................................................................... 172
To Stop Continuous Discharge ........................................................... 172
Freewheeling ..................................................................................... 173
To Change Materials ........................................................................... 174
Performing Washout ........................................................................... 175
To Copy a Ticket on Batch Setup .......................................................... 176

Mix Design Integrity Checks ...................................................... 177

Water/Cement Ratio Check .................................................................. 178
COMMANDbatch Setups for Water/Cement Ratio Checks ....................... 180
Disabling Water/Cement Ratio Checks for a Mix Design ......................... 181
Yield Check ....................................................................................... 182
COMMANDbatch Setups for Yield Checks ............................................. 185
Disabling Yield Checks for a Mix Design .............................................. 187
Material Min/Max Limit Check ............................................................... 188
COMMANDbatch Setups for Material Limit Checks ................................ 190
Disabling the Material Max Limit Check ............................................... 191
Enabling/Disabling the Mix Design Integrity Feature ................................ 192
Mix Design vs. Batch Setup Wat/Cem Ratio and Yield Calculations ............. 196
Minimizing Mix Quality Warnings for Wat/Cem Ratio and Yield .................. 197
Reviewing Mix Design Integrity Alarms .................................................. 199

Inventory Display on Batch Graphics ......................................... 201

Setups - Inventory Display on Batch Graphics ........................................ 202
Operation - Inventory Display on Batch Graphics .................................... 205

Ticket Printing and Batch Weights ............................................. 207

Batch Weights - Overview .................................................................... 208
Batch Weights - Printing for a Single Ticket ............................................ 209
Batch Weights - Printing for Multiple Tickets ........................................... 210
Batch Weights - Options ...................................................................... 211
Tolerance Error Symbols ...................................................................... 214
Bottle Not Empty Alerts ....................................................................... 214
Batch Weights - Which Items to Print .................................................... 215
Customizing Batch Weight Reports ........................................................ 216

Ticket Editing Functions ............................................................. 218

To Edit a Ticket .................................................................................. 218
To Reprint a Ticket (from Ticket Editor) ................................................. 218
To Copy a Ticket (from Ticket Editor) .................................................... 218
To Cancel a Ticket .............................................................................. 219

Inventory - Managing ................................................................ 220

To Check On-Hand Amounts ................................................................ 220
To Enter Inventory Receipts ................................................................. 221
To Enter Inventory Adjustments ........................................................... 221

6 12/21/16
To Set On-Hand Amounts .................................................................... 223
To Edit Manual Material Events ............................................................. 224
To Reconcile Manual Material Events ..................................................... 225

Alarms Form .............................................................................. 226

Running a Report ....................................................................... 227

Manual Station Labels - Printing ................................................ 228

To Print Manual Station Scale Labels ..................................................... 228
To Print Manual Station Labels (except Scales) ....................................... 231

Logger Records - Requesting ..................................................... 235

Spectrum V4 Mix Designs Import ............................................... 236

Overview of Spectrum V4 Mix Designs Import ........................................ 236
Importing Spectrum V4 Mix Designs ..................................................... 238

RTC Utilities ............................................................................... 241

RTC Tasks ......................................................................................... 241
Restart Real Time Monitor ................................................................. 241
Restart Ethernet/IP Driver ................................................................ 241
RTC Utilities ....................................................................................... 242
Shutdown RTC ................................................................................ 242
Re-boot RTC ................................................................................... 242
Restart RTC .................................................................................... 243
Upgrade RTC ..................................................................................... 243

Ticket Export .............................................................................. 245

COMMANDbatch Setups for Ticket Export ............................................... 246
To Export Ticket Data .......................................................................... 249
Path and Filename Variables for Ticket Export ........................................ 251

Material Records Export ............................................................. 254

Eagle Performance Data Export ................................................. 256

Export Data Fields ...................................................................... 258

COMMANDbatch Ticket Export Fields ..................................................... 258
Eagle Ticket Export Fields .................................................................... 265
Material Record Export Fields ............................................................... 269
Eagle Performance Data Export Fields ................................................... 271
MYOB Interface Ticket Export Fields ...................................................... 277
ViewPoint Ticket Export Fields .............................................................. 279

End-Of Processes ....................................................................... 281

12/21/16 7
End of Day Process ............................................................................. 282
End of Week Process ........................................................................... 286
End of Month Process .......................................................................... 286
End of Year Process ............................................................................ 286
Database Backup Options .................................................................... 290
Adding Reports to the End Of Day Process ............................................. 291

Glossary of Terms ...................................................................... 293

Characters/Numbers ........................................................................... 293
A ..................................................................................................... 293
B ..................................................................................................... 297
C ..................................................................................................... 300
D ..................................................................................................... 308
E ...................................................................................................... 312
F ...................................................................................................... 314
G ..................................................................................................... 317
H ..................................................................................................... 318
I ...................................................................................................... 319
J ...................................................................................................... 320
K ..................................................................................................... 321
L ...................................................................................................... 321
M ..................................................................................................... 323
N ..................................................................................................... 326
O ..................................................................................................... 328
P ...................................................................................................... 329
Q ..................................................................................................... 334
R ..................................................................................................... 335
S ..................................................................................................... 339
T ...................................................................................................... 345
U ..................................................................................................... 348
V ..................................................................................................... 349
W ..................................................................................................... 349
X ..................................................................................................... 352
Y ...................................................................................................... 352
Z ..................................................................................................... 352

Index ......................................................................................... 353

8 12/21/16
Introduction

COMMANDbatch allows you to monitor batches from a single interface,

complete with animated graphics that show plant equipment (bins, silos,
conveyors, scales, etc.) weighing up and delivering material to the truck or
mixer. Select tickets and fine-tune batches before they are started then
prepare the next load and change settings on the fly - all from the same
screen.

Microsoft's SQL Server® houses the database and makes managing the
database effortless with daily backups and automated archive and purge
functions.
Standard reports are included so you can monitor inventory, material usage,
and generate lists of orders, tickets, and mix designs. Reports can also be
customized to fit your business needs.

Topics in This Section

Purpose
Audience
Revision Summary

Purpose
This manual explains how to navigate and use the COMMANDbatch system,
including running automatic batches, performing End-of-Day duties, and
printing reports.

Audience
This manual is intended to be used by batch control operators. It is not a
management tool and does not contain setup and configuration instructions.
For that information, please see the other COMMANDbatch manuals such as
the PC Setup Guide and the Installation and Setup Guide.

12/21/16 9
Revision Summary

Date Version Revision

Apr. 4, 2003 First release.
Oct. 27, 2004 1.03 Released for COMMANDbatch V1.03.
Jan. 11, 2005 Updated sections on Orders and Reports - these
sections are now linked to the FrameMaker files
that describe each form. From now on, they will be
automatically updated each time the Batch
Operator FrameMaker book is regenerated.
Mar. 18, 2005 Updated descriptions of Fast, Timed, and Jog feed
types.
Mar. 21, 2005 Corrected description of Jog Feed.
May 14, 2005 Reformatted document.
Jul. 6, 2005 Removed section on Order Entry and referred the
reader to that manual for order entry tasks.
Aug. 11, 2005 Added information about the Conflict Resolver for
changes made by different users - V1.04 feature.
Oct. 24, 2005 Combined the sections on Ticket Printing and Batch
Weights.
Nov. 11, 2005 Added a procedure for editing design quantities on
Batch Setup with and without the Edit Quantities
form.
Dec. 15, 2005 In the Ticket Data and Material Records export
procedures, referred readers to the “Export Data
Fields” section in the Installation and Setup Guide.
Mar. 13, 2006 1.05 Corrected section on Continuous Run / Continuous
Discharge to state that Continuous Discharge can
be used for loads regardless of how they were
created (orders, Batch Setup, dispatch).
Jul. 28, 2006 1.05 Reformatted document.
Sep. 11, 2006 1.05 Added description of moisture report options to the
Batch Weights Options table.
Mar. 7, 2007 1.06 Added icons and new format to Notes, Tips,
Cautions, and Warnings.
Mar. 19, 2007 1.06 Improved the section on Customizing Menus.
Mar. 21, 2007 1.06 Updated the Spectrum Ticket Export Data table.
Mar. 27,2007 1.06 Cross referenced the “To Start a Load” section with
a section about allowing low inventory to prevent
loads from starting.
Apr. 23, 2007 1.06 Corrected information on water/cement ratio and
automatically trimming water reducers.
May 3, 2007 1.06 Added a section explaining the batch bar buttons
and connection statuses.

10 12/21/16
May 7, 2007 1.06 Added procedure for importing V4 Spectrum mix
designs to the Reports/Utilities section.
May 10, 2007 1.06 Fixed cross-references to subtopics in the
Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge section.
May 23, 2007 1.06 Minor formatting changes.
Jul. 18, 2007 1.06.288 Revised the procedure under Reports/Utilities
describing the V4 Mix Design Import process.
Jul. 23, 2007 1.06.288 Revised the SYSTEM UP Custom Equation
documentation in the Auto Batching section.
Dec. 14, 2007 1.06.288 Updated section on adding materials and mixes.
Jan. 28, 2008 1.06.288 Changed references to Spectrum ticket export to
COMMANDbatch/Spectrum ticket export.
May 13, 2008 1.06.288 Updated descriptions of freewheeling and starting
loads.
Jun. 10, 2008 1.7.1.0 Generated new manual for V1.7.1.0.
Jul. 31, 2008 1.7.3.0 Generated new manual to fix some cross-
references. No changes to content.
Aug. 7, 2008 1.7.3.1 Pulled some topics out of the Reports/Utilities
section and made them top-level sections with
cross-references in Reports/Utilities help.
Oct. 14, 2008 1.7.3.1 Changed the version number on the title page to
“V1.7.3.1 & Later”.
Oct. 24, 2008 1.7.5.0 Added a procedure on reconciling dry up loads to
the Auto Batching section.
Oct. 30, 2008 1.7.5.0 Clarified the procedure on reconciling dry up loads
in the Auto Batching section.
Nov. 13, 2008 1.7.5.0 • Revised the Auto Batch section to show the
distinction between adjustments that can be made to
a batch BEFORE and AFTER load start.
• Added a section about changing Trim, Adjust, and
Target amounts during a batch.
Jan. 13, 2009 1.7.5.5 Corrected the End of Year Process section. The
EBATCH_FORMS database is not backed up and the
EBATCH_ARCHIVE database is renamed
EBATCH_YEAR_(current year).
Feb. 3, 2009 1.7.7.0 Corrected section on editing records: The Conflict
Resolver takes care of situations where two users
are modifying the same form.
Feb. 12, 2009 1.7.7.0 Corrected section on Tolerance Symbols: “+”
means operator chooses not re-read the scale.
Mar. 26, 2009 1.7.7.0 In the section on COMMANDbatch/Spectrum Ticket
Export Fields, “Spectrum” was removed and only
referred to in a note.
Mar. 25, 2010 1.7.10.0 In the section on Batch Bar Buttons, added a
sentence saying the ‘R’ indicator is yellow when the
RTC is initializing.

12/21/16 11
Jan. 19, 2011 1.8.1.x Added a note to the section on preparing batches
stating that flags on the User Extensions form
control whether a user can batch orders for past
and future dates.
Jun. 27, 2011 1.8.1.2 Added a section on the optional use of Idle Time
Reconciliation so that the operator must enter a
Reason Code if the time between loads exceeds a
specified number of minutes.
Jul. 11, 2011 1.8.1.3 Minor revisions to description of the Batch Bar
Status indicator.
Aug. 8, 2011 1.8.1.3 Minor revisions to the section on navigating forms.
Dec. 15, 2011 1.8.3.0 Revised the description of the ‘S’ (Status) icon in
the section on Batch Bar Buttons.
Jan. 16, 2012 1.8.3.0 Minor corrections to the sections on adding
aggregates, cements, admixes and waters.
Apr. 26, 2012 1.8.4.1 Updated the section describing the Load Summary
on Batch Graphics.
Jul. 5, 2012 1.8.4.5 Added couple more tasks to the “Inventory -
Managing” section.
Oct. 26, 2012 1.8.4.5 Minor rewording of some procedures.
Apr. 10, 2013 1.8.5.3 Minor revisions (notes added) to section on
starting discharge.
Aug. 7, 2013 1.8.6.2 Revised section on accessing help to include how to
access manuals and a list of batching tasks.
Aug. 20, 2013 1.8.7.0 Added a section on checking the COMMANDbatch
version.
Feb. 21, 2014 1.8.8.1 In the Batch Bar Buttons section (under Auto
Batching) a cross reference to the online help for
configuring Batch Graphics was added.
Jul. 16, 2014 1.8.9.0 Added note to section on printing manual station
labels about which process to select for Phase V
Manual Station Labels.
Oct. 1, 2014 1.8.10.0 Improved a few screen shots and procedures per a
documentation review.
Mar. 12, 2015 1.8.11.0 Added sections on Mix Design Integrity and
Inventory Display on Batch Graphics.
Apr. 2, 2015 1.8.11.0 Formatting change to section on Changing Plants.
Jul. 16, 2015 1.9.0.0 Updated cover/title page.
Aug. 19, 2015 1.9.0.0 Updated Status Bar section.
Sep. 24, 2015 1.9.0.0 Corrected screen shots in the Accessing Help
section.
Jun. 21, 2016 2016.3.0 Added a bullet item to the “To Start Discharge”
section stating that moisture values on Batch
Graphics for materials with active probes are an
average until the load is complete.

12 12/21/16
Aug. 23, 2016 2016.4.0 Added a section to the Auto Batching topic about
inventory recordation when a manual feed occurs
during an automatic batch.
Sep. 20, 2016 2016.4.0 Added a section describing how to add reports to
the End Of Day process.
Oct. 24, 2016 2016.5.0 Removed procedure for scheduling inventory roll-
ups from the “Inventory - Managing” section since
the Inventory Periods form is now read-only.
Dec. 21, 2016 2017.1.0 Updated cover/title page.

12/21/16 13
Logging In to COMMANDbatch

Logging in to COMMANDbatch is easy, assuming your UserID has already been

created.

Note: The UserID you use to login to COMMANDbatch determines your

editing permissions and the plants you can access.

1. Double click the COMMANDbatch icon on your Desktop screen.

The Logon box appears.

2. The UserID last used is displayed in the UserID field. If this not
your UserID, type in the correct one.
3. Tab to the Password field and type in your password. Your
password will not appear as you type, only a series of asterisks
(*****).
4. Click the OK button. The splash (logo) screen briefly appears,
then the COMMANDbatch application opens.
5. If you have access to more than one plant, you can pull up the
Change Plant form to make sure you are logged in to the correct
plant.

14 12/21/16
Checking Your COMMANDbatch Version

If you need to see which version of COMMANDbatch and RTC (Real-Time

Controller) you are running, and if applicable, the eVM version:

From the COMMANDbatch pull-down menu bar, select Help > About
COMMANDbatch.

The “About COMMANDbatch” window is displayed. This screen also shows your
system’s S.O. (Sales Order) and License numbers, as well as your Application
and Forms database versions.

12/21/16 15
Changing Plants (To Control a Remote
Plant)

If your company operates in a multi-plant environment and you have access

rights to other plants, perform the following procedure to change to another
plant.

Warning!
Do not change plants unless you have line-of-sight to the
plant to which you are switching. DO NOT perform
batching operations on a plant that you cannot see!

1. Open the Change Plant form.

2. Select the plant.
3. Save the form.
The Load Size and Sequence fields on the Batch Setup form change to the
color assigned to the selected plant (on the Plants form).

16 12/21/16
COMMANDbatch Main Screen

This section describes the major components of the COMMANDbatch main

screen. It is the first screen that comes up when you log in to the system.

Topics in This Section

Screen vs. Form
Pull-Down Menus
Toolbar
Status Bar

See Also
Menu Bar and Open Form Menu
Batch Bar Buttons and Connection Statuses

Screen vs. Form

A distinction needs to be made between a screen and a form. The main
“screen” appears when you open COMMANDbatch. “Forms” can then be
opened in smaller windows inside the main screen.
COMMANDbatch Main Screen

12/21/16 17
The main screen with an open form is shown next.
Main Screen with a Form Displayed

Pull-Down Menus
Across the top of the main screen are pull-down menus with selections for
accessing system forms or features.
Pull-Down Menus

Let’s say, you want to hide the menu bar that runs down the left side of the
main screen. Simply click the View menu then click the “Menu Bar” selection
(as shown next) to remove the checkmark next to the selection.
Example of View Pull-Down Menu

18 12/21/16
Toolbar
The toolbar provides shortcuts to common system functions (examples: Open,
New, Refresh, and Save).
Toolbar

Tip!
To see the name and function of a button on the toolbar, position
your mouse pointer over the button. As shown next, a small popup
window displays the title of the button for a few seconds, and a
description of the button is given on the Status Bar in the lower
left corner of the main screen.

Example of Tool Tip for a Button

12/21/16 19
Status Bar
The status bar in the lower left corner of the main screen provides information
on the field or function currently selected. In the following screen example,
the status bar shows which mix design record is displayed.
Status Bar

20 12/21/16
Menus - Customizing

From the COMMANDbatch Main Screen, you can specify which forms will
appear on the Menu Bar (left side of COMMANDbatch screen) and under the
Open Form Menu and All Forms Menu on the toolbar. You can also specify
AutoRun Forms which automatically open each time you log onto
COMMANDbatch.

Note: When you upgrade to a newer version of COMMANDbatch, your

menu settings are saved so you don’t have to reconfigure them.

Topics
Menu Bar and Open Form Menu
All Forms Pull-Down Menu
AutoRun Forms
To Rename a Folder

Menu Bar and Open Form Menu

Forms listed on the Menu Bar can be opened by clicking on them.
Menu Bar

Forms that you use on a regular basis can be added to the Menu Bar as
described in To Customize the Menu Bar and Open Form Menu.

Note: Forms that are added to the Menu Bar are also added to the
Open Form menu on the toolbar (see the following example).

12/21/16 21
Open Form Menu

To Customize the Menu Bar and Open Form Menu

1. Select View > Explorer to open the Explorer window.

Explorer window

2. In the left pane of the Explorer, click the plus sign (+) beside the
green My Folders folder.
The yellow folders indicated in the following screen example are displayed
under the My Folders folder.
My Folders expanded

22 12/21/16
3. In the left pane, click the MyMenu folder. Forms already on your
Menu Bar will be displayed in the right pane of the Explorer as
shown next.
MyMenu forms displayed

4. To remove a form from the Menu Bar:

— Right click the form in the right pane of the Explorer and select
“Delete”.
A message asks if you are sure you want to delete the item.
— Click OK.
5. To add a form to the Menu Bar:
— In the left pane, click the plus sign (+) beside the green Master
Explorer folder to display the All Forms folder.
— Click the All Forms folder to display all forms in the system in the
right pane as shown next.
All forms displayed

12/21/16 23
— Drag and drop form(s) from the right pane onto the MyMenu folder.

Tip!
You can select several forms at once.
• To select several forms, hold down on the <Ctrl> key and
click the forms you want.
• To select forms listed consecutively, select the first form then
hold down on the <Shift> key while you click the last form.

6. Close the Explorer window and exit COMMANDbatch.

Note: Changes to the Menu Bar (and Open Form menu) will not take
effect until you exit and log back in to COMMANDbatch.

24 12/21/16
All Forms Pull-Down Menu
The All Forms pull-down menu organizes forms by function. For example, all
forms used for batching are listed under a “Batching” folder.

Note: Only Command Alkon Developers can modify the All Forms
menu.

All Forms Menu

To Customize the All Forms Menu

Note: Only Command Alkon Developers can modify the All Forms menu.

1. Select View > Explorer to open the Explorer window.

2. In the left pane of the Explorer, click the plus sign (+) beside the
green Master Explorer folder.
The yellow folders indicated in the following screen example are displayed
under the Master Explorer folder.
Master Explorer expanded

3. Click the plus sign (+) beside the Menu folder.

Several “function” folders should be displayed as shown next.

12/21/16 25
An “s” preceding a folder name means the folder is a “standard” folder
that is shipped with COMMANDbatch.
Explorer showing Menu folders

4. To delete a function folder:

— Right click the folder in the left pane of the Explorer and select
“Delete”.
A message asks if you are sure you want to delete the item.
— Click OK.

Tip!
You can rename a folder instead of deleting it. This way you won’t
have to drag and drop new forms (see To Rename a Folder).

5. To add a new function folder:

— Right click the Menu folder in the left pane and select New Folder.
A new folder is displayed with “New Folder” highlighted.
— DO NOT TOUCH THE MOUSE BUTTON. Simply type the new folder
name over “New Folder” then press <Enter>.
6. To add forms to a function folder:
— In the left pane, click the plus sign (+) beside the green Master
Explorer folder to display the All Forms folder.
— Click the All Forms folder to display all forms in the system in the
right pane (as shown next).

26 12/21/16
All forms displayed

— Making sure the function folders under Menu are displayed on the
left, drag and drop forms from the right pane onto the appropriate
function folder.
— Add or delete forms from other function folders as needed.

7. Close the Explorer window and exit COMMANDbatch.

Note: Changes to the All Forms menu will not take effect until you exit
and log back in to COMMANDbatch.

12/21/16 27
AutoRun Forms
Forms listed under Explorer’s AutoRun folder will open automatically each
time COMMANDbatch is started. This way you don’t have to open the same
forms over and over.

To Customize the AutoRun Folder

1. Select View > Explorer to open the Explorer window.

Explorer window

2. In the left pane of the Explorer, click the plus sign (+) beside the
green My Folders folder.
The yellow folders shown under My Folders in the following screen
example are displayed.
3. In the left pane, click the AutoRun folder.
Forms already on your Menu Bar will be displayed in the right pane of the
Explorer as shown next.
AutoRun forms

4. To delete a form from the AutoRun folder:

— Right click the form in the right pane of the Explorer and select
“Delete”.
A message asks if you are sure you want to delete the item.
— Click OK.
5. To add a form to the AutoRun folder:

28 12/21/16
— In the left pane, click the plus sign (+) beside the green Master
Explorer folder to display the All Forms folder.
— Click the All Forms folder to display all forms in the system in the
right pane (as shown next).
All forms displayed

— Drag and drop form(s) from the right pane onto the AutoRun folder
that is displayed under My Folders (not under Master Explorer).

Tip!
You can select several forms at once.
• To select several forms, hold down on the <Ctrl> key and click
the forms you want.
• To select forms listed consecutively, select the first form then
hold down on the <Shift> key while you click the last form.

6. Close the Explorer window and exit COMMANDbatch.

Note: Changes to the AutoRun folder will not take effect until you exit
and log back in to COMMANDbatch.

To Rename a Folder
1. Right click the folder and select “Properties”.

An Object Properties box is displayed.

2. In the Title field, type the new folder name.
3. Click OK.

12/21/16 29
Forms - Navigating and Using

The following topics explain how COMMANDbatch forms are laid out and how
to work with them. You can open as many forms as you need. You can also
arrange them on the screen and save their locations in Workspaces.

Topics
Grid vs. Form Area
Tabs
Grid vs. Subform
To Open Forms
To Switch Among Open Forms
Scroll Bars
Records vs. Fields
Field Colors
Field Drop-Down Lists
Field Right-Click Menus
Field-Level Help
To Add, Edit, Delete & Save Records
Records Marked as Modified
To Filter Records
To Copy Records
To Create a Template Record
Workspaces

Grid vs. Form Area

Most forms display two distinct areas, a grid area and a form area. A
splitter bar separates these two areas.

30 12/21/16
Form Layout

• The grid area lists each record in the database for the form. Key fields
(which are not editable) are displayed in this area. Select a record in the
grid and it will be displayed in detail in the form area. Sometimes the grid
area contains more fields which can be viewed by scrolling or by
expanding the grid area by pressing <Crtl+2>.
• The form area has two purposes:
— To display data about a record selected in the grid area.
— To provide data entry fields for entering new records or modifying
data for existing records. Tabs are provided to separate data fields
into groups (and to make the form easier to navigate).
• The grid and form areas are separated by a splitter bar. You can adjust
the amount of window area given to each area by dragging the splitter
bar right or left.
• To see only the form area of the screen, press <Ctrl+1>. The form area
of the screen will expand and cover the grid. Press <Ctrl+1> to return to
a normal view.
• To see only the grid area of the screen, press <Ctrl+2>. The grid area of
the screen will expand and cover the form. Press <Ctrl+2> to return to a
normal view.

12/21/16 31
Tabs

Some forms contain only a few fields so tabs aren’t necessary. On larger
forms, however, tabs are used to organize fields into groups based on function
or purpose. They also help make the larger forms easier to navigate.
The following tabs function the same way on all forms.

Notes Tab
This tab provides a place to enter additional information that is not covered
elsewhere on the form.

History Tab
This tab shows the date and time this record was created and updated, and by
which user.

Diag Tab

This tab should only be used by Command Alkon Service Technicians for
diagnostics and troubleshooting purposes.

32 12/21/16
Grid vs. Subform
Some forms contain a “subform”. The subform is a “child” of a “parent” record
on the form. In the following example, the BIN02 record on the Devices tab is
part of the 1 CR GR material record listed on the main grid at the left.
Grid versus Subform

12/21/16 33
To Open Forms
You can open COMMANDbatch forms one of the following ways.
To Open Forms from the Menu Bar
To Open Forms with Explorer
To Open Forms with <Ctrl + R>
To Open Forms with Pull-Down Menus

Note: If COMMANDbatch is restarted via “Restart COMMANDbatch” from

the Forms menu, forms that were open before the restart are re-
opened in their previous sizes and positions.

To Open Forms from the Menu Bar

Click the form name on the Horizontal Menu Bar.
Menu Bar

34 12/21/16
To Open Forms with Explorer
1. After you open COMMANDbatch, select View > Explorer to open
the Explorer window.
Explorer Window

2. In the left pane of the Explorer, click the plus sign (+) beside the
green Master Explorer folder to display the All Forms folder.
3. Click the All Forms folder to display all forms in the system in the
right pane as shown next.
Explorer with All Forms Displayed

4. Double-click the form you wish to open. The form opens.

12/21/16 35
To Open Forms with <Ctrl + R>
1. Press <Ctrl+R>.

The Select Form dialog box appears.

2. Type the first letter of the form name to move down the list to
form names that start with that letter.
3. Press the Down Arrow ()key if necessary to scroll down to the
appropriate form name.
4. Click OK (or double click the form name).

36 12/21/16
To Open Forms with Pull-Down Menus
You can use one of three pull-down menus at the top of the COMMANDbatch
main screen to open forms.

Form Pull-Down Menu

1. Click on the “Form” pull-down menu and select “Run”.

The Select Form dialog box appears.

12/21/16 37
Open Form Pull-Down Menu
Click on the “Open Form” pull-down menu then click on the desired
form name.

All Forms Pull-Down Menu

1. Click on the “All Forms” pull-down menu and position your mouse
over the appropriate category (i.e. Batching).

A list of forms related to that category is displayed to the right.

2. Click on the appropriate form name (i.e. Change Material).

38 12/21/16
To Switch Among Open Forms
If you have several forms open, you can switch from one form to another
using either of the following methods.
• Click on a form to make it active.
• Select the form name from the Window drop-down menu. A checkmark
appears beside the open form which is placed on top of all open forms.
Window Drop-down Menu

Tip!
• You can select “Tile” from the Window drop-down menu to give
each form an equal amount of space on the screen.
• You can also save groups of open forms in Workspaces so they
will automatically open (and in the same location) whenever
you open the workspace.

12/21/16 39
Scroll Bars
Refer to the following screen example.
Scroll Bars

— A vertical scroll bar is provided when a form contains a grid with

rows of data. Move the vertical scroll bar up or down to see more
rows.
— A horizontal scroll bar is provided when there are too many
columns in a grid to display them all on the form at one time. Move
the horizontal scroll bar right or left to see more columns in a grid.
— To move the scroll bar, place your mouse pointer over the bar and
hold down on the left mouse button as you move the bar.

40 12/21/16
Records vs. Fields
A record is a collection of information about a major item in the database. For
example, the Customers form contains records about several different
customers.
Records contain smaller pieces of information (called fields). Some fields are
read-only and others allow you to enter or edit the information.

Selecting a Record
You can use any of the following methods to select a record.
• Click on the record in the grid area.
Record Selected in the Grid Area

• Click on any record in the grid area and then use the Up and Down arrow
keys to move to the record you want.
Up and Down Arrow Keys

• Click on any record in the grid area and then use the Arrow buttons on
the toolbar to move to the record you want.
Arrow Buttons on the Toolbar

12/21/16 41
Selecting a Field
Several fields are located on the main part of a form, but some grid areas can
be expanded to display fields as well (see Grid vs. Form Area).

To select a field:
• Press the <Tab> key to move from one field to another.
• Or, move the mouse pointer to a field and click the left mouse button.

Tip!
You can make the <Enter> key perform the same function as the
<Tab> key. To do this, select Options > Enter Key Performs Tab.

42 12/21/16
Field Colors
The following background colors are used to designate field editability or
status as shown in the following table.
Yellow Required field - data must be entered.
Gray Not editable.
Red Warning.
Example: The Age field on the Batch Setup form
turns red if the age of the returned mix exceeds the
age limit.
Orange The Notes field on the Batch Setup form turns orange
when notes are sent with the ticket.
Also the Slump field on Batch Setup turns orange if it
has been modified.

Field Drop-Down Lists

Fields that display a allow you to click the arrow to open a drop-down list.
If the list is very long, you can filter the list so that it displays only certain
items. For example, to view only those items that start with the letter ‘s’, type
‘s’ in the field and click the . The drop-down list opens at the first item that
begins with ‘s’. This way you don’t have to scroll from ‘a’ to ‘s’.

Field Right-Click Menus

All fields have a right-click menu with an option for Help.

Fields with dropdown lists, as indicated by a , also have the Add and Details
options.
Date fields are a little different. They have the Help option but a dropdown
calendar instead of a list.

12/21/16 43
Right-Click Menu

Here are descriptions of the right-click menu options:

Add
Select this option to add a record to the database. A blank form for the
database item is launched. If the field is read-only, the Add option is grayed
out on the menu.

Details
Select this option to view details about the item displayed in the field. The
appropriate form for the database item is launched to display details about
this database item.

Note: A value must be selected/entered in the field to use this option.

If the field is blank, a blank form is launched.

Help
Select this option to display a description of the field. This option is available
for all fields.

Field-Level Help
Right click on any field and select “Help” to see a description of the field.

Tip!
Click the and buttons at the top or bottom of a help
page to navigate through help topics.

44 12/21/16
To Add, Edit, Delete & Save Records
Depending on your editing rights, you may be able to add, edit, and delete
records as explained in the following topics.
To Add a New Record
To Edit an Existing Record
To Delete an Existing Record
To Save a Record

To Add a New Record

1. Click the “New” button on the toolbar.

A new line, displaying an (n) in the record number column, is added to

the grid. Also the form area at the right is blanked out.

2. Enter required information for the record.

3. Click the “Save” button on the Toolbar.

12/21/16 45
To Edit an Existing Record
1. Select the record in the main grid on the left side of the form.

2. Make the necessary changes to the record. The record number in

the grid now displays an (m).

3. Click the “Save” button on the Toolbar.

Note: If another user has an instance of the same form open and you try
to save your changes, the following window is displayed so you can
select which change to save to the database.

46 12/21/16
Conflict Resolver window

From left to right, the Conflict Resolver shows the original value before
the other user changed it, the other user’s change, then your change.
• On the Conflict Resolver window, click on the correct value to be saved.
The selected value is displayed on a white background.
• Click OK.
On your copy of the form, the value is displayed on a green background
to show that you resolved conflicting changes.
Conflicting Changes Resolved

12/21/16 47
To Delete an Existing Record
1. Select the record you want to delete.

2. Click the Delete Record button on the Toolbar.

The record number in the grid displays a (d).

3. Click the “Save” button to permanently delete the record.

48 12/21/16
To Save a Record

To Save a Record and Keep the Form Open

Click the “Save” button on the Toolbar.

To Save a Record and Close the Form

Click the “Save-and-Close” button on the Toolbar.

To Cancel Unsaved Changes and Close the Form

Click the “Cancel Changes” button on the Toolbar.

12/21/16 49
Records Marked as Modified
The system marks records that have been modified in some way (added,
modified, deleted, etc.) by entering a code in the Record Number column of
the grid. The following example shows an (m) in the Record Number column,
indicating that record 2 has been modified (edited). The bullet items that
follow explain these modifications.
Modified Record

• A (d) indicates the record has been marked for deletion. The record will
be deleted when the record is saved.
• An (n) indicates that a new record is being added, but has not been
saved.
• An (m) indicates that the record has been modified (edited), but not
saved.
• An (e) indicates that the record contains one or more errors. You will not
be able to save the record before you correct the errors. Normally, a
message explains the error(s) when you try to save a record with errors.

50 12/21/16
To Filter Records
For the most part, filtering means limiting the number of records displayed in
the grid area; however, you can filter on just about any field on a form.

Topics
Filtering for All Records
Filtering on a Text Field
Filtering on a Date Field
Filtering to View Deleted Records

Filtering for All Records

Forms in COMMANDbatch are assigned default filters, which vary by form.

To override a form’s default filter and view ALL records:

Press <F4> twice.

Note: Pressing <F4> twice doesn’t work on the Batch Setup, Ticket Editor,
and Productivity forms because these forms are filtered by date.

To return to a form’s default filter:

Press <F4> then <F3>.

Filtering on a Text Field

Example 1:
Let’s say you want to view all customers whose names begin with “H”. You
would do the following:

1. Open the Customers form.

2. Click the Filter button on the Toolbar. A “blank” copy of the

form is displayed.

Tip!
Pressing <F4> does the same thing as clicking the Filter button.

3. In the Customer field, enter H*.

4. Click the Filter button again. Customer names beginning with “H”
are displayed in the grid portion of the form.
5. To remove the filter and view all Customer records again, click the
Filter button twice.

12/21/16 51
Example 2:
Let’s say you want to view only those Customers assigned a particular Tax
Code.

1. Open the Customers form.

2. Click the Filter button on the Toolbar. A “blank” copy of the

form is displayed.
3. Select the appropriate tax code in the Tax Code field.
4. Click the Filter button again. Customers assigned this tax code are
displayed in the grid portion of the form.
5. To remove the filter and display all Customer records again, click
the Filter button twice.

Filtering on a Date Field

Some forms such as the Ticket Editor are also filtered by date. By default,
records for the current date are displayed but you can filter on the Date field
to display records for other dates.
Let’s say you want to view tickets for June 21, 2005 and all days forward. You
would:

1. Open the Ticket Editor form.

2. Click the Filter button (or press <F4>).

3. In the Shipped field at the top of the form, enter: >=06/21/2005
and click the Filter button (or press <F4>) again.
All tickets for June 21, 2005 and later are displayed.

Tip!
If you want to see tickets only for June 21, 2005, select that date
in the Date field at the top left of the Ticket Editor form.

Filtering to View Deleted Records

By default when you open a form, all active records are displayed in the grid
area. For troubleshooting purposes, however, you can filter the grid to
display:
• ALL records (Active and Deleted)
- OR -
• Only DELETED Records

52 12/21/16
To view ALL records:
Example: Let’s say you want to view all mix design records (deleted and
active).

1. Open the Mix Designs form.

2. On the toolbar at the top of the COMMANDbatch screen, select Mix

Designs > All Records (Deleted and Non-Deleted).
Mix Designs Pull-Down Menu

3. The Mix Designs screen is refreshed and all records are displayed.
4. To go back to viewing only Active records, select Mix Designs >
All Records (Deleted and Non-Deleted) again to uncheck the “All
Records” filter.

To view only DELETED records:

Example: Let’s say you want to view only deleted mix design records.

1. Open the Mix Designs form.

2. On the toolbar at the top of the COMMANDbatch screen, select Mix

Designs > Deleted Records.

12/21/16 53
Mix Designs Pull-Down Menu

3. The Mix Designs screen is refreshed and only deleted records are
displayed.
4. To go back to viewing only Active records, select Mix Designs >
Deleted Records again to uncheck the “Deleted Records” filter.

54 12/21/16
To Copy Records
The following procedure works very similar on several COMMANDbatch forms
but is a little different for forms such as Admix Designs, Materials, Mix
Designs, Orders, and Other Products. (See the help on those forms for
details.)
Let’s say you want to copy a Customer record. Here is what you would do:

1. Open the Customers form.

2. In the grid area at the left of the form, click the record to be
copied.
3. Click the Customers menu on the toolbar at the top of the
COMMANDbatch screen and select “Copy”.

4. A duplicate of the record is displayed in the grid area at the left of

the Customers form with an (n) next to the record number.
5. Edit the rest of the record as needed.
6. Click the Save button on the Toolbar to save your changes.

To Create a Template Record

As a time saver for data entry, you can create a master template record for a
form that contains data that is the same for all records to be added.

Note: Templates can only be created for forms that contain the “Template
Record” checkbox. Currently, this is only available on the
Customers form.

1. Open the form that needs a template.

2. Check the Template Record box.

3. Type ‘Template’ in the key code field (example: Customer is the
key code field on the Customers form).

12/21/16 55
4. In the appropriate fields, enter information that will be the same
on all records you will be adding. For example, you could select
‘OH’ in the State field of the Customers form if all of your
customers are in the State of Ohio.
5. Save the template. The next time you create a new record,
template information will appear in the appropriate fields.

Workspaces
You can assign a group of forms to a “workspace” so that the same forms
open and appear in the same place whenever you open the workspace. You
can create more than one workspace. For example, you might want one
workspace for Batch Operator tasks and another for Order Entry tasks.

To Create a Workspace

1. In COMMANDbatch, select Form > Workspaces.

2. Click New.

56 12/21/16
3. Enter a name for the workspace and click OK.
— The Workspaces form shows workspace name, followed by
“containing 0 forms”.

4. Click Done.
5. Open each form you want to include in the new workspace, and
adjust the size and position of each form. Leave all forms open.
6. Open the Workspaces form and select the workspace you just
created.
7. Click “Set from Current Forms”.
— The number of added forms appears beside the workspace name.

8. Click Done.

12/21/16 57
— The next time you open this workspace, all of your forms will open
in the exact sizes and positions they were in when you added them.

To Open a Workspace

1. In COMMANDbatch, select Form > Workspaces.

2. Click the workspace you wish to open then click “Exit and Open”.
The forms contained in the selected workspace are displayed.

To get Form Help using the Right-Click Menu

1. Make sure the form is active. If you’re not sure, click anywhere on
the form.

2. Right click a blank part of the form. The right click menu appears.

3. Click the “Help” option as shown in the above screen example.

To get Form Help using the Help Pull-Down Menu

1. Make sure the form is active. If you’re not sure, click anywhere on
the form.
2. Click the Help menu at the top of the COMMANDbatch screen. A
pull-down menu appears.

60 12/21/16
Click Help > Current Form

To get Form Help using the button

1. Click on the What’s This? button on the Toolbar at the top of

the screen. Your mouse pointer becomes a pointer with a
question mark (like the one shown on the button).

2. Point to a blank part of the form and click the left mouse button.

12/21/16 61
Field/Button Help
Field or button help provides a description of the field/button. In some cases,
detailed information is provided.

Caution!
The <F1> key and the Help menu cannot be used to access
help for BUTTONS because you cannot click on a button
without invoking its function. Right-click and select ‘Help’
instead.

To get Field Help using the <F1> Key

Click on a field to make it active then press the <F1> key at the top
left of the keyboard.

To get Field Help using the Right-Click Menu

Right click on the field or button and select “Help”.

To get Field help using the Help Pull-Down Menu

Click on a field to make it active then select Help > Current Field from
the menu bar at the top of the COMMANDbatch main screen.
Click Help > Current Field

Tip!
Click the and buttons at the top or bottom of a help
page to navigate forward and back through the help topics.

62 12/21/16
To get Field or Button Help using the button

1. Click on the “What’s This?” button on the toolbar at the top of

the COMMANDbatch screen. The mouse pointer becomes a pointer
with a question mark (like the one shown on the button).

2. Point to the field or button and click the left mouse button.

1. Access general form help as described in Form Help.

2. Do one of the following:

Click on a link in the right pane of the help window.

Or, expand topics in the left pane of the help window and click on the
task topic you want to view.

64 12/21/16
Browsing Help Topics
1. At the top of the COMMANDbatch main screen, select Help >
Contents and Index.
Click Help > Contents and Index

The help window opens.

2. In the Contents pane on the left side of the help file, click the plus
sign next to a topic to display sub-topics.
Topic Expanded

3. Click the plus sign left of a sub-topic until you see the topic you
want then click the topic and it will be displayed on the right side
of the help window.

Tip!
You can also click the and buttons at the top or
bottom of a help page (in the right pane) to navigate forward
and back through help topics.

12/21/16 65
Searching for Topics
1. Access the help system as described in step 1 of Browsing Help
Topics.

2. Click on the Search tab on the left side of the help window.
3. Type in the search words and click “List Topics”.
Topics containing your search words are displayed.

4. Select a topic from the list and click “Display”.

66 12/21/16
Printing Help Topics
1. As described in the Searching for Topics section, find the topic
you want to print.

2. At the top of the help window, click the printer icon .

The following window appears.

3. Check the appropriate option (topic only, or topic and subtopics)

and click OK.
Another window appears so you can select the printer.
4. Select the printer and click “Print”.

12/21/16 67
Accessing Manuals and Setup Guides
To access COMMANDbatch manuals and setup guides, select Help > Manuals
from the menu bar at the top of the COMMANDbatch main screen.

An Explorer window is opened to show all COMMANDbatch manuals (in PDF).

Links to Common Batching Tasks

To access procedures for common batching tasks, select Help > How Do I?
from the menu bar at the top of the COMMANDbatch main screen.
Click Help > How Do I?

The How_Do_I.pdf is displayed with procedures listed by category (batching,

order entry, printer setup, ticket export, etc.).

Accessing COMMANDbatch Release Notes

To see an overview of the latest COMMANDbatch features and enhancements,
select Help > Release Notes from the menu bar at the top of the
COMMANDbatch main screen.
Click Help > Release Notes

The ReleaseNotes.pdf is displayed with the newest features and

enhancements listed first.

68 12/21/16
Shortcut Keys

The following table describes keyboard shortcuts used in COMMANDbatch.

Quick Key Function

Ctrl + D Delete current record
Ctrl + S Save current record
Ctrl + N New record
F5 Refresh all records
Ctrl + F5 Refresh current record
F7 Go to previous record
F8 Go to next record
Alt + S + F Go to first record
Alt + S + L Go to last record
F1 Get Help on current field
Ctrl + 1 While viewing both grid and form areas, press this key
combination to view the form area only. Press these keys
again to see both form and grid areas.
Ctrl + 2 While viewing both grid and form areas, press this key
combination to view the grid area only. Press these keys
again to see both grid and form areas.
F6 Toggle between viewing form and grid areas.
Ctrl + R Run form (see Note 1)
Ctrl + C Copy field data (see Note 2)
Ctrl + X Cut field data (see Note 3)
Ctrl + V Paste field data (see Notes 2 & 3)
Alt + F + O Close and Save Changes
Alt + F + A Close and Cancel Changes
F4 Begin filter in Place
F4 Execute filter in Place
F3 Cancel filter in Place
Ctrl + A Add Value for Current field (see Note 4)
Ctrl + L Details for Current field (see Note 5)
Ctrl + Q Run Query for current form (see Note 6)
Alt + F + W Open Workspaces (see Note 7)
Alt + V + E Open Explorer (forms) (see Note 8)

12/21/16 69
Note 1 This brings up the Select Form window. Type in the first 2 or 3 letters for
the form that you want and the cursor will move you alphabetically to that
part of the list. 

Note 2 Press <Ctrl + C> after you have highlighted the information you want to
copy. You can then paste this information into another field (by selecting
the field, then pressing <Ctrl + V>). 

Note 3 Press <Ctrl + X> after you have highlighted the information you want to
cut. You can then paste this information into another field (by selecting
the field, then pressing <Ctrl + V>).

Note 4 This is the same as using the right-click menu and selecting Add. It opens
up the form containing the type of record you want to add. Example:
Selecting this option from the Customer field of Order Entry opens up the
Customers form so you can add a new customer record. 

Note 5 This is the same as using the right-click menu and selecting Details. It
pulls up the record from the parent form so you can see more details
about the record. The field must contain a value; otherwise, a blank
record is displayed. 

Note 6 This is used in the Ticket Editor to bring up the Ticket Filter (Retrieving
Filter). Must be used if using the Mass Update Function for finding or
grouping tickets requiring mass changes.

Note 7 This opens the Workspaces window. Select the appropriate workspace
and click the ‘Exit and Open’ button. 

Note 8 This opens the Explorer window. This is the same as selecting View >
Explorer. This operation can be used to retrieve Explorer if it has been
closed. 

70 12/21/16
Materials and Mixes - Setting Up

Materials must be entered (or imported) before they can be included in mix
designs and assigned to plant devices. The accuracy of batching functions
such as tolerance checking, moisture calculations, and pricing depends on
properly configured materials.

Topics
Vendors
Mix Entry Unit of Measure Defaults
To Enter an Aggregate Material
To Enter a Cement Material
To Enter an Admix Material
To Enter a Water Material
To Enter Other Products
To Enter a Mix Design
To Enter an Admix Design
To Copy a Material
To Copy an Other Product
To Enter an Item-Specific Unit Conversion Factor

12/21/16 71
Vendors
If they have not been imported, enter vendors (on the Vendors form) that
supply you with materials. You can then add vendor information to material
records (on the Materials form).

Mix Entry Unit of Measure Defaults

You can specify the UOM to be displayed for a material when it is added to a
mix design on the Mix Designs, Admix Designs, or Batch Setup forms.

Let’s say your system is set up to use Metric units and you want all
mix designs entered in US units.
• First of all, for each material to be used in mix designs in the alternate
measurement system, select the alternate unit in the Mix Entry:
Alternate field on the Units tab of the Materials form. For example, the
alternate unit could be “lb”.

• On the Units tab of the System Parameters form, select “m3” as the
Default: Mix Entry Unit and leave the Default SI Units box
unchecked.

Then, when you create a new mix design, the Internal UOM defaults to
“yd” and the material UOM’s default to “lb”. This also applies if you add
materials to the mix here or on the Batch Setup form.

72 12/21/16
Now, let’s say your system is set up to use US units but you want all
mix designs entered in Metric units.
• Again, for each material to be used in mix designs in the alternate
measurement system, select the alternate unit in the Mix Entry:
Alternate field on the Units tab of the Materials form. For example, the
alternate unit could be “kg”.

• On the Units tab of the System Parameters form, check the Default SI
Units box.

Then, when you create a new mix design, the Internal UOM defaults to
“m3” and the material UOM’s default to “kg”. This also applies if you add
materials to the mix here or on the Batch Setup form.

12/21/16 73
To Enter an Aggregate Material

Tip!
The easiest way to add a new material is to copy an existing material
that has similar properties (see To Copy a Material) and then edit the
new material for any information that is different.
However, if no materials exist in the database, you will need to
perform the following procedure.

1. Open the Materials form and create a new record one of the
following ways:

• Click the New Record button on the toolbar at the top of the
COMMANDbatch screen
• or, click on a blank row in the grid on the left side of the form.
2. Enter the following information:
— Material code in the Material field
— Meaningful description in the Desc field
— Short description in the Short Desc field
3. Select the Qualities tab and make the following entries.
• If the material can be substituted for another material during a batch,
enter a Substitution Factor.
• If mix yield will be calculated or the material is used in slurry calculations,
enter the Specific Gravity of the material.
• If the Oven Dry Moisture Calculation Method is used for mix designs
containing this material, enter an Absorption percentage.
• If you want to be warned if the target goes below zero after targets have
been calculated, check the Warn If Negative box.
• Leave the Slump Factor set to 0.0. This field applies to water materials.
• If the material can be trimmed on Batch Setup, enter a Default Trim Qty
and Trim Type.
• Check the Update Trim box if you want the material’s Default Trim Qty to
be automatically updated with the last value used on Batch Setup.
• Check the Use Previous Trim box if you want the trim value used for the
material on the previous ticket to be used on the next ticket.
• Check the Use Previous Amount box if you want the Design or Based On
quantity from the previous ticket to be used on the next ticket.
4. Select the Limits tab and make the following entries.
— Minimum and Maximum amounts allowed in a mix design.

74 12/21/16
— Minimum and Maximum allowable moisture readings or entries.
— Minimum and Maximum allowable trim amounts.
— Minimum and Maximum allowable temperatures.
5. Skip the Devices tab for now. You can come back to it after you
have assigned the material to a device.

Tip!
You can also wait to assign the material to a device when you
add the device on Batch Graphics.

6. Select the Batching tab and make the following entries.

• Leave the Batch This Material box checked.
• Check the Use Tare if Over Tol box ONLY if you want the system to accept
any positive tare amount over the established tolerance.
Example:
Tolerance is set at 20 pounds. Target weight is 100 pounds. The scale
registers a 30-pound positive tare. For a Yes value (box checked), the
system delivers 70 pounds of material into the scale. For a No value (box
unchecked), the system delivers 100 pounds.
• Check the Use Negative Tare box ONLY if you want the system to accept
any negative tare under the established tolerance.
Example:
Negative tolerance is set at -20 pounds. Target weight is 100 pounds. The
scale registers a 15-pound negative tare. For a Yes value (box checked),
the system delivers 115 pounds of material into the scale. For a No value
(box unchecked), the system delivers 100 pounds.
• Leave the Use Positive Tare box checked ONLY if you want the system to
accept any positive tare amount under the established tolerance.
Example:
Tolerance is set at 20 pounds. Target weight is 100 pounds. The scale
registers a 15-pound positive tare. For a Yes value (box checked), the
system delivers 85 pounds of material into the scale. For a No value (box
unchecked), the system delivers 100 pounds.
• Check the Use Tare if Under Neg Tol box ONLY if you want the system to
accept any negative tare amount under the established tolerance.
Example:
Tolerance is set at -20 pounds. Target weight is 100 pounds. The scale
registers a 30-pound negative tare. For a Yes value (box checked), the
system delivers 130 pounds of material into the scale. For a No value
(box unchecked), the system delivers 100 pounds.

12/21/16 75
• DO NOT check the Record Over-Zero as Used box unless the bin or
storage device has “leaky” gates and you want to include the leaked
material in inventory.

Caution!
This method of compensation should only be used until the
leaky gates are repaired!

• Select the type of Trace Type error logging. By default, “None” is selected.
• In the Allow Mix Modify field, select the type of editing rights for
modifying the material in a mix design on Batch Setup. By default, Allow
modify ingred in mix, only if mix allow modify is Y is selected.
For a complete list of mix modify types, see the online help for the Allow
Mix Modify field on the Materials form’s Batching tab.
• Enter a Special Alias name if the material is named differently in an
external piece of batch control equipment such as a color controller. By
default, the material code is displayed in this field.
• Enter a Company Alias only if you operate in a multi-company
environment and want to distinguish this material from another
company’s material.
7. Select the Plants tab and enter under and over tolerance Amounts
or Percentages of the target for Normal batch sizes.
8. Click on the More>> button at the right of the Plants tab to open
the Materials/Plants form where you can enter tolerance ranges
for batches that fall outside Normal batch sizes (i.e., Small and
Mid-size batches).
• Absolute and/or Percentage tolerances can be entered in the Normal,
Small Batch, and Mid Batch rows. (Normal tolerances can also be entered
on the Plants tab.)
• Gross over/under tolerance checking can be entered in the Excess
tolerance row.
• If total tolerance checking must comply with EN 206 requirements, enter
under and over percentages in the Total row. EN 206 is a European
Standard Specification.
EN 206 requirements specify that:
— Aggregates and cements must be batched to a total tolerance of +/
–3%.
— The same Total Under and Over percentages should be entered for
all aggregate and cement materials.
— All aggregate materials in the mix must be weighed into the same
aggregate scale. The same is true for cement materials.

76 12/21/16
— Leaving the Total Under and Over percentages set to 0.00 disables
Total tolerance checking per EN 206 for the material.
— Results of Total tolerance checking are not recorded anywhere in the
system.
• For multi-batch loads (except for the last batch), you can enter a wider
tolerance range as either an Absolute or a Percentage of the target in the
Fast Batch row.
A single-batch load or the last batch of a multi-batch load disregards Fast
Batch tolerances and uses Normal, Small Batch, or Mid Batch size
tolerances, depending on the entries for each and on how tolerances are
calculated (on Percentage of Scale/Meter Capacity, or on Batch Size).
• In the Layer Finished row, you can enter an amount below which or a
percentage of the target where the feed cycle is considered complete,
prior to checking tolerances.
• Save your changes and close the Materials/Plants form.
9. On the Materials form, select the Groups tab and make the
following entries to ensure that target calculations and
operations such as ticket printing are performed on the material.
Standard entries are:
Target Calc = 1 AGG
Weights Calc = 1 AGG
For additional functionality such as DRUMCOAT or moisture probes,
additional entries would be needed.
10. Select the Options tab and make the following entries.
• Leave the Print on Ticket box checked so the material can be printed on
tickets.
• Leave the Discountable box checked if you want percentage discount
pricing applied.
• Check the Saleable box only if you sell the material as a separate
product.
• Leave the Ingredient box checked so the material can be used in mix
designs.
• Leave the Returnable box unchecked (if you do not want to allow this
material to be returned to inventory).
• Leave the Track Inventory box checked if you want inventory levels of the
material to be tracked.
• Leave the Track Usage box checked if you want amounts of this material
used in batches to be recorded.
• If an alternate unit of measure is used (as in a US-Metric dual
measurement system), enter the alternate unit in the Name if Alt. UOM
field.

12/21/16 77
• Dispatch Item Type is not used.
• If you operate in a multi-company environment, select the code for the
company that ships the material.
• In the Usual Vendor field, select the vendor that normally supplies the
material.
• Taxable field - Determines whether the material record or the order
controls the material’s taxability on the order.
Choices are:
— Taxable - material is taxable on the order, whether the order is
taxable or not.
— Non-Taxable - material is non-taxable on the order, whether the
order is taxable or not.
— From Ticket - the order controls the taxability of the material.
• In the Exceptions area, enter the taxable setting for any tax authorities
whose taxable setting overrides the Taxable field setting.
11. Select the Units tab and make the following entries.
• In the Internal field, select the unit for usage amounts. The Price,
Inventory, Report, Purchase, Order Unit, Delivered Unit, and Absolute
Unit fields are automatically set to this unit.

Order Entry Section

Fields in the Order Entry section of this tab are not editable unless the
“Saleable” box on the Options tab is checked.
• If the material can be sold as a separate product:
— Enter an Order Unit and its Alternate unit (if sold in the other
measurement system - US or Metric). The Order Unit defaults to the
Internal unit.
— Enter the Delivered Unit and its Alternate unit (if sold in the other
measurement system - US or Metric). The Delivered Unit defaults to
the Internal unit.
• Select a Del’d Qty Calc Type. For most mix materials, select “Normal:
Order sets Load Size”.

Mix Entry Section

• In the Absolute Unit field, select the default unit used when this material
is added to mix designs or selected on Batch Setup.

Note: This field is only editable if “Ingredient” is checked on the Options tab.

78 12/21/16
• In the Alternate field, select the default unit used when this material is
added to mix designs or selected on Batch Setup in the “alternate” unit of
measure (example: US or SI).

Note: This field is only editable if “Ingredient” is checked on the Options tab.

• In the Digits Right of Decimal Point field, enter how many digits will be
displayed to the right of the decimal point when this material is selected
in mix designs and on Batch Setup. Do the same for the Alternate field if
alternate units are used.
12. You can use the Notes tab to enter additional information about
the material. Otherwise, ignore this tab.
13. Save your changes so far.
14. Click the Locations button at the top right of the form to open the
Item Locations (Linked) form.
15. Ignore the Location tab unless you want to:
• record the Standard Cost to your company for one unit of the material.
- or -
• enter a Product Code (a name for the material specific to this location).
Defaults to the Material Code entered on the Materials form. You can also
enter a description and a short description in the Other Code field.
16. Select the Inventory tab and make the following entries:
• Minimum Qty - When the material’s inventory level is below this amount
and the material is batched, the quantity in the Material field of the Batch
Setup form is displayed in red text.

Note: Text color is specified on the User Extensions form, which is

accessed by clicking the Extensions button on the Users form.

The Minimum Qty unit defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.

12/21/16 79
— Device
— Location (the default)
— Plant
The unit defaults to the Internal unit entered on the Materials form.
17. Select the Pricing tab and make the following entries:
• Price Category - Specifies pricing for different situations such as retail
cash sales. Can be assigned at either the product or customer level.
Customer price categories override product price categories.
• Price - Price your company charges customers for one unit of the
material.
• per - Defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.
• Prev. Price - Price you last charged customers for one unit of the material.
• Effective - Date the Price is/was effective.
18. Save your changes and close the Item Locations form.
You will be asked if you want to save your changes.
19. Click Yes.
You are returned to the Materials form.
20. Save your changes and close the Materials form or enter another
material.
21. If you have not already done so, set up plant devices as explained
in the Plant_Device_Setup.pdf.
22. Go back to the Devices tab on the Materials form and:
• Make sure the Active box is checked for the device currently assigned to
the material.
• Enable Automatic moisture compensation and moisture probes.
• Enter the supplier’s recommended moisture value even if a moisture
probe will be used. Then if the probe goes bad, a valid moisture value will
still be used.
23. Save your changes and close the Materials form.

80 12/21/16
To Enter a Cement Material

1. Open the Materials form and create a new record one of the
following ways:

• Click the New Record button on the toolbar at the top of the
COMMANDbatch screen
• or, click on a blank row in the grid on the left side of the form.
2. Enter the following information:
— Material code in the Material field
— Meaningful decription in the Desc field
— Short description in the Short Desc field
3. Select the Qualities tab and make the following entries.
• If the material can be substituted for another material during a batch,
enter a Substitution Factor.
• If mix yield will be calculated or the material is used in slurry calculations,
enter the Specific Gravity of the material.
• If the Oven Dry Moisture Calculation Method is used for mix designs
containing this material, enter an Absorption percentage.
• If the material is used in slurry calculations, enter the Solids Specific
Gravity.
• If you want to be warned if the target goes below zero after targets have
been calculated, check the Warn If Negative box.
• Leave the Slump Factor set to 0.0. This field applies to water materials.
• If the material can be trimmed on Batch Setup, enter a Default Trim Qty
and Trim Type.
• Check the Update Trim box if you want the material’s Default Trim Qty to
be automatically updated with the last value used on Batch Setup.
• Check the Use Previous Trim box if you want the trim value used for the
material on the previous ticket to be used on the next ticket.
• Check the Use Previous Amount box if you want the Design or Based On
quantity from the previous ticket to be used on the next ticket.

12/21/16 81
4. Select the Limits tab and make the following entries.
— Minimum and Maximum amounts allowed in a mix design.
— Minimum and Maximum allowable moisture readings or entries.
— Minimum and Maximum allowable trim amounts.
5. Skip the Devices tab for now. You can come back to it after you
have assigned the material to a device.

Tip!
You can also wait to assign the material to a device when you
add the device on Batch Graphics.

6. Select the Batching tab and make the following entries.

82 12/21/16
• DO NOT check the Record Over-Zero as Used box unless the bin or
storage device has “leaky” gates and you want to include the leaked
material in inventory.

Caution!
This method of compensation should only be used until the
leaky gates are repaired!

12/21/16 83
— Leaving the Total Under and Over percentages set to 0.00 disables
Total tolerance checking per EN 206 for the material.
— Results of Total tolerance checking are not recorded anywhere in the
system.
• For multi-batch loads (except for the last batch), you can enter a wider
tolerance range as either an Absolute or a Percentage of the target in the
Fast Batch row.
A single-batch load or the last batch of a multi-batch load disregards Fast
Batch tolerances and uses Normal, Small Batch, or Mid Batch size
tolerances, depending on the entries for each and on how tolerances are
calculated (on Percentage of Scale/Meter Capacity, or on Batch Size).
• In the Layer Finished row, you can enter an amount below which or a
percentage of the target where the feed cycle is considered complete,
prior to checking tolerances.
• Save your changes and close the Materials/Plants form.
9. On the Materials form, select the Groups tab and make the
following entries to ensure that target calculations and
operations such as ticket printing are performed on the material.
Standard entries are:
Target Calc = 2 CEM
Weights Calc = 2 CEM
For additional functionality such as DRUMCOAT, an additional entry would
be needed.
10. Select the Options tab and make the following entries.
• Leave the Print on Ticket box checked so the material can be printed on
tickets.
• Leave the Discountable box checked if you want percentage discount
pricing applied.
• Check the Saleable box only if you sell the material as a separate
product.
• Leave the Ingredient box checked so the material can be used in mix
designs.
• Leave the Returnable box unchecked (if you do not want to allow this
material to be returned to inventory).
• Leave the Track Inventory box checked if you want inventory levels of the
material to be tracked.
• Leave the Track Usage box checked if you want amounts of this material
used in batches to be recorded.
• If an alternate unit of measure is used (as in a US-Metric dual
measurement system), enter the alternate unit in the Name if Alt. UOM
field.

84 12/21/16
• Dispatch Item Type is not used.
• If you operate in a multi-company environment, select the code for the
company that ships the material.
• In the Usual Vendor field, select the vendor that normally supplies the
material.
• Taxable field - Determines whether the material record or the order
controls the material’s taxability on the order.
Choices are:
— Taxable - material is taxable on the order, whether the order is
taxable or not.
— Non-Taxable - material is non-taxable on the order, whether the
order is taxable or not.
— From Ticket - the order controls the taxability of the material.
• In the Exceptions area, enter the taxable setting for any tax authorities
whose taxable setting overrides the Taxable field setting.
11. Select the Units tab and make the following entries.
• In the Internal field, select the unit for usage amounts. The Price,
Inventory, Report, Purchase, Order Unit, Delivered Unit, and Absolute
Unit fields are automatically set to this unit.

Order Entry Section

Mix Entry Section

• In the Absolute Unit field, select the default unit used when this material
is added to mix designs or selected on Batch Setup.

Note: This field is only editable if “Ingredient” is checked on the Options tab.

12/21/16 85
• In the Alternate field, select the default unit used when this material is
added to mix designs or selected on Batch Setup in the “alternate” unit of
measure (example: US or SI).

Note: This field is only editable if “Ingredient” is checked on the Options tab.

• In the Digits Right of Decimal Point field, enter how many digits will be
displayed to the right of the decimal point when this material is selected
in mix designs and on Batch Setup. Do the same for the Alternate field if
alternate units are used.
12. You can use the Notes tab to enter additional information about
the material. Otherwise, ignore this tab.
13. Save your changes so far.
14. Click the Locations button at the top right of the form to open the
Item Locations (Linked) form.
15. Ignore the Location tab unless you want to:
• record the Standard Cost to your company for one unit of the material.
- or -
• enter a Product Code (a name for the material specific to this location).
Defaults to the Material Code entered on the Materials form. You can also
enter a description and a short description in the Other Code field.
16. Select the Inventory tab and make the following entry:
• Minimum Qty - When the material’s inventory level is below this amount
and the material is batched, the quantity in the Material field of the Batch
Setup form is displayed in red text.

Note: Text color is specified on the User Extensions form, which is

accessed by clicking the Extensions button on the Users form.

The Minimum Qty unit defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.

86 12/21/16
— Device
— Location (the default)
— Plant
The unit defaults to the Internal unit entered on the Materials form.
17. Select the Pricing tab and make the following entries:
• Price Category - Specifies pricing for different situations such as retail
cash sales. Can be assigned at either the product or customer level.
Customer price categories override product price categories.
• Price - Price your company charges customers for one unit of the
material.
• per - Defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.
• Prev. Price - Price you last charged customers for one unit of the material.
• Effective - Date the Price is/was effective.
18. Save your changes and close the Item Locations form.
You will be asked if you want to save your changes.
19. Click Yes.
You are returned to the Materials form.
20. Save your changes and close the Materials form or enter another
material.
21. If you have not already done so, set up plant devices as explained
in the Plant_Device_Setup.pdf.
22. Go back to the Devices tab on the Materials form and make sure
the Active box is checked for the device currently assigned to the
material.
23. Save your changes and close the Materials form.

12/21/16 87
To Enter an Admix Material
The following procedure describes how to enter an admix material. For details
about configuring admixes for water correction, dosages, effectiveness, and
trimming, see the Admix Setup Guide.

1. Open the Materials form and create a new record one of the
following ways:

• Click the New Record button on the toolbar at the top of the
COMMANDbatch screen
• or, click on a blank row in the grid on the left side of the form.
2. Enter the following information:
— Material code in the Material field
— Meaningful description in the Desc field
— Short description in the Short Desc field
3. Select the Qualities tab and make the following entries.
• If the effectiveness of the admix (due to age) is less than 100 percent,
enter the percentage in the Effectiveness field.
Example:
If you are batching air that is 100% effective and the target for air is 50
ounces, the system batches 50 ounces. If you are batching air that is
50% effective and the target for air is 50 ounces, the system batches 100
ounces.
• If the target weight of the admix is based on another material such as
cement, enter a Based On Factor and unit.
Example:
To batch one unit of Calcium per 100 weight of cement, enter a 1 in this
column and /C in the unit column.
• If this is a high-volume admix such as Calcium that corrects the water
target, set the Correction Factor to the amount of water in the admixture.
Example:

88 12/21/16
For 50% water in the admix, set the Correction Factor to 0.50.

Notes: • Target Calculations may need configured if correction is not

working properly.
• If the admixture amount will be included in the total water and
the Water/Cement ratio, the Weights Calc group type should be
5 WATADX and the Correction Factor should be configured for
the amount of admixture desired.

• If you want to be warned if the target goes below zero after targets have
been calculated, check the Warn If Negative box.
• If the material can be trimmed on Batch Setup, enter a Default Trim Qty
and Trim Type.
• Check the Update Trim box if you want the material’s Default Trim Qty to
be automatically updated with the last value used on Batch Setup.
• Check the Use Previous Trim box if you want the trim value used for the
material on the previous ticket to be used on the next ticket.
• Check the Use Previous Amount box if you want the Design or Based On
quantity from the previous ticket to be used on the next ticket.
• If dispatch tickets will be sending admix modifier data for the admix,
select the External Modifier Type.
4. Select the Limits tab and make the following entries.
— Minimum and Maximum amounts allowed in a mix design.
— Minimum and Maximum allowable trim amounts.
5. Skip the Devices tab for now. You can come back to it after you
have assigned the material to a device.

Tip!
You can also wait to assign the material to a device when you
add the device on Batch Graphics.

6. Select the Batching tab and make the following entries.

• Leave the Batch This Material box checked.

Weighed Admixes Only:

• Check the Use Tare if Over Tol box ONLY if you want the system to accept
any positive tare amount over the established tolerance.
Example:
Tolerance is set at 20 pounds. Target weight is 100 pounds. The scale
registers a 30-pound positive tare. For a Yes value (box checked), the
system delivers 70 pounds of material into the scale. For a No value (box
unchecked), the system delivers 100 pounds.

12/21/16 89
Weighed Admixes Only:
• Check the Use Negative Tare box ONLY if you want the system to accept
any negative tare under the established tolerance.
Example:
Negative tolerance is set at -20 pounds. Target weight is 100 pounds. The
scale registers a 15-pound negative tare. For a Yes value (box checked),
the system delivers 115 pounds of material into the scale. For a No value
(box unchecked), the system delivers 100 pounds.

Weighed Admixes Only:

• Leave the Use Positive Tare box checked ONLY if you want the system to
accept any positive tare amount under the established tolerance.
Example:
Tolerance is set at 20 pounds. Target weight is 100 pounds. The scale
registers a 15-pound positive tare. For a Yes value (box checked), the
system delivers 85 pounds of material into the scale. For a No value (box
unchecked), the system delivers 100 pounds.

Weighed Admixes Only:

• Check the Use Tare if Under Neg Tol box ONLY if you want the system to
accept any negative tare amount under the established tolerance.
Example:
Tolerance is set at -20 pounds. Target weight is 100 pounds. The scale
registers a 30-pound negative tare. For a Yes value (box checked), the
system delivers 130 pounds of material into the scale. For a No value
(box unchecked), the system delivers 100 pounds.

Weighed Admixes Only:

• DO NOT check the Record Over-Zero as Used box unless the bin or
storage device has “leaky” gates and you want to include the leaked
material in inventory.

Caution!
This method of compensation should only be used until the
leaky gates are repaired!

90 12/21/16
• Enter a Special Alias name if the material is named differently in an
external piece of batch control equipment such as a color controller. By
default, the material code is displayed in this field.
• Enter a Company Alias only if you operate in a multi-company
environment and want to distinguish this material from another
company’s material.
7. Select the Plants tab and enter under and over tolerance Amounts
or Percentages of the target for Normal batch sizes.
8. Click on the More>> button at the right of the Plants tab to open
the Materials/Plants form where you can enter tolerance ranges
for batches that fall outside Normal batch sizes (i.e., Small and
Mid-size batches).
• Absolute and/or Percentage tolerances can be entered in the Normal,
Small Batch, and Mid Batch rows. (Normal tolerances can also be entered
on the Plants tab.)
• Gross over/under tolerance checking can be entered in the Excess
tolerance row.
• Ignore the under- and over-percentages in the Total. They only pertain to
aggregates and cements.
• For multi-batch loads (except for the last batch), you can enter a wider
tolerance range as either an Absolute or a Percentage of the target in the
Fast Batch row.
A single-batch load or the last batch of a multi-batch load disregards Fast
Batch tolerances and uses Normal, Small Batch, or Mid Batch size
tolerances, depending on the entries for each and on how tolerances are
calculated (on Percentage of Scale/Meter Capacity, or on Batch Size).
• In the Layer Finished row, you can enter an amount below which or a
percentage of the target where the feed cycle is considered complete,
prior to checking tolerances.
• Save your changes and close the Materials/Plants form.
9. On the Materials form, select the Groups tab and make the
following entries to ensure that target calculations and
operations such as ticket printing are performed on the material.
Standard entries are:
Target Calc = 4 ADX
Weights Calc = 4 ADX

Note: If the admixture amount will be included in the total water and
the Water/Cement ratio, the Weights Calc group type should be
5 WATADX and the Correction Factor should be configured for
the amount of admixture desired.

10. Select the Options tab and make the following entries.

12/21/16 91
• Leave the Print on Ticket box checked so the material can be printed on
tickets.
• Leave the Discountable box checked if you want percentage discount
pricing applied.
• Leave the Saleable box unchecked to not allow the admix material to be
sold separately.
• Leave the Ingredient box checked so the material can be used in mix
designs.
• Leave the Returnable box unchecked (if you do not want to allow this
material to be returned to inventory).
• Leave the Track Inventory box checked if you want inventory levels of the
material to be tracked.
• Leave the Track Usage box checked if you want amounts of this material
used in batches to be recorded.
• If an alternate unit of measure is used (as in a US-Metric dual
measurement system), enter the alternate unit in the Name if Alt. UOM
field.
• Ignore the Dispatch Item Type field.
• If you operate in a multi-company environment, select the code for the
company that ships the material.
• In the Usual Vendor field, select the vendor that normally supplies the
material.
• Taxable field - Determines whether the material record or the order
controls the material’s taxability on the order.
Choices are:
— Taxable - material is taxable on the order, whether the order is
taxable or not.
— Non-Taxable - material is non-taxable on the order, whether the
order is taxable or not.
— From Ticket - the order controls the taxability of the material.
• In the Exceptions area, enter the taxable setting for any tax authorities
whose taxable setting overrides the Taxable field setting.
11. Select the Units tab and make the following entries.
• In the Internal field, select the unit for usage amounts. The Price,
Inventory, Report, Purchase, Order Unit, Delivered Unit, and Absolute
Unit fields are automatically set to this unit.

Order Entry Section

Fields in the Order Entry section of this tab are not editable unless the
“Saleable” box on the Options tab is checked.

92 12/21/16
• If the material can be sold as a separate product:
— Enter an Order Unit and its Alternate unit (if sold in the other
measurement system - US or Metric). The Order Unit defaults to the
Internal unit.
— Enter the Delivered Unit and its Alternate unit (if sold in the other
measurement system - US or Metric). The Delivered Unit defaults to
the Internal unit.
• Select a Del’d Qty Calc Type. For most mix materials, select “Normal:
Order sets Load Size”.

Mix Entry Section

• In the Absolute Unit field, select the default unit used when this material
is added to mix designs or selected on Batch Setup.

Note: This field is only editable if “Ingredient” is checked on the Options tab.

• In the Alternate field, select the default unit used when this material is
added to mix designs or selected on Batch Setup in the “alternate” unit of
measure (example: US or SI).

Note: This field is only editable if “Ingredient” is checked on the Options tab.

12/21/16 93
• Minimum Qty - When the material’s inventory level is below this amount
and the material is batched, the quantity in the Material field of the Batch
Setup form is displayed in red text.

Note: Text color is specified on the User Extensions form, which is

accessed by clicking the Extensions button on the Users form.

The Minimum Qty unit defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.

• Maximum Qty - This field is used for informational purposes only. You can
enter the maximum amount of the material that can be stored in
inventory. The unit defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.
• Track On-Hand by - Inventory levels of this material can be tracked by
Device or Location (the default). This field is typically set to “Location”. If
the material is stored in more than one device, you might want to track
by “Device”.
• Reorder Delivery Qty - Delivery size for one truck load of the material.
This field is used to determine how many trucks are needed to fill the
material’s storage device to full capacity.
The unit defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.
• Reorder Point - Ignore this field. It is reserved for future use.
• Track Usage by - Shipped amounts of the material can be tracked by:
— Device
— Location (the default)
— Plant
The unit defaults to the Internal unit entered on the Materials form.
17. Select the Pricing tab and make the following entries:
• Price Category - Specifies pricing for different situations such as retail
cash sales. Can be assigned at either the product or customer level.
Customer price categories override product price categories.
• Price - Price your company charges customers for one unit of the
material.
• per - Defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.
• Prev. Price - Price you last charged customers for one unit of the material.
• Effective - Date the Price is/was effective.
18. Save your changes and close the Item Locations form.
You will be asked if you want to save your changes.
19. Click Yes.
You are returned to the Materials form.
20. Save your changes and close the Materials form or enter another
material.

94 12/21/16
21. If you have not already done so, set up plant devices as explained
in the Plant_Device_Setup.pdf.
22. Go back to the Devices tab on the Materials form and make sure
the Active box is checked for the device currently assigned to the
material.
23. Save your changes and close the Materials form.

12/21/16 95
To Enter a Water Material

1. Open the Materials form and create a new record one of the
following ways:

Notes: If water-to-water corrections are used:

• Set the Based On Factor and Correction Factor of the Secondary
Water to 1.00.
• Add a row to the Target Calculations form to correct 3 WAT for 3
WAT.

• If you want to be warned if the target goes below zero after targets have
been calculated, check the Warn If Negative box.
• Enter a Slump Factor of 1.0 for US systems or .20 for Metric.
• If the material can be trimmed on Batch Setup, enter a Default Trim Qty
and Trim Type. The Main water always uses the Default Qty (trim) from
the Plants form.
• Check the Update Trim box if you want the material’s Default Trim Qty to
be automatically updated with the last value used on Batch Setup.
• Check the Use Previous Trim box if you want the trim value used for the
material on the previous ticket to be used on the next ticket.

96 12/21/16
• Check the Use Previous Amount box if you want the Design or Based On
quantity from the previous ticket to be used on the next ticket.
• If dispatch tickets will be sending admix modifier data for the water,
select the External Modifier Type.
4. Select the Limits tab and make the following entries.
— Minimum and Maximum amounts allowed in a mix design.
— Minimum and Maximum allowable trim amounts.
5. Skip the Devices tab for now. You can come back to it after you
have assigned the material to a device.

Tip!
You can also wait to assign the material to a device when you
add the device on Batch Graphics.

6. Select the Batching tab and make the following entries.

• Leave the Batch This Material box checked.

Weighed Water Only:

• Check the Use Negative Tare box ONLY if you want the system to accept
any negative tare under the established tolerance.
Example:
Negative tolerance is set at -20 pounds. Target weight is 100 pounds. The
scale registers a 15-pound negative tare. For a Yes value (box checked),
the system delivers 115 pounds of material into the scale. For a No value
(box unchecked), the system delivers 100 pounds.

Weighed Water Only:

12/21/16 97
system delivers 85 pounds of material into the scale. For a No value (box
unchecked), the system delivers 100 pounds.

Weighed Water Only:

• DO NOT check the Record Over-Zero as Used box unless the bin or
storage device has “leaky” gates and you want to include the leaked
material in inventory.

Caution!
This method of compensation should only be used until the
leaky gates are repaired!

98 12/21/16
• Ignore the under- and over-percentages in the Total row. They only
pertain to aggregates and cements.
• For multi-batch loads (except for the last batch), you can enter a wider
tolerance range as either an Absolute or a Percentage of the target in the
Fast Batch row.
A single-batch load or the last batch of a multi-batch load disregards Fast
Batch tolerances and uses Normal, Small Batch, or Mid Batch size
tolerances, depending on the entries for each and on how tolerances are
calculated (on Percentage of Scale/Meter Capacity, or on Batch Size).
• In the Layer Finished row, you can enter an amount below which or a
percentage of the target where the feed cycle is considered complete,
prior to checking tolerances.
• Save your changes and close the Materials/Plants form.
9. On the Materials form, select the Groups tab and make the
following entries to ensure that target calculations and
operations such as ticket printing are performed on the material.
Standard entries are:

Water (Primary)
Target Calc = 3 WAT
Target Calc = 5 WATADX
Weights Calc = 3 WAT

Water (Secondary Water - Examples: Hot, Reclaim)

Target Calc = 3 WAT
Weights Calc = 3 WAT
10. Select the Options tab and make the following entries.
• Leave the Print on Ticket box checked.
• Leave the Discountable box checked if you want percentage discount
pricing applied.
• Leave the Saleable box unchecked.
• Leave the Ingredient box checked so the material can be used in mix
designs.
• Ignore the Returnable box.
• Leave the Track Inventory box checked if you want inventory levels of the
material to be tracked.
• Leave the Track Usage box checked if you want amounts of this material
used in batches to be recorded.
• Ignore the Name if Alt. UOM field.
• Ignore the Dispatch Item Type field.

12/21/16 99
• Ignore the Company field.
• Ignore the Usual Vendor field.
• Taxable field - Determines whether the material record or the order
controls the material’s taxability on the order.
Choices are:
— Taxable - material is taxable on the order, whether the order is
taxable or not.
— Non-Taxable - material is non-taxable on the order, whether the
order is taxable or not.
— From Ticket - the order controls the taxability of the material.
• In the Exceptions area, enter the taxable setting for any tax authorities
whose taxable setting overrides the Taxable field setting.
11. Select the Units tab and make the following entries.
• In the Internal field, select the unit for usage amounts. The Price,
Inventory, Report, Purchase, Order Unit, Delivered Unit, and Absolute
Unit fields are automatically set to this unit.

Order Entry Section

Mix Entry Section

• In the Absolute Unit field, select the default unit used when this material
is added to mix designs or selected on Batch Setup.

Note: This field is only editable if “Ingredient” is checked on the Options tab.

• In the Alternate field, select the default unit used when this material is
added to mix designs or selected on Batch Setup in the “alternate” unit of
measure (example: US or SI).

Note: This field is only editable if “Ingredient” is checked on the Options tab.

100 12/21/16
• In the Digits Right of Decimal Point field, enter how many digits will be
displayed to the right of the decimal point when this material is selected
in mix designs and on Batch Setup. Do the same for the Alternate field if
alternate units are used.
12. You can use the Notes tab to enter additional information about
the material. Otherwise, ignore this tab.
13. Save your changes so far.
14. Click the Locations button at the top right of the form to open the
Item Locations (Linked) form.
15. Ignore the Location tab unless you want to:
• record the Standard Cost to your company for one unit of the material.
- or -
• enter a Product Code (a name for the material specific to this location).
Defaults to the Material Code entered on the Materials form. You can also
enter a description and a short description in the Other Code field.
16. Select the Inventory tab and make the following entry:
• Minimum Qty - When the material’s inventory level is below this amount
and the material is batched, the quantity in the Material field of the Batch
Setup form is displayed in red text.

Note: Text color is specified on the User Extensions form, which is

accessed by clicking the Extensions button on the Users form.

The Minimum Qty unit defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.

12/21/16 101
17. Select the Pricing tab and make the following entries:
• Price Category - Specifies pricing for different situations such as retail
cash sales. Can be assigned at either the product or customer level.
Customer price categories override product price categories.
• Price - Price your company charges customers for one unit of the
material.
• per - Defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.
• Prev. Price - Price you last charged customers for one unit of the material.
• Effective - Date the Price is/was effective.
18. Save your changes and close the Item Locations form.
You will be asked if you want to save your changes.
19. Click Yes.
You are returned to the Materials form.
20. Save your changes and close the Materials form or enter another
material.
21. If you have not already done so, set up plant devices as explained
in the Plant_Device_Setup.pdf.
22. Go back to the Devices tab on the Materials form and make sure
the Active box is checked for the device currently assigned to the
material.
23. Save your changes and close the Materials form.

102 12/21/16
To Enter Other Products

Tip!
The easiest way to add a new material is to copy an existing material
that has similar properties (see To Copy an Other Product) and then
edit the new material for any information that is different.
However, if no materials exist in the database, you will need to
perform the following procedure.

1. Open the Other Products form and create a new record one of the
following ways:

• Click the New Record button on the toolbar at the top of the
COMMANDbatch screen
• or, click on a blank row in the grid on the left side of the form.
2. Enter the following information:
— Product code in the Product field (example: REBAR)
— Meaningful description in the Desc field (example: REBAR - 10 FT)
— Short description in the Short Desc field (example: Rebar)
3. Select the Options tab and make the following entries.
• Check the Print on Ticket box if you want the material code and
description printed at the top of delivery tickets. Uncheck this box for
items such as Haul or Environmental charges that you don’t want printed
at the top of delivery tickets.
• Check the Discountable box if you want percentage discount pricing
applied.
• Check the Saleable box.
• Leave the Returnable box unchecked.
• Check the Track Inventory box if you want inventory levels of the material
to be tracked.
• Check the Track Usage box if you want to record amounts of the material
sent with orders.
• If you operate in a multi-company environment, select the code for the
Company that ships the material.
• Taxable field - Determines whether the material record or the order
controls the material’s taxability on the order.
Choices are:
— From Ticket - the order controls the taxability of the material.

12/21/16 103
— Non-Taxable - material is non-taxable on the order, whether the
order is taxable or not.
— Taxable - material is taxable on the order, whether the order is
taxable or not.
• In the Usual Vendor field, select the vendor that normally supplies the
material.
• In the Exceptions area, enter the taxable setting for any tax authorities
whose taxable setting overrides the Taxable field setting.
4. Select the Units tab and make the following entries.
• In the Internal field, select the unit for usage amounts. The Price,
Inventory, Report, Purchase, Order Unit, and Delivered Unit fields are
automatically set to this unit.

Order Entry Section

Note: Fields in the Order Entry section of this tab are not editable unless
the “Saleable” box on the Options tab is checked.

• If the material can be sold as a separate product:

— Enter an Order Unit and its Alternate unit (if sold in the other
measurement system - US or Metric). The Order Unit defaults to the
Internal unit.
— Enter the Delivered Unit and its Alternate unit (if sold in the other
measurement system - US or Metric). The Delivered Unit defaults to
the Internal unit.
• Select a Del’d Qty Calc Type.
5. Ignore the Groups tab unless you are assigning the material to an
Extra Product Alert group.
Materials can be assigned to an Extra Product Alert group so that the
batch operator can be alerted when a ticket includes the extra product.
The Extra Product Group is assigned a color in the Alert Color field on the
Item Groups form. Then when the extra product is included on a ticket,
the label on the Ticket Setup tab of Batch Graphics is displayed in this
color.
6. You can use the Notes tab to enter additional information about
the material. Otherwise, ignore this tab.
7. Save your changes so far.
8. Click the Locations button at the top right of the form to open the
Item Locations (Linked) form.
9. Ignore the Location tab unless you want to:
• record the Standard Cost to your company for one unit of the material.

104 12/21/16
- or -
• enter a Product Code (a name for the material specific to this location).
Defaults to the Material Code entered on the Materials form. You can also
enter a description and a short description in the Other Code field.
10. Select the Inventory tab and make the following entry. Ignore the
other fields.
• Track Usage by - Shipped amounts of the material can be tracked by:
— Location
— Plant
The unit defaults to the Internal unit entered on the Other Products form.
11. Select the Pricing tab and make the following entries:
• Price Category - Specifies pricing for different situations such as retail
cash sales. Can be assigned at either the product or customer level.
Customer price categories override product price categories.
• Price - Price your company charges customers for one unit of the
material.
• per - Defaults to the Material’s Internal unit.
• Prev. Price - Price you last charged customers for one unit of the material.
• Effective - Date the Price is/was effective.
12. Save your changes and close the Item Locations form.
You will be asked if you want to save your changes.
13. Click Yes.
You are returned to the Other Products form.
14. Save your changes and close the Other Products form or enter
another material.

12/21/16 105
To Enter a Mix Design
If you must manually enter mix designs, follow the guidelines given in this
section.
Because mix designs determine the strength and makeup of concrete, they
are subject to quality control and governmental regulations.

Caution!
Only authorized personnel should create or modify mix
designs! Normally, mix designs are supplied by company QC
personnel or by an established third party vendor.

Materials should be added in the order in which they will be batched, but you
can use the Up and Down buttons at the bottom of the Mix Designs form to
rearrange the order.

1. Open the Mix Designs form and create a new record one of the
following ways:

— Click the New Record button on the toolbar at the top of the
COMMANDbatch screen,
— or, click on a blank row in the grid (list of records on the left).
2. Enter the following information:
— Mix code in the Mix field (example: 2500 SWL)
— Meaningful description in the Desc field (example: 2500 PSI WALL/
FOOTER)
— Short description in the Short Desc field (example: 2500 SWL)
— For EN 206 users, enter information in the Ext. Description field
about Strength Class, Exposure Class, Flow Class, Maximum
Aggregate Size, and Cement Type. This information defaults onto
Projects, Orders, and Tickets using this mix.
For non-EN 206 users, this field can be blank or used for entering
additional information.
— For EN 206 users, enter the EN 206 Consistence Class (S1, S2, etc.)
or Slump (in mm) in the Consistence field. This information defaults
onto Orders and Tickets using this mix.
3. On the Constituents tab, make the following entries:
— Material column - Select the material. Its description is displayed in
the Description column.
— Amount column - If the material’s target amount IS NOT based on
another material, enter the amount of the material required to make
one unit (cubic yard or cubic meter) of the mix design.

106 12/21/16
By default, the Unit column displays the material’s entry unit. See
Mix Entry Unit of Measure Defaults for more information.
— Based On column - If the material’s target amount IS based on
another material, enter the Based On amount and select a unit in
the next column.
— If a Standard Cost was entered on the Item/Locations form for the
material, that value defaults into the Cost column. This field is read-
only.
— Scroll to the right to see the Specific Gravity column. If the
material’s specific gravity was changed on the Mix Manager form,
that value defaults into this column. If Mix Manager is not used, the
specific gravity from the Materials form defaults into this column.
(Specific gravity is used for calculating a mix design's yield. It is also
used in slurry calculations.)
You can change the specific gravity in this column but it will not
change the specific gravity on the Materials form.
4. On the Qualities tab, make the following entries:
(At a minimum, you must enter a Design Slump, minimum and maximum
allowed slump values, and the type of moisture/absorption calculations.)
— Design Strength and unit - The unit defaults to the Default Strength
Unit specified on the System Parameters form.
— Days to Strength - Number of days the concrete must cure before it
reaches the Design Strength. 30 days is the default value.
— Air Content and unit - Percentage of free air trapped in the concrete
due to the gradation of aggregates. Used only for yield calculations.
— Min Temp and unit - Minimum temperature at which concrete
produced using the mix design can be poured. The unit defaults to
the Default Temperature Unit specified on the System Parameters
form.
— Design Slump / Consistence and unit - The consistency to which the
mix was designed. This value and its unit default in from the System
Parameters form. Choices for the unit are: in for US systems, mm
or cm for SI systems. If cm is selected, it is used for display
purposes only; it does not affect slump target adjustments.
— Min and Max Slump and units - The minimum and maximum slump
values that can be used without compromising the Water/Cement
Ratio of the mix. When batching the mix, if you enter a slump value
outside the min-max range, an error message prompts you to enter
a new slump value.
The Min and Max Slump units default to the units specified on the
System Parameters form.

12/21/16 107
— Slump Table - If Slump Tables are used, select the slump table to be
attached to the mix design. If a slump table is selected here,
standard linear slump calculations will not be used.
— Consistence Group - If a material in the mix design is used for Auto-
Consistence Control, select the consistence control group in this
field.
— Target Wat/Cem Ratio - For informational purposes only. You can
enter the Water/Cement Ratio you would like the mix design to
achieve. This value is not used in target calculations.
— Max (Wat/Cem Ratio) - Maximum allowed Water/Cement Ratio for
the mix design. If this maximum ratio is exceeded when the mix is
prepared on the Batch Setup form, a warning message is displayed
and the Water Cement Ratio field on the Batch Setup form is
displayed with a red background.
— Min and Max Cement and unit - Minimum and maximun amount of
cement allowed in the mix design, based on the Internal unit of
measure for cement.
5. On the Batching tab, make the following entries:
— Batch - Check this box to allow the mix to be batched. If this box is
not checked, the mix cannot be batched, but it can be printed on a
ticket. In this case, the system changes the Load Status to 7
(Done). Also, if an order contains a mix with the Batch option not
checked, auto add items will not be printed on the ticket.
— Allow Modify - This option allows/disallows the batch person to
modify the mix design on the Batch Setup form. (Even if this box is
checked, the batch person can only modify those materials that
have their “Allow Mix Modify” boxes checked on the Materials form.)
— Disable Ticket - This option allows/disallows a ticket to be printed
when the mix design is used in a batch. An example is a washout
mix that is batched but does not need a delivery ticket.
— Water Trim and unit - Amount of trim you want displayed in the
Water Trim field of the Batch Setup form when this mix is batched.
Leave this field blank if you want Batch Setup to use the Default
Trim value entered on the Plants form. (Trim refers to the amount of
water that can be added or subtracted per “yard” or “cubic meter”.)
— Enter the trim UOM just to the right of the Water Trim value.
Examples are gl for US systems and L for Metric systems.
— The internal UOM appears just to the right of the trim UOM. This
field is read-only and defaults in from the Internal field of the Units
tab of this same form. Examples are gl for US systems and m3 for
Metric systems.

108 12/21/16
— Special Alias - Used only when COMMANDbatch is interfaced to a
HydroControl IV* moisture control system. In this case, enter the 3-
character alias used by the moisture control system.
* HydroControl IV is a registered trademark of Hydronix Ltd.
— Moisture Calculation Method - Type of moisture and absorption
calculations to be used by the mix design. Choices are:
SSD
With this moisture method, aggregate weights are entered in their
SSD (Saturated Surface Dry) weights and water is entered as as
free water. It is assumed that aggregates entered this way do not
absorb or contribute water, thus having a moisture compensation
value of 0. Actual moisture content could be anywhere from 1% to
3% above “bakeout” or “bone-dry” weight.
Oven Dry
With this moisture method, each aggregate is entered in its absolute
dry weight and water is entered as free water plus absorbed water
in the aggregates. The water target is increased by the amount of
absorbed water needed to bring the aggregate up to its SSD
(Saturated Surface Dry) weight.
MnDOT Oven Dry
With this moisture method, each aggregate is entered in its
absorbed dry weight and water is entered as free water.
Comparison of moisture methods:

Moisture Method Aggregate Water

SSD 1000 lbs 100 gl
Oven Dry 990 lbs 110 gl
MnDOT Oven Dry 990 lbs 100 gl

(See the MoistProbe_CMDbatch.pdf for more information.)

— Mix Entry Type - Read-only field. Types are Standard and
Temporary.
Standard appears for any mix designs created on the Mix Designs
form.
Mix designs created from batchbooks are assigned a Temporary
mix entry type. To view Temporary mix designs, press <F4>, select
“Temporary” in the Mix Entry Type field, then press <F4> again.
— Plant - When you create a new mix, the system automatically
assigns your current plant (as defined by the Change Plants form).
If there are other plants that can batch this mix, add them here.
— Max Batch value and unit - Enter the maximum batch size for the
mix design at the selected plant. If a load size exceeds this limit, the

12/21/16 109
system divides the load into 2 or more batches. The unit defaults to
the Internal UOM for the mix design.
— Mixing Time - Minimum amount of time (in seconds) needed for a
properly blended mix. This time determines the point at which the
load is ready to be dumped from the mixer. If the sequence used for
the mix design includes a mixer device, this field defaults to the
mixing time specified on the Mixers form. If the sequence does not
include a mixer device, this field defaults to zero. The unit defaults
to seconds.
— Sequence - If the mix design uses a particular sequence, select the
sequence code. This field is blank by default.
6. On the Options tab, make the following entries:
— Print On Ticket - Check this box if you want the mix code and
description printed at the top of delivery tickets. If you uncheck this
box, the mix code and description will not be printed.
— Discountable - Check this box to apply volume discount pricing to
customers ordering the mix design.
— Saleable - Check this box if the mix design can be sold as a single
product. (When this box is checked, fields in the Order Entry section
of the Units tab are editable. When this box is unchecked, these
fields are grayed out and are not editable.)
— Ignore the Returnable and Track Usage boxes and the Name if Alt.
UOM, and Dispatch Item Type fields.
— Company field - In a multi-company configuration, select the
company for this mix design. If there is only one company, the field
defaults to “01”.
— Taxable field - Determines whether the mix design or the order
controls the mix design’s taxability on the order.
Choices are:
From Ticket - the order controls the taxability of the mix design.
Non-Taxable - mix design is non-taxable on the order, whether the
order is taxable or not.
Taxable - mix design is taxable on the order, whether the order is
taxable or not.
— Tax Authority - Select the tax authority that has jurisdiction in the
tax code (region) where this mix design is sold.
The taxable setting for a tax authority (and used in an order)
overrides the mix design’s individual taxable setting.
— Taxability - Select the taxability of the mix design for the selected
tax authority. This field works the same way as the Taxable field,
except only for the designated tax authority.

110 12/21/16
— Max Agg size - Maximum size of aggregate that can be used in the
mix design (example: 57). This field accepts numeric values only.
— Cement Type - Type of cement that must be used in the mix design
(example: Portland).
7. On the Units tab, make the following entries:
— Internal unit - Unit of measure for the storage of usage amounts.
— Price unit - Unit of measure used when pricing the mix design (per
unit) for a customer. Defaults to the Internal unit.
— Cost unit - Unit of measure used when assigning a cost per unit to
the mix design. Defaults to the Internal unit.
— Report unit - Unit of measure used for displaying amounts of the
mix design on reports. Defaults to the Internal unit.
Order Entry Section
Mix designs are sold as single products, meaning the Saleable box
on the Options tab is checked by default so that you can edit the
following fields.
— Order Unit - Entry unit used when this mix is included on an order.
Defaults to the Internal unit.
— Alternate (for Order Unit) - Entry unit used when this mix is included
on an order using the alternate measurement system (US or
Metric).
(Tip: If an alternate unit is selected, you can convert all units for the
mix design to units in the alternate measurement system by clicking
the Convert button.)
— Ignore the Delivered Unit, Alternate, and the Del’d Qty Calc Type
field. (The Del’d Qty Calc Type field defaults to Normal: Order sets
Load Size, meaning the load size defaults to the smaller of the
entered load size or the unshipped balance of the mix product on
the order. This prevents shipping more than the ordered quantity.)
— Rounding Method: Rounding method to be used for calculations.
Choices are:
Down, Round Down to nearest Integer
No, Do not round - this is the default
Up, Round Up to nearest Integer
8. Ignore the Groups tab unless you want to create mix design
groups for informational purposes. For example, all mixes used
for footers could be assigned to a group called “Footer”.
(Currently, mix design groups are not used in COMMANDbatch.)
9. You can use the Notes tab to enter additional information about
the mix design. Otherwise, ignore this tab.

12/21/16 111
10. Save your changes so far.
11. Click the Locations button at the top right of the form to open the
Item Locations (Linked) form.
12. Ignore the Location tab unless you want to:
— record the Standard Cost to your company for one unit of the mix, in
addition to the sum of all material costs.
- or -
— enter a Product Code (a name for the mix design specific to this
location). Defaults to the Mix Code entered on the Mix Designs form.
You can also enter a description and a short description in the Other
Code field.
13. On the Inventory tab, select the “Track Usage by” type: either
Plant or Location. Plant is the default. The unit defaults to the
Internal unit specified on the Mix Designs form.
14. On the Pricing tab, make the following entries:
— Price Category - Price categories (or levels) must be defined for
products that can be sold on an order. This includes setting a price
for each category (level). If this is not done, pricing may not be
correct.
— Price - Price your company charges customers for one unit of the
mix design.
— per - Defaults to the Mix Entry unit specified on the System
Parameters form.
— Prev. Price - Price you last charged customers for one unit of the
admix design.
— Effective - Date the Price is/was effective.
15. Save your changes and close the Item Locations form.
16. Click Yes. You are returned to the Mix Designs form.
17. Close the Mix Designs form or enter another mix design.

112 12/21/16
To Enter an Admix Design
If you must manually enter admix designs, follow the guidelines given in this
section.
Admix designs are a convenient way to add seasonal items such as calcium to
mixes on an “as needed” basis.
Admix designs never appear by themselves on the ticket; rather, they are
added to an order to modify the mix design. Admix items appear as additional
constituents in the mix on the ticket.

Caution!
Only authorized personnel should create admix designs.
Normally, admix designs are supplied by company QC
personnel or by an established third party vendor.

1. Open the Admix Designs form and create a new record one of the
following ways:

— Click the New Record button on the toolbar at the top of the
COMMANDbatch screen,
— or, click on a blank row in the grid (list of records on the left).
2. Enter the following information at the top of the form:
— Admix code in the Admix field
— Meaningful description in the Desc field
— Short description in the Short Desc field
3. On the Constituents tab, make the following entries:
— Material column - Select the material. Its description is displayed in
the Description column.
— Amount column - If the material’s target amount IS NOT based on
another material, enter the amount of the material required to make
one unit (cubic yard or cubic meter) of the mix design.
By default, the material’s entry unit is displayed in the Unit column.
See Mix Entry Unit of Measure Defaults for more information.
— Based On column - If the material’s target amount IS based on
another material, enter the Based On amount and select a unit in
the next column.
Example:
To batch one unit of Calcium per 100 weight of cement, enter 1 in
the Based On column and select /C in the unit column.

12/21/16 113
— (Trim column - If the admix design can be trimmed at batch time,
enter the amount or percentage. This value defaults onto the Trim
column of the Batch Setup form when a ticket is created.
— Unit column - Enter the trim unit or percentage.
4. On the Options tab, make the following entries:
— Print On Ticket - Check this box if you want the admix design code
and description printed at the top of delivery tickets. If you uncheck
this box, the mix code and description will not be printed.
— Discountable - Check this box to apply volume discount pricing to
customers ordering the admix design.
— Saleable - Check this box if the admix design can be sold as a single
product. (When this box is checked, fields in the Order Entry section
of the Units tab are editable. When this box is unchecked, these
fields are grayed out and are not editable.)
— Ignore the Returnable and Track Usage boxes and the Name if Alt.
UOM, and Dispatch Item Type fields.
— Company field - In a multi-company configuration, select the
company for this admix design. If there is only one company, the
field defaults to “01”.
— Taxable field - Determines whether the admix design or the order
controls the admix design’s taxability on the order.
Choices are:
From Ticket - the order controls the taxability of the admix design.
Non-Taxable - admix design is non-taxable on the order, whether
the order is taxable or not.
Taxable - admix design is taxable on the order, whether the order
is taxable or not.
— Taxability - Select the taxability of the admix design for the selected
tax authority. This field works the same way as the Taxable field,
except only for the designated tax authority.
— Tax Authority - Select the tax authority that has jurisdiction in the
tax code (region) where this admix design is sold.
— The taxable setting for a tax authority (and used on an order)
overrides the admix design’s individual taxable setting.
5. On the Units tab, make the following entries:
— Internal unit - Unit of measure for the storage of usage amounts.
— Price unit - Unit of measure used when pricing the admix design
(per unit) for a customer. Defaults to the Internal unit.
— Cost unit - Unit of measure used when assigning a cost per unit to
the admix design. Defaults to the Internal unit.

114 12/21/16
— Report unit - Unit of measure used for displaying amounts of the
admix design on reports. Defaults to the Internal unit.
Order Entry Section
Admix designs are sold as single products, meaning the Saleable
box on the Options tab is checked by default so that you can edit the
following fields.
— Order Unit - Entry unit used when the admix is included on an order.
Defaults to the Internal unit.
— Alternate (for Order Unit) - Entry unit used when the admix is
included on an order using the alternate measurement system (US
or Metric). (Tip: If an alternate unit is selected, you can convert all
units for the admix design to units in the alternate measurement
system by clicking the Convert button.)
— Ignore the Delivered Unit, Alternate (for Delivered Unit), and the
Del’d Qty Calc Type fieldS.
— Del’d Qty Calc Type - Controls the manner in which load sizes for the
admix are calculated.
Typically, admix designs are assigned a Del’d Qty Calc Type of
Based on Mix Qty, meaning the load size determines how much
admix is added.
If Dosed from Material Qty is selected, the Dosage Calculations
button becomes active. Click this button to access the Dose
Calculation form where you can specify the amount of admix to be
added to an Order/Ticket for each unit of the CEM group.
— Rounding Method - Rounding method to be used for internal
calculations.
Choices are:
Down, Round Down to nearest Integer
No, Do not round - this is the default
Up, Round Up to nearest Integer
6. Ignore the Groups tab unless you want to create admix design
groups for informational purposes. For example, admixes that
contain Calcium could be assigned to a group called “Calcium”.
(Currently, admix design groups are not used in COMMANDbatch.)
7. You can use the Notes tab to enter additional information about
the admix design. Otherwise, ignore this tab.
8. Save your changes so far.
9. Click the Locations button at the top right of the form to open the
Item Locations (Linked) form.
10. Ignore the Location tab unless you want to:

12/21/16 115
— record the Standard Cost to your company for one unit of the mix, in
addition to the sum of all material costs.
- or -
— enter a Product Code (a name for the admix design specific to this
location). Defaults to the Admix Code entered on the Admix Designs
form. You can also enter a description and a short description in the
Other Code field.
11. On the Item Locations form’s Inventory tab, select the “Track
Usage by” type: either Plant or Location. Plant is the default. The
unit defaults to the Internal unit specified on the Admix Designs
form.
12. On the Item Locations form’s Pricing tab, make the following
entries:
— Price Category - Price categories (or levels) must be defined for
products that can be sold on an order. This includes setting a price
for each category (level). If this is not done, pricing may not be
correct.
— Price - Price your company charges customers for one unit of the
admix design.
— per - Defaults to the Mix Entry unit specified on the System
Parameters form.
— Prev. Price - Price you last charged customers for one unit of the
admix design.
— Effective - Date the Price is/was effective.
13. Save your changes and close the Item Locations form.
14. Click Yes. You are returned to the Admix Designs form.
15. Close the Admix Designs form or enter another admix design.

116 12/21/16
To Copy a Material
1. Open the Materials form.

2. In the grid at the left of the form, select the material or other
product to copy.
3. Click the Materials menu at the top of the COMMANDbatch screen
and select “Copy”.

The following window is displayed.

4. In the New Item field, enter a name for the new mix design.
5. By default, the Prices and Groups boxes are checked so that
Prices and Groups will be copied to the new record. If you don’t
want to copy prices and/or groups, uncheck the appropriate
box(es).
6. By default, the Include UOM Conversions box is checked so that
UOM (Unit of Measure) Conversions will be copied to the new
record. If you don’t want to copy UOM Conversions, uncheck this
box.
7. By default, “All” is selected for Locations and Plants. If you only
want the record copied to your current location or plant, check
the appropriate “Current” box.
8. Click OK. A mix design record is created with the new name.

12/21/16 117
To Copy an Other Product
1. Open the Other Products form.

2. In the grid at the left of the form, select the product to copy.
3. Click the Other Products menu at the top of the COMMANDbatch
screen and select “Copy”.

The following window is displayed.

4. In the New Item field, enter a name for the new product.
5. To copy Prices from the old record to the new one, check the
“Prices” box.
6. To copy Groups from the old record to the new one, check the
“Groups” box.
7. To use the same item-specific UOM’s (Units of Measure) as the old
record, check the Include UOM Conversions box.
8. To copy the new product to all Locations, leave the “All” box
checked. To copy to just the current location, check the “Current”
box.
9. Click OK. A record is created with the new name.
You can now edit the new product as needed.

118 12/21/16
To Enter an Item-Specific Unit Conversion Factor
After materials have been entered into the database, authorized personnel
can enter item-specific conversion factors.

Definition:
Item-specific conversion factors convert one unit to another for a particular
item, whereas standard conversion factors convert one unit to another for all
items.

Example:
You would enter a conversion factor for Water, which is in lbs, to convert ‘lbs’
to ‘gl’ for moisture calculations of an aggregate.
Item Unit Conversion for Water

Procedure:

1. Open the Materials form and select the appropriate item record.

2. Click the Unit Conversion button on the Units tab.

Unit conversion records for the selected item are displayed on the Unit
Conversions form.
3. On a new line just below the last conversion record, click in the
Multiply column and select the appropriate unit from the drop-
down list.
4. Tab to the By column and enter the appropriate factor.
5. Tab to the To Get column and select the appropriate unit from the
drop-down list.
6. Ignore the System UOM column because this field is read-only.
7. Save your changes.

12/21/16 119
Material-Device Assignments - Checking

Before you start running batches, it is a good idea to make sure materials are
assigned to the correct devices. To do this, open the Device Assignments
form, which allows you to see at a glance any changes you need to make to
material-device mappings.

• The form is accessed by selecting Form > Run, selecting Device

Assignments and clicking OK (or pressing <Enter>).
• You can sort any column on this form by clicking on the column name at
the top of the form.
• You can edit a material by right clicking on the material in the Material
column and selecting “Details”. The Materials form opens and is filtered
so that only the selected material record is displayed.
• You can edit a device by right clicking on the device in the Device column
and selecting “Details”. The appropriate device form opens and is filtered
so that only the selected device record is displayed.
• You can also access device forms by clicking the appropriate button on
the right side of the form.

120 12/21/16
Auto-Batching

The following topics explain how to prepare and run automatic batches.

Tip!
If you batch loads from orders, see the Order Entry Setup & User
Guide or the online help for the Orders form.

Topics
Batching Overview
Batch Bar Buttons and Connection Statuses
Load Statuses
Logging Manual Events When a Connection Goes Down
Preparing a Batch
Adjusting Batch Information BEFORE Load Start
Trimming Materials
To Start a Load
To Start a Load from a Current Load
Low Inventory Can Be Used to Prevent Load Start
Idle Time Reconciliation Alarm (Optional)
Reconciling a Dry Up Load
Confirm Tolerance
Inventory Recordation When Manual Feeds Occur During Auto-Batching
To Hold/Resume Batching
To Abort a Load
Adjusting Batch Information AFTER Load Start
To Start Discharge
Reprinting a Ticket
Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge
Freewheeling
To Change Materials
Performing Washout
To Copy a Ticket on Batch Setup

12/21/16 121
Batching Overview
In general, the system attempts, first, to Fast Feed then Timed Feed and,
finally, Jog Feed to arrive as close as possible to the requested Target. During
each “feed type,” the system makes calculations based on parameters and
previously learned information for the feed type.
The two major cycles involved in running a batch are:
Batching Cycle
Discharge Cycle

Batching Cycle
In this cycle, materials are weighed or metered into scales, holding hoppers,
or bottles.

Topics in This Section

Preact
Fast Feed
Timed Feed
Jog Feed
Drop Record
Multi-Batching
Sequence
All materials for each scale or meter, except for those that are metered
directly into the truck or mixer, are batched into their respective scales,
hoppers, or bottles during the Batching Cycle. To batch manually, you must
feed one material at a time. To batch automatically, however, you call up pre-
defined mix designs then let the system control feeding, weigh-up, and
discharge.
Scales and admix bottles should be empty. Each scale should be within a
range of true zero (an amount between the Over Zero Tolerance and Under
Zero Tolerance values set on the Scales screen). Zero Tolerance is not used
for admixes. Admix holding bottles normally send “bottle empty” signals back
to COMMANDbatch to indicate they are ready.
Here are some common terms used in automatic batching. For a list of more
terms, see the Glossary of Terms at the end of this document.

Preact
In a typical gravity-fed batch plant, the feeding of aggregate material is
stopped at a point short of the target weight to compensate for airborne
material that has not reached the scale. This is referred to as Preact.
Example:

122 12/21/16
If the end target is 1000 pounds, and 100 pounds of free fall material is
anticipated, the Preact value would be 100.
The column of airborne material grows shorter as the pile in the scale grows
taller – meaning Preact is smaller for large batch sizes.

Fast Feed
Fast Feed is the process of feeding material at a faster flow rate as long as the
target has not been reached and there is sufficient time to stop Fast Feed well
short of the target to account for Preact (airborne material that has not yet
reached the scale).
Before Fast Feed starts, a “Safe Target” is calculated by adding the requested
Target to the Scale Start Tare then subtracting the Jitter Amount (for Fast
Feed). The Safe Target is less than the requested Target, so that fast feeding
does not overshoot the requested Target.

Note: If no Preact Override is set and a learned Preact is not available,

the Default Preact value is used.

Fast Feed begins if Fast Feed is enabled for the bin and the Safe Target is
greater than the Min. Amt. to Fast Feed value. Initially, Fast Feed conditionally
opens multiple gates and continuously monitors the scale for the amount left
to feed. When the amount left to feed reaches the Shut Extra Gate Early
Amount value (if enabled), the extra gates are closed. The first gate is closed
when the Safe Target value is reached.

Note: When a feed's Safe Target - Preact is less than the Min. Amt. to
Fast Feed value, Fast Feed is skipped and the system goes
directly to Timed Feed.

Timed Feed
A timed opening of a single gate for a time duration based on historical Drop
Records. Timed Feed starts after Fast Feed has completed and the amount left
to feed is still well short of the target.
If Timed Feed is enabled and the amount left to feed is greater than the Min.
Amt. to Fast Feed value, the system calculates a time duration to open the
gate.
As with Fast Feed, a Safe Target is calculated based on the amount left to feed
minus the Jitter Amount (for Timed Feed) and Jitter Percent. Multiple Timed
Feeds can occur up to the Maximum Number of Timed Feeds value.

Note: When a feed's Safe Target is less than the Min. Amount to
(Timed) Feed value, Timed Feed is skipped and the system goes
directly to Jog Feed.

12/21/16 123
Jog Feed
Jog Feed is typically used for aggregates and cements and opens and closes
the gate enough to allow small jog bites of material to fall through. The time
duration the gate opens and closes depends on the Jog Target Amount, Jog
Open Time and Jog Delay Time values.
The system automatically adjusts the Jog Open Time by the Jog Adjust Time
to achieve the Jog Target Amount. If a jog occurs, but not enough material is
fed, the Jog Time is increased by the Jog Time Adjust amount. If too much
material is fed, the Jog Time is decreased by the Jog Time Adjust amount.
Below is an example of how the Jog Time (in the Time/Preact column below)
could be adjusted during Jog Feed with a Jog Adjust Time of 20 milliseconds.

Jog Feed can start if ALL of the following are true:

• Jog Feed is enabled.
• Fast and/or Timed Feed finishes without getting the material to target
(i.e. the target is below both the Min. Amt. to Fast Feed and the Min.
Amount to Timed Feed).
• The Maximum Number of Jogs is a non-zero value.

Drop Record
A database record containing historical information about a particular material
feed, including feed type, feed time, preact (freefall) amount, drop and actual
target, and beginning and ending amount in the device.

Multi-Batching
Some plants must make several small batches because of limited batching
capacity. To solve this problem, COMMANDbatch divides a load into smaller
batches if the load amount exceeds the maximum load size for the plant.
Once started, batching continues until the entire load is batched.

Sequence
A sequence defines the order in which feeding and discharge occur for
devices used to batch a load of concrete. The sequence specifies when devices
start and stop, as well as the quantity of material that should be fed. Only one
primary sequence code can be used at a time. For example, if your plant
consists of a “wet” side and a “dry” side, you would use a separate sequence

124 12/21/16
for each side. The wet sequence would be assigned to wet mix designs, and
the dry sequence to dry mixes.
Typically, the batch control software is shipped with template-type wet, dry,
and normal sequences (abbreviated as W, D, and N, respectively). This
makes it easier for the installer to modify these sequences to suit your plant’s
needs.
A sequence consists of steps stored as Start, Stop/Hold, and Quantity
equations. Each equation consists of conditions listed in a particular order.
For example, you might enter the following conditions for the AGG_SCALE
Start step:
When (Item Group) 3 Wat is 20% From end on Every batch
And (I/O point) BELT RUNIN is ON
What this step is saying is that the Aggregate scale will discharge whenever
all the waters have fed 80% of their combined targets AND the aggregate
conveyor belt is running.

Notes:
• A step condition may be implied. For example, a missing Start condition/
step can imply that the feed will start when the load starts, or as soon as
the device is ready.
• Only qualified personnel can create or edit sequences. For these reasons,
this User Guide does not discuss how to create sequences. If you have
questions about sequencing, please contact your manager or Quality
Control representative, or call the Command Alkon Service Department.

12/21/16 125
Discharge Cycle
In this cycle, scales and bottles are discharged into a truck or mixer, and
direct-metered admixes and water are added.

Topics in This Section

Choke Feeding
Inching Discharge
After all materials with holding facilities (scales, bottles, or holding hoppers)
have been weighed up, they can be discharged into a truck or mixer.
Assuming there are no problems, initial water is fed, then the remaining
materials are discharged in the order established in the sequence set for the
mix design. Several discharge and system parameters control the discharge
rate. Discharge continues until there is a certain amount of material left in
each scale. At this point, the gates open fully and the vibrators come on to
clear hung-up material. When each scale reaches its zero point (Scale Empty
value), its gate is held open for a set amount of time, then closed. Remaining
water is then fed. When all devices are empty, an end-of-load signal is
generated.
There are two kinds of discharge:

Choke Feeding
With Choke Feeding, the gates are held fully open until the scales are empty.
Choke Feeding is used when the truck or mixer can handle very fast discharge
rates.

Inching Discharge
With Inching Discharge, the gates are pulsed open and closed to create a
smooth flow of material from the scales. Inching Discharge helps to avoid
overflowing the truck or mixer. To avoid overflowing a truck, you can assign a
percentage of the discharge rate to the truck. The discharge rate is then
automatically reduced to what the truck can handle.

126 12/21/16
Batch Bar Buttons and Connection Statuses
The buttons at the top-right of the COMMANDbatch window:

• Allow you to perform batching operations such as putting the system on

hold, taking the system off hold, starting discharge (loading), starting/
stopping Continuous Run and Continuous Discharge, and aborting a
batch.

• Display the plant code and number of queued loads.

• Show how many loads are queued up (prepared for batching).

Some of the batch bar buttons flash light yellow when clicked then change to
another color once the appropriate operation starts. The Hold button, for
example, flashes light yellow then turns red. The Abort button works a little
differently. It flashes bright yellow then becomes grayed out to indicate the
load has been stopped.

Batch Bar Buttons and Indicators

12/21/16 127
Batch Bar Buttons and Indicators - Described

Button/
Description
Indicator

Shows the current status of the DTNS connection.

If the connection is up, the indicator is green. If the connection is
down, the indicator is red.
See Also: Logging Manual Events When a Connection Goes Down

Shows the current status of the DTNS connection to the RTC.

While the RTC is initializing, the indicator is yellow. When the
connection is up, the indicator turns green. If the connection goes
down, the indicator turns red.
See Also: Logging Manual Events When a Connection Goes Down
Note:
In order for the RTC connection to be up, the DTNS connection must
also be up.

Shows the status of the Station connection(s). A Station connection

is any Manual Station or configured control unit (J-Box, PWS, etc.).
If all connections are up, the indicator is green.
If any Manual Station connection goes down, the indicator turns red.
If any J-Box connection goes down, the indicator turns yellow.

To see which Station(s) is/are down, click on the icon. This action
opens the Interface Parameters form which displays Up or Down in
the Status field for each Station record.
See Also: Logging Manual Events When a Connection Goes Down
Note:
In order for the Station connection to be up, the DTNS and RTC
connections must also be up.

Shows the 2-digit Plant Code (example: 01).

If the Manual Station connection is up, this indicator is displayed in
the color assigned to the plant. If the Manual Station connection is
down, this indicator is red.
See Also: Logging Manual Events When a Connection Goes Down

Used for Continuous Run (running the same batch over and over).
This button must be enabled on the Plants form. When this button is
enabled and a batch is running, you can click this button to start
Continuous Run. When clicked, the button turns cyan (a bluish color).
Click the button again to stop Continuous Run. The button turns back
to gray.

128 12/21/16
Button/
Description
Indicator

Shows how many loads are queued up (prepared for batching). Up to

three loads can be queued up. Numbers that can displayed: 0, 1, 2, or
3. “0” is displayed when no loads are queued.

Use this button to take the entire system off hold and resume
batching.
When no batches are running, this button is labeled Resume and is
grayed out. When a batch is started or the system is taken off hold
during a batch, the label changes to Running and the button is
highlighted in green.
When a batch is finished, the button label changes back to Resume
and is grayed out.

Use this button to put the entire system on hold.

When this button is clicked, it flashes light yellow then turns red to
indicate that the system is in hold and that all batching functions have
stopped. Also it’s label changes to Held.
Click the Resume button to take the system off hold.

Used for Continuous Discharge. Continuous Discharge is typically

used in block plants where product is continually batched and
discharged into forms. For most ready mix operations, Continuous
Discharge is not used because discharge is not initiated until a truck is
in place.
Until Continuous Discharge is enabled (on the Plants form), this
button’s label is grayed out. When clicked, the button turns cyan (a
bluish color).
Once Continuous Discharge is enabled and a batch is ready to
discharge, click this button to start discharge immediately.

Use this button to arm discharge. You can do this while the batch is
weighing up. When clicked, this button flashes light yellow then turns
green. Also the button label changes to “Loading”. After the batch is
done, the button is grayed out until another load is started.

12/21/16 129
Button/
Description
Indicator

Use this button to stop all batching functions for the current and any
queued batches.
CAUTION!
This operation cannot be undone! Once aborted, the batch cannot be
restarted!
When a load is started, this button is displayed in red text.
When this button is clicked during a load, the following happens:
• The Hold button is displayed in red. Its name changes to Held.
• Devices currently feeding alternately flash between their normal color and
gray.
• The following confirmation box appears.

Abort Confirmation Box

• Click OK to complete the abort; Click No to cancel.

(See the online help for details about configuring/customizing Batch

Graphics.)

130 12/21/16
Load Statuses
The following table describes the load statuses that a batch goes through from
time it is started until it is finished. Load statuses can be used in the format
string for a scoreboard to tell it when to display or remove truck numbers.

Status Description
0 LOAD_PRECREATE
(before the load has been started)
1 LOAD_CREATE
(happens quickly - between the time you click the
“Start” button and the batch is actually started)
2 LOAD_REQUEST
(happens quickly - between the time you click the
“Start” button and the batch is actually started)
3 LOAD_START
(when the load has been started)
4 LOAD_WEIGH
(when feeds are done, prior to discharging scales and
bottles into truck or mixer)
5 LOAD_DISCH
(when discharge from scales and bottles has started)
6 LOAD_MIX
(when all materials have discharged into the truck or
mixer)
7 LOAD_DONE
(when the load is complete)

12/21/16 131
Logging Manual Events When a Connection Goes Down
If the keyswitch on the E-Z CAL Manual Station is used to turn manual power
on/off (as opposed to using the Manual Power button) AND the E-Z CAL is
used with COMMANDbatch, a SYSTEM UP Custom Equation must be created
for one of the following (not both):
SYSTEM UP Custom Equation for RTC Connection Only
-- OR --
SYSTEM UP Custom Equation for ALL Connections
Once this is done, if any connection goes down, SYSTEM UP is turned off and
only manual batches can be run using the keyswitch.

SYSTEM UP Custom Equation for RTC Connection Only

The following SYSTEM UP Custom Equation is used by default and should
already be set up. Still, you should verify that it exists and is configured as
described next.

1. Open the Custom Equations form and add a record called SYSTEM
UP.
• In the Output IO Code field, type SYSTEM UP.
• In the Action Type field, select “Equal”.
• In the Condition Code column, enter “1”.
2. Save your changes.
The SYSTEM UP Custom Equation should look like the following example.

132 12/21/16
SYSTEM UP Custom Equation for ALL Connections
If the default SYSTEM UP Custom Equation that is used for the RTC connection
only does not meet your business needs, create a SYSTEM UP custom
equation for ALL critical connections as described below.

1. In COMMANDbatch, open the IO Assignments form and select the

E-Z CAL Manual Station record in the grid at the left.

2. Click on the Global tab and create a Global IO called COMM

ERROR.

3. Save the new Global IO.

You will be prompted to restart the RTC.
4. Click “Restart Now”.
The RTC reboots.
(You can move on to step 5 while the reboot takes place.)
5. Open the Custom Equations form and add a record called SYSTEM
UP if it does not already exist.
• In the Output IO Code field, type SYSTEM UP (or verify that it exists).
• In the Action Type field, select “Equal”.
• In the Inverse column, select “!”. (This means NOT.)
• In the Condition Code column, select the COMM ERROR global IO.
6. Save your changes.

12/21/16 133
The SYSTEM UP Custom Equation should look like the following example.

134 12/21/16
Preparing a Batch

Tip!
If this is the first time you have prepared a batch, you should
also read:
Adjusting Batch Information BEFORE Load Start
Adjusting Batch Information AFTER Load Start

Topics in This Section:

To Create a Ticket (with no Order)
To Create a Ticket (from an Order)

Note: You can only batch orders for previous and future dates if the
“Allow Ticket Past Order” and “Allow Ticket Future Order” boxes are
checked on the User Extensions form for your user context.

To Create a Ticket (with no Order)

Tickets can be created directly from the Batch Setup form. These kinds of
tickets are not associated with an order.

1. On the Batch Setup form, select a customer in the Customer field.

2. Tab to the Load Size field and enter the load size.
3. Tab to the Mix field and select a mix design. As soon as you do
this and tab to the next field, the following occurs:
— The materials included in the mix design are displayed on the Mix
tab.
— Target weights are calculated and automatically entered in the
Target column on the Mix tab.
4. Tab to the Truck field and select a truck.
5. If a driver other than the one assigned to the truck will be used,
enter the new driver in the Driver field.
6. If the truck cannot handle 100 percent of the plant’s discharge
rate, enter the appropriate percentage in the Rate field.
7. Normally, you are finished entering data at this point, unless a
different sequence code will be used. If this is the case, select the
Sequence field and select the appropriate code. (See the
Sequences form help and the SequenceSetup.pdf for more
information.)

12/21/16 135
8. If you are going to batch the load now, click the Start button at
the top of the Batch Setup form.

Tip!
You can create more tickets before you batch this one. To do this,
click on a new row in the grid on the left side of the Batch Setup
form and repeat steps 1 through 8.

To Create a Ticket (from an Order)

The Orders form is used for creating tickets in this manner. Individual tickets
can be created and transferred directly to the Batch Setup form for batching,
or several “quick tickets” can be created and queued up on the Batch Setup
form for batching at a later time.

Note: This procedure assumes the order has already been entered. (For
details about entering orders, see the help for the Orders form.)

1. Open the Batch Setup form.

2. Open the Orders form and select the appropriate order.

3. Click the Batch Setup button in the top right corner of the Orders
form. A ticket is created from the order and appears on the Batch
Setup form.
4. On the Batch Setup form, verify the load size and mix.
5. In the Truck field, select a truck.
6. If a driver other than the one assigned to the truck will be used,
enter the new driver in the Driver field.
7. If the truck cannot handle 100 percent of the plant’s discharge
rate, enter the appropriate percentage in the Rate field.
8. Normally, you are finished entering data at this point, unless a
different sequence code will be used. If this is the case, select the
Sequence field and select the appropriate code. (See the
Sequences form help and the SequenceSetup.pdf for more
information.)
9. Do one of the following:
• To batch the load now, click the Start button at the top of the Batch
Setup form.
• To queue up another load before you batch this one, repeat steps 2
through 8. You can queue up as many loads as you want.
• To create several tickets and batch them later:
a) Select the order on the Orders form.

136 12/21/16
b) Click the Create Ticket button in the top right corner of the Orders
form. The Quick Ticket dialog appears.
c) Select a load size and truck and click the Dispatch button. A ticket is
created and appears on the Load Index of the Batch Setup form.
d) Repeat steps a - c for each ticket you want to create from the order.

Adjusting Batch Information BEFORE Load Start

Besides entering a load size and selecting a mix and a truck, the information
indicated below can be changed before a batch is run. Some of this
information is very critical to the strength and make-up of the concrete, so
only qualified personnel should make adjustments.
To Add Materials or Edit Targets on Batch Setup
To Adjust Water on a PER YARD Basis
To Adjust Water on a PER LOAD Basis
To Change In Truck Water Volume
To Change Mix Slump
To Adjust Moisture for an Aggregate
To Adjust Truck Charge Rate on Batch Setup

See Also:
Trimming Materials
To Change Materials

To Add Materials or Edit Targets on Batch Setup

Authorized personnel can add materials or edit design quantities on the Batch
Setup form. These changes are effective for the current batch only; they DO
NOT change design quantities in the original mix design.

Note: For information on trimming materials on Batch Setup, see the

section titled “Trimming Materials”.

To Add a Material:

1. On the Mix tab, in the first blank row, select the material in the
Material column.

The UOM for the material defaults in from the material record. If your
system is set up for mix designs to be entered in the alternate
measurement system, the UOM would default to the unit selected in the
Mix Entry: Alternate field on the Units tab of the Materials form.

12/21/16 137
2. Tab to the Design column and enter the amount required for 1
cubic unit (yards or meters) of the mix.
3. Save your changes.
The Target column is updated and an asterisk (*) appears just to the
right of the design unit to indicate that the design amount has been
changed for that item.

To Change a Material’s Target Amount:

If you have editing rights, you can change the Target amount of a material on
Batch Setup. You do this by changing the Design amount for one unit (1 cubic
yard or meter). As soon as you tab off the Design column or save your
change, the target amount of the material is updated for the load.

Note: The Allow Mix Modify field of the Materials form and the Allow
Modify field of the Mix Designs form control whether you can adjust
the target for a particular mix material.

The general procedure for changing a target amount is:

1. On the Mix tab of the Batch Setup form, click in the Design field
for the material whose target you wish to adjust.
2. Enter the new quantity for one unit (1 cubic yard or meter).
3. Tab out of the field.
An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the design unit to indicate that the
design amount has been changed and the Target column is updated.
The Design amount in the original mix design DOES NOT change.

However, there are other ways to edit target amounts:

There are three different methods to edit design quantities for loads being
prepared on the Batch Setup form. All three methods accomplish the same
thing, but one method is slower if you are making several changes because
you have to wait for the system to auto-save and refresh the form every time
you move to another field.

Note: All three methods depend on whether the ”Auto Verify Targets” option
on the User Extensions form is checked for your user login.

Method #1
This is one of the recommended methods.
If the Auto Verify Targets option on the User Extensions form is “unchecked”
for your user login (the default), you can change material quantities and trims
on the Mix tab of the Batch Setup form, but you must do one of the following
to refresh the form with the new target amounts.

138 12/21/16
• Click the Verify Targets button;
• or, click outside the Batch Setup Mix tab;
• or, tab off the Batch Setup Mix tab;
• or, save changes (clicking the Save button or press <Ctrl + S>).
Doing any of the above manually saves your changes and refreshes Batch
Setup only once, as opposed to refreshing it each time you move to another
field (see Method #3). This means it takes less time for you to enter data and
for the system to return new targets.

Method #2
This is another recommended method.
If the Auto Verify Targets option on the User Extensions form is “checked” for
your user login:

1. Click the Edit Quantities button on Batch Setup (or press <Alt +
E>) to pull up the Edit Quantities form.
Another Way to Edit Design Quantities

2. Change the desired Design amount(s).

3. Click the Save and Exit button.
The Edit Quantities form closes and the modified quantities appear on the
Mix tab of the Batch Setup form. An asterisk (*) appears just to the right
of the Design unit to indicate that the Design amount has been changed
for that item.
Like Method #1, this method does not update targets until you have made all
changes and clicked the Save and Exit button. Also, like Method #1, it takes
less time for you to enter changes and for the system to return new targets
than it would for Method #3 (described next).

12/21/16 139
Method #3
The third method is the same as Method #1 except that the Auto Verify
Targets option on the User Extensions form is “checked”. This is the slowest
way to edit design quantities, especially if you need to edit more than one
material. The reason is that the Batch Setup form is refreshed each time you
move to another field, meaning you must wait for the system to auto-save
and refresh the form with the updated target each time you move to another
field.

To Adjust Water on a PER YARD Basis

Note: Adjustments to the Trim, Adjust, In Truck, and Slump fields on

the Batch Setup form affect the amount of water in the mix design.

1. On the Mix tab of the Batch Setup form, click in the (Water) Trim
field.

2. Enter either a positive or a negative amount and tab out of the

field.
A positive amount increases the water “for each yard” by the amount
entered in this field. A negative amount decreases the water in the same
manner.

Example:
If you enter a 1 in this field for a 10-yard load, the water target is increased
by 10.

To Adjust Water on a PER LOAD Basis

Note: Adjustments to the Trim, Adjust, In Truck, and Slump fields on

the Batch Setup form affect the amount of water in the mix design.

1. On the Mix tab of the Batch Setup form, click in the (Water)
Adjust field.

2. Enter either a positive or a negative amount and tab out of the

field.
A positive amount increases the water “for the load” by the amount
entered in this field. A negative amount decreases the water in the same
manner.

140 12/21/16
Example:
If you enter a 5 in this field for a 10-yard load, the water target is increased
by 5.

To Change In Truck Water Volume

Note: Adjustments to the Trim, Adjust, In Truck, and Slump fields on

the Batch Setup form affect the amount of water in the mix design.

1. On Mix tab of the Batch Setup form, click in the In Truck field.

2. Enter the total number of gallons or liters of water the truck is

carrying from the last washout and tab out of the field.
The water target automatically decreases.

To Change Mix Slump

Note: Adjustments to the Trim, Adjust, In Truck, and Slump fields on

the Batch Setup form affect the amount of water in the mix design.

1. On the Batch Setup tab of the Batch Setup form, click in the Slump
field.

2. Type the desired slump value and tab out of the field.
The Target value of the water item is recalculated. If you increase the
slump value, the water target increases. If you decrease the slump value,
the water target decreases. The amount of change in the water target
depends on whether standard slump calculations or slump tables are
used.

To Adjust Moisture for an Aggregate

1. Open the Set Moisture form one of the following ways:

— Select Form > Run, select “Set Moisture” and click OK.
— On the Mix tab of the Batch Setup form, right click the %Mst field for
the appropriate aggregate and select “Set Moisture”.

12/21/16 141
2. Enter the new moisture percentage in the %Mst field for the
appropriate bin then click Save.

Notes: • If a probe is installed and the Probe Active box is checked, the
reading from the probe will be used instead of the %Mst value.
• The water target will only be adjusted if the material whose
moisture is being adjusted is part of the mix design.
• If you right click on the %Mst field for a material for which
moisture is not enabled, the following message is displayed.

To Adjust Truck Charge Rate on Batch Setup

When a truck is selected on Batch Setup, the Rate field on the Batch Setup
tab displays the Charge Rate from the Truck record. You can slow this down
(or speed it up) by entering a smaller (or larger) value in the Rate field.

To Adjust Truck Charge Rate on Batch Setup

1. Prepare the batch and select a truck.

2. On the Batch Setup tab of Batch Setup form, click in the Rate field.
3. Type the desired percentage and tab out of the field.

142 12/21/16
4. Save your changes or start the batch.

Notes: • The new charge rate is displayed on the Batch Graphics truck
icon when you start the batch.
• The charge rate present at the end of the batch is saved to the
Truck record (charge rates of 10 percent or less are not stored).

See Also:
To Adjust Truck Charge Rate On Batch Graphics

12/21/16 143
Trimming Materials
Topics in This Section
To Automatically Trim Admix Designs
To Automatically Trim a Single Admix
To Automatically Trim a Water Reducer
To Set Up Ulink Admix Trims
To Manually Trim Materials

To Automatically Trim Admix Designs

Use the Trim and Unit columns on the Constituents tab of the Admix Designs
form to specify how much, if any, an admix material is to be automatically
trimmed per yard (or m3) at batch time.

1. Open the Admix Designs form and select the admix design.

(If the admix design does not exist, see the MaterialSetup.pdf for details
about entering admix designs.)
2. Select the admix material on the Constituents tab.

Note: If an amount is entered in the Amount column, this value defaults onto
the Design column of the Batch Setup form at batch time.

3. In the Trim column, enter the trim amount.

4. In the Unit column, select either ‘%’ or a unit (example: ‘kg’ or
‘lb’).
When a ticket that uses the admix design is created or updated, the trim
amount or percentage for the admix defaults onto the Trim column of the
Batch Setup form. The target for the admix is then adjusted according to the
Design amount and load size.

To Automatically Trim a Single Admix

Use the Default Trim Qty and Trim Type fields on the Materials form to
specify how much, if any, a single admix is to be automatically trimmed per
yard (or m3) at batch time.

1. Open the Materials form and select (or add) the Admix item.

2. Make sure the Qualities tab is visible.

3. In the field immediately to the right of the Default Trim Qty field,
select the Trim Type (either “Multiply By Percent Trim” or “Add
Trim Amount”). Selecting either of these trim types makes the
Default Trim Qty field editable.

144 12/21/16
4. In the Default Trim Qty field, enter either the percentage or the
amount to be trimmed per yd (or m3).
5. Save your changes to the Materials form.
Then, when a ticket that uses the single admix is created or updated, the trim
amount or percentage defaults onto the Trim column of the Batch Setup form.
The target for the admix is adjusted according to the load size.

To Automatically Trim a Water Reducer

A Water Reducer admix percentage can be automatically reduced at batch
time by an Accelerator Admix trim Based On Qty.

1. On the Item Groups form, make sure the following item groups
exist. If not, create them.

4 ACCEL
4 REDUCER
2. On the Groups tab of the Materials form:
a) Assign the Accelerator material to the 4 ACCEL group with “Target
Calc” as the Type.
b) Assign the Reducer material to the 4 REDUCER group with “Target
Calc” as the Type.
3. On the Target Calculations form, add the following row. Be sure to
select “Accelerator % affects Water Reducer Trim” as the Calc
Type.

Effects on Water Reducer (Accelerator Based On Qty):

• If the Accelerator material’s Based On Qty is “%” and is less than 1.00%,
the Water Reducer Admix trim will be 100% (full dosage).
• If the Accelerator material’s Based On Qty is “%” and equals 1.00%, the
Water Reducer Admix trim will be 50%.
• If the Accelerator material’s Based On Qty is “%” and is greater than or
equal to 2.00%, the Water Reducer trim will be 0% (no dosage).
• If the Accelerator material’s Based On Qty is “%” and is between 1.00%
and 2.00%, the Water Reducer trim will be a linear factor between 50%
and 0% respectively.

12/21/16 145
Effects on Water Reducer (Accelerator Trim Qty):
• If the Accelerator material’s Trim Qty is less than 100%, the Water
Reducer Admix trim will be 100% (full dosage).
• If the Accelerator material’s Trim Qty is 100%, the Water Reducer Admix
trim will be 50%.
• If the Accelerator material’s Trim Qty is greater than or equal to 200%,
the Water Reducer trim will be 0% (no dosage).
• If the Accelerator material’s Trim Qty is between 100% and 200%, the
Water Reducer trim will be a linear factor between 50% and 0%
respectively.

To Set Up Ulink Admix Trims

This section describes how to configure Admixes received from
COMMANDseries via Ulink where the trim percentage is specified on the
COMMANDseries side.
Admixes that can be trimmed this way:

Admix Ulink Field

Accelerators (example: Calcium) 092
Air Type Admixes (example: AEA) 093
Super Plasticizers 094
Hot Waters 095

1. Specify the trim percentage in the Plants file in COMMANDseries.

COMMANDseries Plants File

2. In COMMANDbatch, add a row to the Target Calculations form for

trimming the 4ADX group as shown.

146 12/21/16
COMMANDbatch Target Calculations Form

3. Configure Accelerator materials on the COMMANDbatch Materials

form as shown in the following two screen examples.
Accelerator Material Setup

12/21/16 147
Accelerator Material Setup (continued)

4. Configure Air Type materials on the COMMANDbatch Materials

form as shown in the following two screen examples.
Air Type Material Setup

148 12/21/16
Air Type Material Setup (continued)

5. Configure Super Plasticizers on the COMMANDbatch Materials

form as shown in the following two screen examples.
Super Plasticizer Setup

12/21/16 149
Super Plasticizer Setup (continued)

6. Configure Hot Water on the COMMANDbatch Materials form as

shown in the following three screen examples.
Hot Water Setup

150 12/21/16
Hot Water Setup (continued)

Hot Water Setup (continued)

To Manually Trim Materials

1. If it does not already exist, add a row to the Target Calculations

form to allow all materials to be trimmed.

Caution!
DO NOT modify or reorder any steps on the Target
Calculations form. Contact Command Alkon's Service
Department for any modifications needed.

12/21/16 151
Target Calculation for Manually Trimming ALL Materials

To trim materials for just one group, select that group instead of ALL in
the Group 1 column. The steps highlighted in orange in the following
example show target calculations used for the 4 ADX (Admix) group.
Target Calculations for Manual Trimming 4 ADX Materials

2. For each material to be manually trimmed, do the following on the

Qualities tab of the Materials form.
• Select one of the following trim types in the Default Trim Qty field then
enter the default amount or percentage.

Trim Type Description

Add Trim Amount Used for materials trimmed in material units.
Multiply By Percent Trim Used for materials that are based on another
material. Example: Calcium.

152 12/21/16
• Optional: Check the “Update Trim” box if you want the Default Trim Qty
value for the material to be updated to reflect the last trim value used on
Batch Setup.
• Optional: Check the “Use Previous Trim” box if you want
COMMANDbatch to use the trim value from the previous load from the
same Day, Order Code, Customer and Mix Design.
See the following screen example.

3. Save your changes and close the Materials form.

4. On the Batch Setup form, before starting the load, check the
“Apply Add Trim” box on the Options tab.
5. Select the mix on Batch Setup. If the mix contains a material to be
manually trimmed, the default trim amount (or percentage)
appears in the Trim column.

12/21/16 153
6. Change the amount or percentage in the Trim column. This
amount can be a negative number.
7. Save your changes.
The material’s target on Batch Setup is recalculated.

To Start a Load
Click the Start button at the top of the Batch Setup form.
• When you start the batch, most fields on the Batch Setup form become
“grayed out” and the Start button disappears. The load moves through
several Load Statuses, starting with LOAD_PRECREATE as soon as the
Start button is clicked.
• The ticket shows up on the Load Summary of the Batch Graphics Form
(and on the Load Index of the batch computer).
• The progress bar beside each device object on the Batch Graphics form
shows how much material is being fed or weighed up.
• The horizontal bar graph, if displayed on the Batch Graphics form, also
shows the progress of feeding and weighing for each material and scale.
• If a tolerance error message is displayed, either accept the error or retry
feeding or weighing.

See Also:
To Start a Load from a Current Load
Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge
Freewheeling
Low Inventory Can Be Used to Prevent Load Start

154 12/21/16
Idle Time Reconciliation Alarm (Optional)
Reconciling a Dry Up Load
Confirm Tolerance
Inventory Recordation When Manual Feeds Occur During Auto-Batching
Confirm Tolerance
To Start Discharge
Mix Design Integrity Checks
Inventory Display on Batch Graphics

To Start a Load from a Current Load

You can queue up another load just like the load currently running. This
function can be used instead of Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge when
you only want to batch the same load a few times.

1. Right click on the desired load in the Load Summary at the bottom
of the Batch Graphics form and select “Start New Load”. A
window similar to the following appears

2. Select the load under Currently Running Loads and click OK.
The new load is placed on the Batch Setup index and on the Batch
Graphics Load Summary. The load starts as soon as the previous load is
finished.

If you try to start a batch containing a material whose:

• On Hand Interlock field on the Item Locations form is set to “Disable

Start if not enough material and Launch approp. form”,

• AND whose Track Inventory option is checked on the Materials form,

• AND whose on hand amount is less than the material’s batch target,
the low inventory notification window is displayed.

Note: The low inventory notification window is not displayed for loads
set to Continuous Run.

You must click one of the buttons on the low inventory notification window.
Button Descriptions

Button Action

Closes the low inventory notification window and opens the

Receipt Inventory Receipts form so you can record the amount of
material received into inventory.
Closes the low inventory notification window and opens the
Adjust Inventory Adjustments form so you can adjust the material’s
on hand amount.
Closes the low inventory notification window, logs the
Del Late notification, and allows you to start the batch when you click
the Start button a second time. Receipt of the material can be
recorded at a later time.
Closes the low inventory notification window, logs the
Substitute notification, and allows you to start the batch when you click
the Start button a second time. Material substitutions can be
made at a later time.
Closes the low inventory notification window but does not
Cancel allow you to start the batch until you have corrected the low
inventory condition.

Note: If a material's inventory reaches -250000, an error message alerts

the user that inventory has been reset to 0, and that it appears
inventory is not being tracked and that the user should turn Track
Inventory “off” on the Options tab of the Materials Form.

156 12/21/16
Idle Time Reconciliation Alarm (Optional)
If you want the operator to be notified whenever the time between loads goes
past a certain number of minutes, enter this number in the “Idle Time
Reconciliation Delay” field of the System Parameters form.
Whenever the delay between loads exceeds this value, an alarm will be
displayed. The operator must enter a Reason Code before clicking OK to clear
the alarm. The alarm and its disposition can be viewed on the Alarms form.
Reason Codes:
Standard Idle Time
Waiting for Delivery
Waiting for Agitator
Scheduled Maintenance
Unscheduled Maintenance
To disable idle time reconciliation, enter a value of zero in the “Idle Time
Reconciliation Delay” field, or make sure the field is blank.

12/21/16 157
Reconciling a Dry Up Load
If a load that is batched into a truck is too moist (slump is too high), another
load can be created to "dry up" the load. The Dry Up Load might consist of
aggregate and/or cement materials that are compatible with the mix.

Example:
If loads are batched into Truck 1 and Truck 2, then it is discovered that Truck
1’s load is too wet, a dry up load can be batched into Truck 1 if Truck 1 is
saved with a ticket within the plant’s Dry Up Time.

Notes: • Dry Up Time is the maximum amount of time (in minutes) after
a load is started that it can be referenced for a Dry Up Load.
• Dry Up Time is entered on the Rules tab of the System
Parameters form.

When you save the ticket or start the load, the following message is displayed.

• If you click Yes, the load is considered to be a Dry Up Load and its
Reference Load ID is given the Load ID of the previous load.
• If you click No, the load is considered a new load.

Note: When a Dry Up Load is used with the material amount set to zero
AND the Use Previous Trim or the Use Previous Amount option is
checked for the material, a notification is displayed on the next
load alerting the operator about the zero amount.

158 12/21/16
Confirm Tolerance
If this box on the User Extensions form is checked, a confirmation message is
displayed when you accept an out-of-tolerance error for a Normal, Small
Batch, or out-of-tolerance condition. The confirmation message asks if you are
sure you want to accept. Your options are Re-read Scale or Accept.
If this box is unchecked (the default), no confirmation message appears.

Tip!
To ALWAYS display tolerance confirmation messages regardless of
whether “confirm tolerances” has been set up for the user, create
an IO point (output) using the following format:
[sequence_code]TOL[group_code]
This IO point would be activated each time a tolerance
confirmation message is accepted.
Examples:
W1TOL2CEM - track tolerance errors for all materials belonging to
the 2 CEM group when using sequence code W1.
DTOLALL - track tolerance errors for all material feeds when using
sequence code D.

See Also
Tolerance Settings - an Overview
Inventory Recordation When Manual Feeds Occur During Auto-Batching

12/21/16 159
Inventory Recordation When Manual Feeds Occur During
Auto-Batching
The following rules are observed by the batching system whenever a manual
feed occurs while an automatic batch is in progress.

When a different material is manually fed at the same time as an auto

feed into a common scale:
— The auto feed is aborted and a material contamination error is
displayed.
— The Reread Scale option is removed from the tolerance notification.
— The batched amount of the material in the auto feed is recorded at
the time the manual event interrupted the auto feed.
— The manual inventory amount is recorded for the manual feed.

When the same material is manually fed at the same time as an auto
feed from a different bin/silo into a common scale, and Track
Inventory is set to “by device”:
— The auto feed is aborted and a material contamination error is
displayed.
— The Reread Scale option is shown on the tolerance notification.
— The batched amount of the material in the auto feed is recorded at
the time the manual event interrupted the auto feed.
— The batched amount of the material in the auto feed is recorded at
the time the manual event interrupted the auto feed when either of
the following options were selected from the tolerance notification:
Accept, or Reread Scale with a subsequent Accept.
— The manual inventory amount is recorded for the manual feed.

When the same material is manually fed at the same time as an auto
feed from a different bin/silo into a common scale, and Track
Inventory is NOT set to “by device”:
— The auto feed is not interrupted.
— The Reread Scale option is shown on the tolerance notification.
— The auto batched and batched amounts of the material in the auto
feed are recorded at the end of the feed.
— The manual inventory amount is NOT recorded for the manual feed
while the auto feed is active.

160 12/21/16
To Hold/Resume Batching
A distinction needs to be made between putting a device on hold and putting
the entire system on hold. When you put a device on hold, batching continues
except for that device. When you put the entire system on hold, batching
functions stop for all devices.

To Put the System On Hold While a Batch is Running

Click the Hold button on the toolbar at the top of the COMMANDbatch screen.
The button initially turns light yellow, then light red.

Caution!
Be careful when performing this operation because all
batching functions stop. Keep this in mind if product is
mixing or discharging into a truck!

To Take the System Off Hold

Click the Resume button on the toolbar at the top of the COMMANDbatch
screen. The label for this button changes to “Running” and the button color
changes to green.

To Put a Device On Hold While a Batch is Running

On the Batch Graphics form, either right click the device object and select
“Hold”, or simply click the device. The device object flashes, alternating
between gray and its normal color, to indicate it is on hold.

To Take a Device Off Hold While a Batch is Running

On the Batch Graphics form, right click the device object and select “Release”
from the menu. The device object stops flashing.

To Refresh Device Hold States

To refresh the hold states for all devices, click the Refresh button at the top
right of the Batch Graphics form (not the button at the top left of the
COMMANDbatch screen).

12/21/16 161
To Abort a Load
Caution!
This operation cannot be undone! Once aborted, the
batch or batches cannot be restarted!

Topics in This Section

To Abort the Current and All Queued Loads
To Abort a Load on Load Summary and Loads Below

To Abort the Current and All Queued Loads

>>> This procedure aborts all loads that have been started!

1. Click the “Abort” button while a load is batching.

— The following confirmation box is displayed.

2. Click Yes to abort. Click Cancel if you don’t want to abort.

Material left in any plant devices will have to be handled manually.

Tip!
To continue batching after cancelling the abort, click the “Resume” button.

162 12/21/16
To Abort a Load on Load Summary and Loads Below

>>> This procedure aborts all loads that have been started!

1. Right click on the Load Summary and select “Abort”.

Aborting from Batch Graphics Load Summary

2. The following message appears.

3. Click Yes to abort. Click Cancel if you don’t want to abort.

Material left in any plant devices will have to be handled manually.

Tip!
To continue batching after cancelling the abort, click the “Resume” button.

12/21/16 163
Adjusting Batch Information AFTER Load Start
After a load has been started, it is possible to change the following
information if you have editing rights to do so:
To Edit Trim, Adjust, and Target Amounts During a Batch
To Change Truck and/or Driver During a Batch
To Adjust Truck Charge Rate On Batch Graphics

To Edit Trim, Adjust, and Target Amounts During a Batch

On the Batch Graphics form, you can change a material’s Trim, Adjust, or
Target amount if the following conditions are true:
• The material is in the batch that is running.
• The material is not fully weighed up or metered when you save the
change.
• The material’s Allow Mix Modify setting (on the Batching tab of the
Materials form) is either:
— Modify ingred / trim while batching if mix allow modify is N
— Modify ingred / trim while batching if mix allow modify is Y

1. After a batch is started, right click on a device object on Batch

Graphics and select "Change Material Targets" to pull up the
following window.

2. Enter a new Trim, Adjust, or Design amount.

Note: The Min Trim and Max Trim settings on the Limits tab of the
Materials form determine the minimum and maximum amounts
you can enter.

3. Click the “Save And Exit” button.

The material’s target is recalculated.

164 12/21/16
To Change Truck and/or Driver During a Batch

1. Right click the Truck icon on the Batch Graphics form and select
“Change Truck”. The Change Truck form appears.

2. Select the new truck code and/or driver.

3. Click the Save button. The new truck number appears next to the
Truck icon.

Notes: • The new truck code and/or driver name are not printed on the
ticket if the top part of the ticket has already been printed. But
they will be stored in the ticket record in case you want to reprint
the ticket later.
• Also, the new truck code will not immediately appear next to the
Truck icon on Batch Graphics if the top part of the ticket has
already printed unless you refresh Batch Graphics (by pressing
<F5> or clicking the Refresh button ).

To Adjust Truck Charge Rate On Batch Graphics

You can adjust the truck charge rate on Batch Graphics once the batch has
started discharging. When the truck charge rate is adjusted this way (on-the-
fly), flow rates for all devices that discharge into the truck are similarly
increased or decreased. For example, if the truck charge rate is reduced 75%,
the flow rate for each device that discharges into the truck is also reduced
75%.

To Adjust Truck Charge Rate on Batch Graphics

1. Prepare the batch and select a truck.
2. Start the batch.
On Batch Graphics, a small scroll box like the one shown below appears
on top of the Truck image. The charge rate from the Truck record is
displayed in the scroll box. For example, if the charge rate in the Truck
record is 100%, 100% is displayed.
Scroll Box

3. Start discharge.
4. When the batch starts discharging into the truck, do one of the
following:

12/21/16 165
To increase the charge rate:
Click the “Up” arrow in the scroll box for each percentage you want to
increase the rate. (In the following illustration, we have clicked the Up
arrow ten times, once for each percentage increase.)
Scroll Box “Up” Arrow

— Or, click inside the scroll box and press the Up arrow key (on the
keyboard) once for each percentage increase.
— Or, click inside the scroll box and type the new percentage.
— Or, click inside the scroll box and press the <Page Up> key (on the
keyboard) once for each increment of 5.

To decrease the charge rate:

Click the “Down” arrow in the scroll box for each percentage you want to
decrease the rate. (In the following illustration, we have clicked the Down
arrow ten times, once for each percentage increase.)
Scroll Box “Down” Arrow

— Or, click inside the scroll box and press the Down arrow key (on the
keyboard) once for each percentage decrease.
— Or, click inside the scroll box and type the new percentage.
— Or, click inside the scroll box and press the <Page Down> key (on
the keyboard) once for each decrement of 5.

Notes:
• The charge rate present at the end of the batch is saved to the Truck
record (charge rates of 10 percent or less are not stored).
• If other queued batches use the same truck, you must re-select the truck
on Batch Setup so that the truck’s new charge rate is displayed in the
Rate field.

Example:
• On Trucks form, Charge Rate is 100%.
• On Scales form, Min Flow is 200 lbs/sec and Max Flow is 280 lbs/sec.
• Charge Rate on Batch Graphics Truck icon is lowered to 50%.

166 12/21/16
Target Charge Rates are calculated as follows:

Target Min Flow = Min Flow x Adjusted Charge Rate

= 200 * .50
= 100 lbs/sec
Target Max Flow = Max Flow x Adjusted Charge Rate
= 280 * .50
= 140 lbs/sec

Result:
The gate open and close pulses would maintain a charge rate in the range of
100 to 140 lbs/sec.

See Also:
To Adjust Truck Charge Rate on Batch Setup

12/21/16 167
To Start Discharge
Anytime after a load is started, you can arm the system to discharge the load
by clicking the “Load” button at the top of the COMMANDbatch screen.

Important - Please Read Before Discharging a Load!!

• Make sure a truck is in place (or the mixer is running and empty) before
discharge is initiated!
• A scale does not start discharging until feeding is complete for the scale.

Note: The Sequence steps for each device determine when individual
devices will start.

• If you have to clear or accept any feeding errors, you will have to click the
“Load” button again to resume discharge.

Note: If the “Reset Loading On Error” option for your user context is
unchecked on the User Extensions form, the state of discharge
(armed or unarmed) remains unchanged when batching errors occur,
meaning you click the “Load” button only once during a batch.

• Direct-metered items (admixes and water) start as soon as discharge is

initiated.

Note: The Sequence steps for each device determine when individual
devices will start.

• When a load is running, the moisture value displayed on Batch Graphics

is an “Average” for each material with an active probe. Once the load is
complete, the moisture value on Batch Graphics is the “live” reading.

168 12/21/16
Reprinting a Ticket
There a couple ways to reprint a ticket if it has already been created.
To Reprint a Ticket (from Batch Setup)
To Reprint a Ticket (from Ticket Editor)

To Reprint a Ticket (from Batch Setup)

1. Open the Batch Setup form.

2. In the Date field at the top left of the form, select the date the
ticket was created.
3. If the ticket has already been batched, click the Show History
button to display the ticket.
4. In the grid at the left of the form, select the ticket.
5. Click the “View Ticket” button at the top right of the form. The
ticket appears in the report viewer.
6. Click the printer icon at the top of the report viewer to print the
ticket.

To Reprint a Ticket (from Ticket Editor)

1. Open the Ticket Editor form and select the correct date in the
Date field at the top left of the form. Tickets for that date are
displayed.

2. In the grid at the left, select the appropriate ticket.

3. Click the “View Ticket” button at the top right of the form. The
ticket is displayed in the Report Viewer.
4. Click the printer icon at the top of the Report Viewer to reprint the
ticket.

12/21/16 169
Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge
This feature allows the same batch to be run over and over until Continuous
Run / Continuous Discharge is terminated. Continuous Run can be used
without Continuous Discharge. A ready mix plant, for example, can turn on
Continuous Run but not Continuous Discharge so that the same mix is
batched but discharge is not initiated until a truck is in place. A products
plant, on the other hand, can turn on both Continuous Run and Continuous
Discharge so that product is continually batched and discharged into forms.
Also, for loads created from an order (at ready mix plants), Continuous Run
stops when the delivered amount equals the ordered amount.

Topics in This Section

To Enable Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge
To Start Continuous Run
To Start Continuous Discharge
To Stop Continuous Run
To Stop Continuous Discharge

To Enable Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge

To enable Continuous Run and Continuous Discharge, check their respective
options on Batching tab of the Plants form.

Note: Checking these options does not start Continuous Run and
Continuous Discharge; it only makes them useable.

Enabling Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge

170 12/21/16
To Start Continuous Run
1. On the Batch Setup form, start the batch to be continuously run.

The Batch Graphics form comes up. The Resume button at the top of the
COMMANDbatch window turns green and its label “Resume” changes to
“Running” (in bold text). This change is shown in the following two
illustrations.
Batch not started

Batch started

2. Click the CRun button. The CRun button turns cyan in color.
Continuous Run started

To Start Continuous Discharge

Continuous Discharge can be used for tickets/loads regardless of their source
(Batch Setup, Orders, or Dispatch).
To start Continuous Discharge for loads created on Batch Setup:

1. After the first batch is started, click the Load button to arm
discharge. The label “Load” changes to “Loading” in bold text and
the button turns green.
Discharge armed

2. Click the CLoad button. The CLoad button turns cyan in color.
Continuous Discharge started

Note: If a weighing error occurs, Continuous Discharge is halted and will not
resume until you accept the error message (by clicking OK or Retry).

12/21/16 171
To Stop Continuous Run
Click the CRun button. The CRun button is no longer cyan in color.
Continuous Run stopped

Remember:
For loads created from an order, Continuous Run stops when the delivered
amount equals the ordered amount.

To Stop Continuous Discharge

Click the CLoad button. The CLoad button is no longer cyan in color.
Continuous Discharge stopped

172 12/21/16
Freewheeling
Freewheeling occurs when a load is started while another one is running.
During freewheeling, as soon as a device is empty, it starts weighing up
material for the next load.

Note: Normally, 3 loads can be running at the same time. However,

COMMANDbatch can be licensed to allow up to 5 running loads.

To freewheel a load, do one of the following:

Start the loads from Batch Setup.

After three loads are started, the “Start” button is grayed out with
“Please Wait...” displayed under it. Once the number of running loads
drops to 2, you can start another load.

Right click on a load in the Load Summary on Batch Graphics and

select “Start New Load”.
Repeat this process for up to 3 loads. Once the number of running loads
drops to 2, you can start another load.

While the load you want to freewheel is batching, press the <Alt> key
and left click the “Running” button at the same time.
Repeat this process for up to 3 loads. Once the number of running loads
drops to 2, you can start another load.

See Also:
Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge

12/21/16 173
To Change Materials

Caution!
You should not change material-device assignments while
a batch is in progress!

1. Right-click a device on the Batch Graphics form.

2. Click Change Materials from the drop-down menu. The Change

Materials form appears.

3. Select the new material in the New Material field.

4. Click Save.

174 12/21/16
Performing Washout
1. Make sure a washout mix has been created.

2. Make sure the washout mix code has been selected in the
Washout Mix field on the Misc tab of the Plants form.
3. Access the Washouts form any of the following ways:
— By selecting Form > Run > Washout from the menu bar at the top of
the COMMANDbatch screen.
— By right clicking on the Truck field of the Trucks form and selecting
“Washout”.
— By right clicking on the Truck field of the Batch Setup form and
selecting “Washout”.
— By right clicking from the Batch Graphics form while the cursor is
positioned over the Truck icon and selecting “Washout”.

4. Verify the information on the form. You can change items such as
load size and target amounts, but you cannot change the mix
code.

Note: Changes to mix targets are only effective for the current washout
operation and will not change the original washout mix.

5. Click the Start button to start washout.

12/21/16 175
To Copy a Ticket on Batch Setup
Perform the following procedure to make a copy of a ticket that is already
listed on the Batch Setup index. This is especially helpful if you want to create
another ticket against an order without having to switch to the Orders form.
The new ticket is identical to the original and is generated against the order.

1. In the grid at the left of the Batch Setup form, select the desired
ticket.

2. Click the Tickets menu on the toolbar at the top of the screen and
select “Copy”.
The new ticket is displayed with the current time and date. The Ticket #
field on the new ticket is set to 0 but the system will increment it when
the ticket is printed.
3. Change information (load size, mix, truck, etc.) as needed on the
new ticket.
4. Save your changes.

Notes:
• You cannot copy a ticket created from an order if the ticket is in the Pre-
Create load status (“0”).
• You cannot copy a ticket if the order is completed, or if the Ordered and
Shipped amounts are equal on a plus load.
• After a ticket is batched, it is closed if the order’s Delivered and Shipped
amounts are equal and the load is NOT a plus load.

176 12/21/16
Mix Design Integrity Checks

If you are running COMMANDbatch V1.8.11.0 or later and this feature is

enabled (see Enabling/Disabling the Mix Design Integrity Feature), mix design
integrity checks will occur whenever a load is started. System notification
messages and user responses regarding mix integrity checks are stored in the
database.
Three mix quality checks are performed (in the following order): Water/
Cement Ratio check, Yield check, Material Min/Max Limit checks.
If enabled, the Water/Cement Ratio check is performed first. If the Water/
Cement Ratio check passes or is disabled, the Yield check is performed second
if it is enabled. If the Yield check passes or is disabled, Material Limit checks
are performed last if they are enabled.
If all three mix quality checks pass when the load is started, the load runs
immediately without any other operator action.
However, each check can result in a mix quality warning if it does not pass.
These warnings are discussed in detail in the following sections.
Water/Cement Ratio Check
Yield Check
Material Min/Max Limit Check

Tip!
When a Mix Quality Warning is displayed, take the action suggested
in Reviewing Mix Design Integrity Alarms to help ensure that the
load will be ready to batch the next time you start it.

12/21/16 177
Water/Cement Ratio Check
Water/Cement Ratio checks can alleviate concerns about concrete strength
and are performed before batching begins to make sure the allowable Water/
Cement Ratio is not exceeded.
Water/Cement Ratio checks are performed before the Yield Check and the
Material Min/Max Limit Check.

Note: Water/Cement Ratio checks can be disabled for a single mix on the
Mix Designs form’s Qualities tab if the Max W/C Ratio value is set to
0.00. (This can be useful for Washout mixes.)

If Mix Design Integrity is enabled when a load is started AND the “Do Not
Allow Batching with Errors” option on the Mix Designs form is left unchecked
AND the load has a calculated Water/Cement Ratio greater than the Max W/C
Ratio setting being used (system-level or mix-level), a notification message
similar to one of the following examples is displayed.
If the System-Level Water/Cement Ratio is used

If the Mix-Level Water/Cement Ratio is used

If you click OK To Batch:

• A notification message is stored in the database.

178 12/21/16
• The Yield Check is performed next.

Note: The “OK To Batch” button will not be available if the “Do Not Allow
Batching with Errors” option on the Mix Designs form is checked.
This guarantees that the operator cannot batch loads for the mix
design until all Mix Design Integrity checks (Water/Cement Ratio,
Yield, Min/Max Material Limit) have passed.

If you click Cancel:

• The load does not start.
• A notification message is stored in the database.
• The Yield Check is performed next.
• If you start the load again without correcting the Water/Cement Ratio, a
mix quality warning will be displayed again.

You can try to lower the Water/Cement Ratio. Possible solutions:

— You could change Water and/or Cement material Design Amount(s) on
Batch Setup. (If Design amounts are changed on Batch Setup, the
form must be saved. Then mix integrity checks will be performed
again when the load is started.) - Good only if concrete
properties and yield remain as desired.
— You could correct the K factor for Cement material(s) if not
correct.
— You could modify the Wat/Cem Ratio value used in the check, if not
correct, to make the value used in the check higher than the mix
Wat/Cem Ratio. - Good only if concrete properties and yield remain
as desired.

Tip!
When a Mix Quality Warning is displayed, take the action suggested
in Reviewing Mix Design Integrity Alarms to help ensure that the
load will be ready to batch the next time you start it.

12/21/16 179
COMMANDbatch Setups for Water/Cement Ratio Checks

Default System Max Water/Cement Ratio

The default maximum value for Wat/Cem Ratio checks is specified on the
System Parameters form in the System Max W/C Ratio field. This default is
0.70000 but can be changed.

Mix Design Max Water/Cement Ratio

If a mix design’s Max W/C Ratio value on the Qualities tab of the Mix Designs
form is not blank or not 0.00, it overrides the System Max W/C Ratio setting
on the System Parameters form.
The mix design value is then used in Wat/Cem Ratio checks on the mix design
and for the orange background color change of the Water Cement Ratio field
on the Mix Designs form’s Constituents tab. It is also used in Wat/Cem Ratio
checks on Batch Setup.

180 12/21/16
Disabling Water/Cement Ratio Checks for a Mix Design
(Can be used to prevent the check from being performed on a ‘Washout’ mix.)
Water/Cement Ratio Checks can be disabled for a mix design by entering 0.00
in the Max W/C Ratio field on the Qualities tab of the Mix Designs form.

Once the 0.00 Max W/C Ratio value is saved:

• The following notification message is displayed.

• The background of the Water/Cement Ratio field on the Mix Designs

form’s Constituents tab changes to gray if it was orange prior to the Max
W/C Ratio value being set to 0.00 and saved.

12/21/16 181
Yield Check
Yield checks can alleviate concerns about the amount of concrete batched and
delivered to a job site being greater or less than the amount actually ordered.
Per the National Ready Mix Concrete Association website (www.nrmca.org),
“Concrete yield is defined as the volume of freshly mixed concrete from a
known quantity of ingredients ... (and) is determined by dividing the total
weight of the materials by the average unit weight or density of the concrete
determined in accordance with ASTM C 138.” Yield is reported in cf (cubic
feet) or m3 (cubic meter).
In COMMANDbatch, Yield checks are performed on a load after the Water/
Cement Ratio Check to determine if the calculated yield is within acceptable
tolerances around the desired yield (27 cf for US units, 1.00 m3 for Metric
units). COMMANDbatch factors in the percentage of air and the specific
gravity when performing yield calculations.

Notes: • Batch plants can also perform their own yield tests.
• Specific Gravity values should be available from material suppliers
or a plant’s QA personnel.

If Mix Design Integrity is enabled when a load is started AND the “Do Not
Allow Batching with Errors” option on the Mix Designs form is left unchecked
AND the calculated yield is outside the yield tolerance range, a notification
message similar to one of the following examples is displayed.
If System-Level Yield Tolerances are used

If Mix Design-Level Yield Tolerances are used

182 12/21/16
If you click OK To Batch:
• A notification message is stored in the database.
• The Material Min/Max Limit Check is performed next.

If you click Cancel:

• The load does not start.
• A notification message is stored in the database.
• If you start the load again, one of the following mix quality warnings will
be displayed:
— Water/Cement Ratio Mix Quality Warning - If you previously clicked
“Cancel” from the Water/Cement Ratio mix quality warning.
— Yield Mix Quality Warning - if you previously clicked “OK To
Batch” from the Water/Cement Ratio mix quality warning but did not
correct the yield out-of-tolerance condition.

To bring the yield into tolerance, you can:

— Correct the material design amount(s) on Batch Setup and start the
load again. - Good only if concrete properties and yield remain as
desired.
— Correct the material design amount(s) on the Mix Designs form, re-
select the mix on Batch Setup, and start the load again. - Good
only if concrete properties and yield remain as desired.
— Correct the specific gravity, if not correct, on the Mix Designs
form, re-select the mix on Batch Setup, and start the load again.
- Long term fix.
— Change the system yield values to match the load yield. - Good
only if valid for all mix designs that use system-level tolerances
AND if concrete properties and yields remain as desired.
— Disable system yield checks for this mix design and adjust its
yield values to match the load yield. - Good only if concrete
properties and yield remain as desired.

12/21/16 183
(See the Recommendation on the following page.)

Tip!
When a Mix Quality Warning is displayed, take the action suggested
in Reviewing Mix Design Integrity Alarms to help ensure that the
load will be ready to batch the next time you start it.

184 12/21/16
COMMANDbatch Setups for Yield Checks

Default Yield Unit

The Default Yield units (as shown on the Units tab of the System Parameters
form) is cf for US mixes and m3 for Metric mixes.
In the following screen example, cf is the primary yield unit and m3 is the
alternate. Notice that 27.00 cf equals the volume of one cubic yard of
concrete and 1.00 equals the volume of one cubic meter of concrete.
Default Yield Unit (System Parameters form)

Default Yield Tolerance

The yield for mixes batched in US units can range from 25.65 to 28.35 cf and
still be within tolerance (5% below or above 27.00 cf). The yield for mixes
batched in Metric units can range from 0.95 to 1.05 m3 and still be within
tolerance (5% below or above 1.00 m3).
Min and Max Yield Tolerance Percentages are specified on the Batching tab of
the System Parameters form (see the following screen example), and each
defaults to 5%. If you change either of these values, a confirmation message
is displayed so you can make sure this is what you want to do.
Min and Max Default Yield Tolerance (System Parameters form)

Air Content
Air Content is also considered in yield calculations.

12/21/16 185
• If the Air Content field on the Mix Designs form is blank, the System Air
Content specified on the Batching tab of the System Parameters form is
used (which defaults to 3%).
• If the Air Content field on the Mix Designs form is 0.00, air content is not
used in yield calculations for the mix design.
• If the Air Content field on the Mix Designs form is any non-zero value,
that value is used in yield calculations for the mix design.
System Air Content (System Parameters form)

Overriding System Yield Defaults for a Mix Design

Mix-level yield defaults can override system-level defaults if you check the
Override System Yield Defaults box on the Qualities tab of the Mix Designs
form and enter Yield, -%Tol, and +%Tol values. (These fields are required
when the box is checked; blanked out when the box is unchecked.)
Override System Yield Defaults box Override System Yield Defaults box
unchecked on Mix Designs form checked on Mix Designs form

(Default setting: System-level yield (Mix-level yield defaults are used for the
defaults are used for the mix design.) mix design, and for the orange background
color change of the Mix Yield field on the
Mix Designs form’s Constituents tab.)

186 12/21/16
Disabling Yield Checks for a Mix Design
(Can be used to prevent the check from being performed on a ‘Washout’ mix.)
Yield checks can be disabled for a mix design by checking the Override
System Yield Defaults box on the Qualities tab of the Mix Designs form,
entering 0.00 in the Yield field and entering any number in the -%Tol and
+%Tol fields as shown next.
Yield Checks disabled

Once the 0.00 Yield value is saved:

• The following notification message is displayed.

• The background of the Mix Yield field on the Mix Designs form’s
Constituents tab changes to gray if it was orange prior to the Max W/C
Ratio value being set to 0.00 and saved.

12/21/16 187
Material Min/Max Limit Check
The Material Min/Max Limit check is the third Mix Design Integrity check to be
performed when a load is started.
This check is performed on all materials in the mix being batched if:
• Both the Water/Cement Ratio Check and the Yield Check have either
passed or been disabled.
- OR -
• “OK To Batch” was clicked from the mix quality warnings for both the
Water/Cement Ratio and the Yield checks.
If a material amount falls outside the min/max range, a mix quality warning
similar to one of the following examples is displayed.
For a Material that is Based On

• When a material's target amount on Batch Setup is ‘Based On’ the

quantity [per hundred weight (/C) or percent (%)] of another material in
the mix design, the Mix Design Integrity feature checks the material's
Design amount against its Min/Max Based On range. It also checks the
(target amount / load size) against the Min/Max Allowed in Mix range.
For a Material that is NOT Based-On

• When a material's target amount on Batch Setup in not ‘Based On’

another material, the Mix Design Integrity feature checks the material's
Design amount against its Min/Max Allowed In Mix range only.

If you click OK To Batch:

• A notification message is stored in the database.
• The load starts (unless another material mix quality warning appears).

188 12/21/16
If you click Cancel:
• A notification message is stored in the database.
• More than one material could be outside the min/max range. Also a
Based On material could have two (2) limit checks if both “Min/Max
Allowed in Mix” and “Min/Max Based On Qty” limits are specified.
— So if you select “OK To Batch”, the next material limit check is
performed.
— If you select “Cancel” from the last error message, no more
material limit checks are performed and the load does not start.
When the load is started again, Wat/Cem Ratio and Yield checks
will be performed if they were previously canceled. Material limit
checks will also be performed again.

Tip!
When a Mix Quality Warning is displayed, take the action suggested
in Reviewing Mix Design Integrity Alarms to help ensure that the
load will be ready to batch the next time you start it.

12/21/16 189
COMMANDbatch Setups for Material Limit Checks
Material Min/Max limits can be set at the material level (on the Limits tab of
the Materials form) and/or at the mix level (on the Constituents tab of the Mix
Designs form), with mix-level settings overriding material-level settings.
If only one limit value (Min or Max) is entered on the Mix Designs form, only
that limit will be used in limit checks for that material in that mix design. In
other words, values for material limit checks will all come from the Mix
Designs form, or all from the Materials form for each material in the mix.

Tip!
Scroll to the right to see the Min/Max limits fields on the
Constituents tab of the Mix Designs form.

Min/Max Material Limits - Constituents Tab of Mix Designs Form

Note: The Based On UOM field controls which set of Min/Max fields
(Absolute or Based-On) are editable for an ingredient. If the Based
On UOM field contains a value (i.e. % in the above example), then
only the Min/Max Based-On Qty fields are editable. If the UOM is
blank, then only the Min/Max Allowed in Mix fields are editable.

Min/Max Material Limits - Limits tab of Materials Form

190 12/21/16
Disabling the Material Max Limit Check
If material-level limits are used (no material limits entered for the material on
the Mix Designs form), Max Limit checks can be disabled by entering 0.00 in
the “Max Allowed in Mix” field and/or the “Max Based On” field on the Limits
tab of the Materials form.
If mix-level limits are used (at least one material limit entered on the Mix
Designs form for the material), Max Limit checks can be disabled by entering
0.00 in the “Max Allowed in Mix” and/or “Max Based On” field on the
Constituents tab of the Mix Designs form.

12/21/16 191
Enabling/Disabling the Mix Design Integrity Feature
In COMMANDbatch V1.8.11.0 or later, this feature can be enabled/disabled as
explained in this section.

To enable the Mix Design Integrity Check feature:

Open the Materials - Mix Design Integrity Setup form which allows
you to:
• Edit the Specific Gravity of any “active” material.
• Open to the Mix Designs - Mix Design Integrity Setup form where you can
edit the Air Content of any “active” mix design and choose whether or not
to enable the Mix Design Integrity feature.

As mentioned above, the Materials - Mix Design Integrity Setup form allows
you to edit the Specific Gravity of any active material. As an editing aid, if
any Specific Gravity value is blank or 0.00, its field background is displayed in
orange.

Tip!
Right click on a Material Code to open the Materials form so you can
view and edit details about that material only.

192 12/21/16
If you click “Later”:
— The Materials - Mix Design Integrity Setup form closes and the Mix
Design Integrity Check feature is not enabled.

If you click “Review Mix Designs”:

— The Mix Design - Mix Design Integrity Setup form is opened so you
can edit the Air Content of any “active” mix design.

The Mix Designs - Mix Design Integrity Setup form allows the operator to edit
the Air Content of any active mix design.

Notes: • Changing an Air Content in the grid also changes the Air Content
for that mix on the Mix Designs form, and vice-versa.
• If the Air Content in the grid is blank, the System Air Content
percentage shown to the right of the grid area will be used.

Tip!
Right click on a Mix Code to open the Mix Designs form so you can
view and edit details about that mix design only.

12/21/16 193
If you click “Later”:
— The Mix Designs - Mix Design Integrity Setup form closes and the
Mix Design Integrity Check feature is not enabled.

If you click “System Parameters”:

— A System Parameters (Modal) form is displayed so that you can
review or make changes to other Mix Integrity 'system' values.

If you click “Enable Mix Integrity Checks”:

— The following notification message is displayed.

If you click “No”:

— The above notification message is dismissed and the Mix Design
Integrity Check feature is not enabled.

If you click “Yes”:

— The above notification message is dismissed and the following
notification message is displayed.

You must click the OK button.

— The Mix Design Integrity Check feature is now enabled and the
notification message is logged in the database.
— At the bottom of the Mix Designs - Mix Design Integrity Setup
form, the button label changes to “Disable Mix Integrity Checks”.

194 12/21/16
To disable the Mix Design Integrity Check feature:

Open the Materials - Mix Design Integrity Setup form and click the
“Disable Mix Integrity Checks” button at the bottom of the form.
— The following notification message is displayed.

If you click “No”:

— The above notification message is dismissed and the Mix Design
Integrity Check feature is not disabled.

If you click “Yes”:

— The above notification message is dismissed and the following
notification message is displayed.

You must click the OK button.

— The Mix Design Integrity Check feature is now disabled and the
notification message is logged in the database.
— The button label changes back to “Enable Mix Integrity Checks”.

12/21/16 195
Mix Design vs. Batch Setup Wat/Cem Ratio and Yield
Calculations

• Design amounts (the Amount column) for Absolute materials on the Mix
Designs form are ‘theoretical’ values in that they are not passed through
the ‘Target Calculations’ algorithms used by the Batch Setup form.
• Design amounts for Based-On materials on the Mix Designs form are
zero.
• ‘Out of tolerance’ Wat/Cem Ratio and Yield errors are indicated on the Mix
Designs form by the background color of the appropriate field (Water
Cement Ratio or Mix Yield) turning orange. No notification message is
displayed.
As a result, the Wat/Cem Ratio and Yield calculated on the Mix Designs
form may be different than the Wat/Cem Ratio and Yield calculations
performed on the Batch Setup form when a load is started. (Batch Setup
calculations are the ones actually used for Mix Design Integrity checks.)

196 12/21/16
Minimizing Mix Quality Warnings for Wat/Cem Ratio and
Yield
After the Mix Design Integrity feature has been properly configured (including
overrides or disabling values), you can perform the following checks so that
batching proceeds with few or no Water/Cement or Yield calculation errors.

1. Open the System Parameters, Mix Designs, Batch Setup forms.

2. On the System Parameters form, select the Batching tab and
make sure you understand what the Min/Max Yield tolerance
percentages and the System Max W/C Ratio settings mean:
• The yield for mixes batched in US units can range from 25.65 to 28.35 cf
and still be within tolerance (5% below or above 27.00 cf). The yield for
mixes batched in Metric units can range from 0.95 to 1.05 m3 and still be
within tolerance (5% below or above 1.00 m3).
• The default maximum value for Wat/Cem Ratio checks is 0.7000 as
specified on the System Parameters form in the System Max W/C Ratio
field.
3. On the Mix Designs form, select the Qualities tab then select the
first mix and determine if it is using System or Mix Design
settings for Yield and Wat/Cem Ratio checks, or if either or both
of the checks has been disabled. (For more information, see the
online help for the Yield and Max W/C Ratio fields. Also see the
following topics: Disabling Water/Cement Ratio Checks for a Mix
Design and Disabling Yield Checks for a Mix Design.)
4. On the Batch Setup form, create a 1 (yd or m3) load, select the
first mix design in Mix dropdown list, and then compare the
Water/Cement Ratio and Yield values at the bottom of the Batch
Setup form to the System Parameters default values or to the Mix
Designs Qualities tab values, if configured.
If System values are used for Wat/Cem Ratio checks:
• The check will pass if the Batch Setup Water Cement Ratio value is equal
to or less than the System Max W/C Ratio value on the System
Parameters form (0.7000 is the default).

If Mix Design override values are used for Wat/Cem Ratio checks:
• The check will pass if the Batch Setup Water Cement Ratio value is equal
to or less than the Max W/C Ratio value on the Mix Designs form.

If System values are used for Yield checks:

• The check will pass if the Batch Setup Yield value is within the system
default tolerance range (25.65 to 28.35 cf).

12/21/16 197
If Mix Design override values are used for Yield checks:
• The check will pass if the Batch Setup Yield value is within the range
specified for the Yield value entered on the Mix Design’s form.
5. The above steps can be repeated for each mix.

198 12/21/16
Reviewing Mix Design Integrity Alarms
When you receive mix quality warnings, you can use the following method to
help ensure that the load will be ready to batch the next time you start it.

Notes: • DO NOT start a load while a mix quality warning is displayed.

• DO NOT make any immediate changes to the load on the Batch
Setup form while a mix quality warning is displayed.
• Remember that canceling a Material Limit mix quality warning
prevents subsequent Material Limit checks from being performed.

1. Click Cancel from the first and subsequent mix quality warnings.

2. Select Form > Run > Alarms - Mix Design Integrity to open the
“Alarms - Mix Design Integrity” form.

12/21/16 199
Tip!
• To find mix quality warnings for the current load, look for Load
Codes on the Alarms form that match the one on the Batch Setup
form (as indicated by the four red arrows in the previous screen
example).
• Also you have two options for viewing the entire text of the mix
quality warning.
— You can click the “Display Message” button at the
bottom of the Alarms form to see the actual mix
quality warning (without the “Cancel” and “OK To
Batch” buttons but with an OK button that you can
click to clear the message).
— Or, you can use the scroll buttons (indicated by the
two red arrows at the bottom of the previous screen
example) to read the entirety of the mix quality
warning text.

3. Review each mix quality warning to determine the best corrective

action for each one.
4. Once you have determined that the load has the proper concrete
properties, material amounts and yield, you can start the load and
respond to all mix quality warnings with “OK To Batch”.

200 12/21/16
Inventory Display on Batch Graphics

This feature allows real time inventory information to be displayed on the

Batch Graphics form while a batch is in progress. Once the feature has been
enabled (by checking a box on the System Parameters form), an Inventory
Device can be created for a material on one or more Batch Graphics scenes.
This Inventory Device will display two values: the capacity amount and the
on-hand inventory amount. The on-hand value changes in real time as the
material is weighed up during a batch. It also changes when material is
received by the plant, meaning an inventory receipt has been entered and
saved.
The vertical bar graph for an Inventory Device changes colors based on the
on-hand inventory levels (the second line above the shorter bar graph below):

Green: Inventory is above Yellow: Inventory is below Red: Inventory is below the
the Reorder Point the Reorder Point Minimum Qty

See Also:
Setups - Inventory Display on Batch Graphics
Operation - Inventory Display on Batch Graphics

12/21/16 201
Setups - Inventory Display on Batch Graphics
1. On the Rules tab of the System Parameters form, check the
“Allow Batch Graphics Inventory Display” box.

Note: When you save your changes to the System Parameters form a list of
Inventory Devices for all bins, silos, and metered feeds is created.
These devices can then be selected when Inventory Devices are
created on Batch Graphics (as explained later in this procedure).

2. For all materials for which an Inventory Device will be created on

Batch Graphics, do the following:
a) Access the Item/Locations form by clicking the “Locations” button at
the top right of the Materials form.
b) Enter values in the following fields on the Item/Locations form’s
Inventory tab:
Minimum Qty
Reorder Delivery Qty
Reorder Point

202 12/21/16
Sample Entries Only! Yours might be different.

c) If the Track On-Hand by setting is “Location”, also enter a Maximum

Qty on the Item/Locations form’s Inventory tab.

d) If the Track On-Hand by setting is “Device”, enter the device capacity

in the Capacity field of the appropriate device form (Bins/Silos or
Metered Feed).
3. On the Item/Location form’s Inventory tab, make sure the
Inventory Unit is the one you want displayed for the Inventory
Device on Batch Graphics.

Note: The Capacity unit for the bin/silo or metered feed is converted to
the Inventory Unit when displayed for the Inventory Device on
Batch Graphics.

4. On the Batch Graphics form, select the appropriate scene then

click the Edit Mode button at the top. (The background turns
orange to indicate you are in edit mode.)
5. Right click on a blank part of the orange background and select
“Add Device”.
The Add Device window is displayed.

12/21/16 203
6. Click the down arrow in the Device field and scroll to the bottom
of the list and select the appropriate Inventory Device.

Note: Inventory Device names are preceded by an “i”.

Once you select the Inventory Device, the Type field defaults to
“Inventory”.

7. Click “Add”.
The Inventory Device is added to the scene.
8. (Optional): You can change the device image (right click on the
device and select “Change Picture”) if you want something
different than the default image.
9. (Optional): You can change the device name (right click on the
device and select “Change Display Name”) if you want something
different than the default name, which is the material code.
10. Click “Save” at the top of the Batch Graphics form and then click
“Run Mode” to exit edit mode.

204 12/21/16
Operation - Inventory Display on Batch Graphics
Inventory Device (on the right)

Once the feature is set up, the Inventory Device shows the Device or Location
Capacity on the first line, and the On-Hand amount on the second line.
Inventory amounts are displayed in real time, meaning they are automatically
updated as batches are run, inventory is adjusted/received, or if device or
location max capacities are changed.
Right click menu for Inventory Device

Operational Notes:
• Changing a material (via right clicking and selecting “Change Material”
from the Inventory Device) also changes the material assigned to the bin,
silo, or metered feed.
• Conversely, changing the material (on the Bins/Silos or Metered Feeds
form) also changes the material for the Inventory Device.
• Changing a material’s Device or Location Max Capacity automatically
updates the Capacity value displayed by the Inventory Device.
• Receiving inventory (via right clicking and selecting “Inventory Receipts”
from the Inventory Device) automatically updates the On-Hand amount
displayed by the Inventory Device.
• Entering an inventory adjustment or setting the on-hand amount (via the
Inventory Adjustments form) automatically updates the On-Hand amount
displayed by the Inventory Device.
• The Capacity UOM for a device (bin, silo, or metered feed) is converted to
the Inventory Unit specified on the Item/Locations form for the material.

12/21/16 205
Example:
Silo Capacity = 60000 LBS
Inventory Unit on Item/Locations form = TN
Inventory Device displays Silo Capacity as 30 TN

206 12/21/16
Ticket Printing and Batch Weights

Normally, a ticket is printed each time a batch is run. Typically, the top half of
the ticket (delivery address and product information) is printed as soon as the
batch starts weighing up. Then when the batch starts discharging, batch
weight information and scale tares are printed.
The reason for this two-part print process is as follows. As soon as the top half
prints, it can be torn off and given to the driver. This saves time because the
batch operator doesn’t have to wait for the entire ticket to print before
starting the next batch. When the batch weight portion (bottom half) of the
ticket prints, it can be set aside for record purposes.

Note: Water/Cement Ratio is typically printed with batch weights at the

bottom, but it can also be printed on the top half if so configured.

Sample Batch Ticket

12/21/16 207
Topics in This Section
Batch Weights - Overview
Batch Weights - Printing for a Single Ticket
Batch Weights - Printing for Multiple Tickets
Batch Weights - Options
Batch Weights - Which Items to Print
Customizing Batch Weight Reports
Tolerance Error Symbols

Batch Weights - Overview

Batch weights can be printed at the bottom of a delivery ticket. They can also
be viewed and printed as follows:
• Batch weights for a single ticket can be viewed from the Batch Setup or
Ticket Editor forms. Batch weights for the selected ticket are displayed in
the Report Viewer and can be printed from there.
(See Batch Weights - Printing for a Single Ticket.)
• Batch weights for several tickets can be printed as a report from the
Reports/Utilities form.
(See Batch Weights - Printing for Multiple Tickets.)

See Also:
Customizing Batch Weight Reports

208 12/21/16
Batch Weights - Printing for a Single Ticket
1. Open the Batch Setup or the Ticket Editor form.

2. In the Date field at the top left of the form, select the date.
3. In the grid at the left of the form, select the ticket.
4. Click the “View Weights” button at the top right of the form.
Batch weights appear in the report viewer.
5. Click the printer icon at the top of the report viewer.
Sample Batch Weights are shown below for Standard and MnDOT tickets.
Standard Batch Weights

MnDOT Batch Weights

12/21/16 209
Batch Weights - Printing for Multiple Tickets
Use this utility to print batch weights for several tickets.

Note: Currently, the limit is 50 tickets. If you request more than 50, an
error message appears and only the top 50 tickets are included.

1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

2. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section at the top left of the

form, select Miscellaneous.
3. In the Printer field, select the report printer.
4. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section further down the
left side of the form, select Multiple Batch Weights.
Selecting the Process

5. Select filtering criteria on the right side of the form.

6. Click the “Run Section” button.
The report is sent to the report printer.

* Indicates that the material was either under- or over-tolerance

on the first scale reading, and that the operator chose to re-
read the scale. Also means that the new scale reading was, for
whatever reason, back in tolerance.
+ Indicates that the material went over tolerance, and that the
operator did not choose to re-read the scale.
– Indicates that the material went under tolerance, and that the
operator did not choose to re-read the scale.
> Indicates that the material went over tolerance, and that the
operator chose to re-read the scale, but the value re-read was
still out of tolerance.
< Indicates that the material went under tolerance, and that the
operator chose to re-read the scale, but the value re-read was
still out of tolerance.

Bottle Not Empty Alerts

Any time a “Bottle Not Empty” event occurs, the operator is alerted with a
notification message (similar to the following screen example) and the batch
weights will show a line for the bottle with an asterisk (*) in the line. This
asterisks indicates that the bottle was not empty. If a bottle is actually empty,
this entire line will not appear in the batch weights.

214 12/21/16
Batch Weights - Which Items to Print
1. On the Printer Setup form, select the printer record and check the
“Enabled” box at the top right of the form.
2. To print delivery information, enter/select the following
information:
— Code
— Type
— Printer
— When to Print
— Ticket Report - plus, check the “Enable” box to the right
3. To print batch weights, select a script in the Weight Report field
and check the “Enable” box at the right.
4. Using the tabs at the bottom of the form, do one of the following:
• To use the system’s standard load ticket, do nothing. The batch weight
items that are checked by default will be printed.
• Check/uncheck the batch weight items you want to print on the ticket.
(See the online help for the Printer Setup form for more information.)

12/21/16 215
Customizing Batch Weight Reports
To customize the following reports:
BatchWeights.rpn

BatchWeightsLoadLine.rpn or BatchWeightsBatchLine.rpn

BatchWeightsLoadInfo.rpn

1. On the Printer Setup form, set the desired Print Options for the
Load Line or Batch Line reports.

2. Save the Printer Setup form so that default reports are created.
3. Copy the reports you want to customize from the Reports
directory to the Custom\Reports directory.
Example: BatchWeights_{PrinterCode}.rpn
where: PrinterCode is the code from the Printer Setup form
The PrintTicket service and the View Ticket function on Batch Setup will
now use these Custom reports.
4. Using the Report Designer, modify the Custom reports as needed.

Tip!
To set the report to Uncompressed mode, select all of the fields then
click the “10 CPI” button at the top of the Report Designer. Remember
that because the text will be larger, fewer fields can be printed.

Note: These customizations only affect the printer specified in the filename.

To customize the following reports:

DeliveryTicket.rpn

ExtraProductsSubreport.rpn
BatchWeightsSummaryHeader.rpn

BatchWeightsMixer.rpn

BatchWeightsManualMaterials.rpn

BatchWeightsTares.rpn

1. Copy the reports you want to customize from the

Reports\Templates directory to the Custom\Reports directory
(example: BatchWeightsSummaryHeader.rpn).

The PrintTicket service and the View Ticket function on Batch Setup will
now use these Custom reports.

216 12/21/16
2. Using the Report Designer, modify the Custom reports as needed.
Once the Custom reports are compiled, the Report Compiler will find the
Custom versions first and use these files for all ticket printers.

Note: These customizations are general and will be compiled for all ticket
printers if the sub-report options are enabled.

12/21/16 217
Ticket Editing Functions

On the Ticket Editor form, you can edit certain information on tickets before
they are printed or exported to an invoicing system. You can also reprint,
copy, and cancel tickets from the Ticket Editor form.

Topics
To Edit a Ticket
To Reprint a Ticket (from Ticket Editor)
To Copy a Ticket (from Ticket Editor)
To Cancel a Ticket

To Edit a Ticket
1. Open the Ticket Editor form and select the correct date in the
Date field at the top left of the form. Tickets for that date are
displayed.

2. In the grid at the left, select the appropriate ticket.

3. Edit the desired information.
4. Save and close the Ticket Editor form.

To Reprint a Ticket (from Ticket Editor)

1. Open the Ticket Editor form and select the correct date in the
Date field at the top left of the form. Tickets for that date are
displayed.

2. In the grid at the left, select the appropriate ticket.

3. Click the “View Ticket” button at the top right of the form. The
ticket is displayed in the Report Viewer.
4. Click the printer icon at the top of the Report Viewer to reprint the
ticket.

To Copy a Ticket (from Ticket Editor)

1. Open the Ticket Editor form and select the correct date in the
Date field at the top left of the form.
Tickets for that date are displayed.

218 12/21/16
2. In the grid at the left of the form, select the desired ticket.
3. Click the Tickets menu on the toolbar and select “Copy”.
The ticket is copied and placed on the ticket list for today’s date. The
ticket also appears on the load index of the Batch Setup form.
The Ticket number is set to 0 but the system will increment it when the
ticket is batched.

To Cancel a Ticket
A ticket may be cancelled at any time. If a ticket is cancelled, it is not deleted
from the database; its status is just changed to “Cancelled”.

1. Open the Ticket Editor form and select the correct date in the
Date field at the top left of the form. Tickets for that date are
displayed.

2. In the grid at the left, select the appropriate ticket.

3. Select “Cancelled” in the Status field.
The Cancel Code field (which is normally grayed out) is displayed in
yellow, meaning you must select a reason for cancelling the ticket. By
default, “Customer Cancel” is selected as the reason but you can select
others from the dropdown list.
4. Select the Cancel Code and save your changes.

12/21/16 219
Inventory - Managing

The tasks involved in maintaining accurate inventory records include but are
not limited to the following:
• Checking On Hand amounts.
• Creating receipt records when materials and products are received.
• Entering adjustment quantities. (Examples: adjustments for scrapped
material or undocumented shipments.)
• Resetting on-hand amounts. (Example: corrected on-hand amount as a
result of a physical inventory measurement or count.)
• Flagging manual batching event records to indicate they should not be
deducted from inventory.
• Adding explanations to manual batching event records.

Inventory tasks include:

To Check On-Hand Amounts
To Enter Inventory Receipts
To Enter Inventory Adjustments
To Set On-Hand Amounts
To Edit Manual Material Events
To Reconcile Manual Material Events

To Check On-Hand Amounts

Open the On Hand Inventory form to view on-hand amounts for all materials.
This information is read-only except for the Plant code.
A shortcut to this form appears on the Menu Bar along the left side of the
COMMANDbatch screen. At any time, you can click this shortcut to pull up the
On Hand Inventory form.

220 12/21/16
To Enter Inventory Receipts
1. Open the Inventory Receipts form.
2. Specify the material type at the top left of the form:
• For a mix constituent, select “Material”.
• For a resale product, select “Other”.
3. Select the Date if different than today’s date.
4. Enter the Time if different than the current time.
5. Select the Plant - defaults to the primary plant assigned to your
user login.
6. Select the Material (or Other Product).
7. Enter the Quantity received. The unit defaults to the Purchase
unit designated for this material/product on the Units tab of the
Materials/Other Products form.
8. If the Cost is different than the standard cost that is displayed,
enter the new cost.
9. If the material’s inventory is tracked by device, you can select a
Bin/Tank - defaults to the current active device for the material.
If inventory is not tracked by device, this field is not editable.
10. On the Delivery tab, select the Vendor and enter the following
information if available: PO #, Ticket #, Hauler, Truck #.
11. To attach special notes to the receipt, enter that information on
the Notes tab.
12. Save your changes.
A material receipt is created and the on-hand amount is updated.

Note: Usage amounts are NOT affected by receipts.

To Enter Inventory Adjustments

1. Open the Inventory Adjustments form.

2. Specify the material type at the top left of the form:

12/21/16 221
5. Select the Plant - defaults to the primary plant assigned to your
user login.
6. Select the Material (or Other Product).
7. Make sure the “Adjust Quantity” option is selected at the top right
of the form.
8. Enter the new inventory Quantity. Negative values may be
entered.
9. If reason codes are used, select the appropriate code in the
Reason field.
10. On the Delivery tab, enter the Ticket # if applicable.
11. To attach special notes to the adjustment record, enter that
information on the Notes tab.

Note: If “See Notes” was selected in the Reason field, the Notes field
on the Notes tab turns yellow to indicate this is a required field.

12. Save your changes.

An adjustment record is created and the on-hand amount is updated.

Note: Usage amounts are not affected by adjustments.

222 12/21/16
To Set On-Hand Amounts
1. Open the Inventory Adjustments form.

2. Specify the material type at the top left of the form:

• For a mix constituent, select “Material”.
• For a resale product, select “Other”.
3. Select the Date if different than today’s date.
4. Enter the Time if different than the current time.
5. Select the Plant (defaults to the primary plant assigned to your
user login).
6. Select the Material (or Other Product).
7. Check the “Set On-Hand” option at the top right of the form.
8. In the Quantity field, enter the new inventory quantity. Negative
values may be entered.

Note: If you are switching a material’s Track On-Hand by type, leave this
quantity set to zero.

9. If reason codes are used, select the appropriate code in the

Reason field.
10. To attach special notes to the adjustment record, enter that
information on the Notes tab.

Note: If “See Notes” was selected in the Reason field, the Notes field
on the Notes tab turns yellow to indicate this is a required field.

11. Save your changes.

An adjustment record is created and the on-hand amount is updated.

Note: Usage amounts are NOT affected by adjustments.

12/21/16 223
To Edit Manual Material Events
1. Open the Inventory Events form.
2. Only change the Location if you are authorized to edit events for
other locations; this field defaults to the primary location
assigned to your user context.
3. Select the Date - defaults to today’s date.
4. Select the appropriate event record in the grid on the left side of
the form.
5. If the batched amount should not be deducted from inventory,
uncheck the “Deduct From Inventory” box.
6. If the manual event occurred outside a load, enter an Adjust
Reason Code.
7. Enter any special notes on the Notes tab.
8. Save your changes and close the form.
The event record is modified and the on-hand and usage amounts for the
material are updated.

Tip!
To be prompted to provide reason codes for manual events that
occur outside a load, check the Require Reconciliation box on the
Rules tab of the System Parameters form. The Inventory Events
form will then open whenever a manual event outside a load occurs.

224 12/21/16
To Reconcile Manual Material Events
To be prompted to provide reason codes for materials manually fed outside a
load, check the Require Reconciliation box on the Rules tab of the System
Parameters form. Then when a manual event occurs outside a load, the
Inventory Events form automatically opens so you can reconcile the manual
event as follows:

1. Select one of the following reason codes.

Bin Drain Select this reason code if the bin is being emptied
and the material is being returned to the stockpile.
When this reason code is selected:
• The Truck field is cleared.
• The Deduct From Inventory box is unchecked.
Not Used in Load Select this reason code if the material is not going
into a load (example: the material is contaminated).
When this reason code is selected:
• The Truck field is cleared.
• The Deduct From Inventory box is checked.
• An entry is required in the Notes section.
Used in Load Select this reason code if the material is used in a
load.
When this reason code is selected:
• A Truck must be selected. The operator can either
leave the pre-populated Truck (defaults to the Truck
used for the last completed load), or choose another
one from the dropdown list.
• The Deduct From Inventory box is checked.
Note:
It is important that a Truck be selected from the
dropdown list and not typed. This helps ensure the
correct truck-load association for the manual event.
Also, if the same truck is associated with more than
one load, make sure to select the correct truck-load
combination.

2. Save your changes.

Notes: • The form cannot be closed until you save your changes.
• If you do not save your changes, a reminder message is
displayed every three minutes until the form is saved.

Once the form is saved, on-hand and usage amounts for the material are
updated.

12/21/16 225
Alarms Form

The Alarms form provides a list of all alarms (error messages) and their user
responses for the control system. Alarms for all PCs connected to the control
system are logged. All fields on this form are read-only.

Note: Alarms older than 30 days are not displayed; however, the
Archive database retains alarm information for 90 days.

Some examples of alarms are:

• Database errors
• Out-of-tolerance conditions
• Communication link errors
This form is typically used for debugging purposes, such as when there are
problems sending a ticket. In this situation, a Command Alkon service
representative might view the logged error message to determine which field
or type of data did not get sent with the ticket.

Tip!
• If the message is too long to fit in the Message column, you can
view the entire message in the large text field at the bottom of
the Alarms form.
• Also, you can click the Display Message button at the bottom
right of the form to view the actual error message.

12/21/16 226
Running a Report

1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

2. In the ‘Select Report/Process Group’ section, select “Reports”. (If

you are saving a report as an Excel file, select “Reports Excel”.)
3. In the ‘Select Report or Process to Run’ section, select the report
you want to run.
4. On the right side of the form, select the appropriate filtering
criteria for the report. For example, you can filter many reports by
‘From’ and ‘To’ date.

Tip!
It is recommended that you select dates from the drop-down
calendar using the mouse rather than typing in the dates.

5. Click the “Run Section” button to generate the report.

• If records were found for the report, the following information is

displayed in the Description section.
Running... 
Completed!

• If no records were found for the report, the following information is

displayed in the Description section.
Running...
No records were found for this report!
Completed!

• If “Reports” was selected in step 2 above and records were found:

— The report is displayed in the Report Viewer.
— Click the printer icon at the top left of the viewer to print the report.

• If “Reports Excel” was selected in step 2 above and records were found:
— The report is saved as an Excel file in the Custom\Reports folder.
— The Excel filename is the report name plus the date (example:
MixProductionEXCEL2009-09-01.xls). If desired, you can change the
Excel filename in step 4 when you select the filtering criteria.

To Print Manual Station Scale Labels

1. Open the Calibrations form.

2. In the grid on the left side of the form, select the appropriate
calibration record.
Selecting Calibration Record

3. Click on the Labels tab.

Labels Tab

4. Add/modify labels for the scale.

“Display” labels typically show the scale name, capacity, and grad size.
“Zero” labels are used for the buttons that set the zero point for their
respective scales.
5. Click on the Save icon on the toolbar (or press <Ctrl + S> to
save your changes.
6. Open the Reports/Utilities form.
7. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section at the top left of the
form, select Miscellaneous.

228 12/21/16
Selecting the Group

8. In Printer field midway down the left side of the form, make sure
the report printer is selected.
Selecting Report Printer

9. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section further down on

the left of the form, select Manual Station Scale Labels.
Selecting the Process

10. On the right side of the form, select the Manual Station and the
number of copies to print.
Selecting the Manual Station

12/21/16 229
11. Click the “Run Section” button. The label report is displayed in the
Report Viewer window.
12. Click the printer icon at the top left of the Report Viewer window.
Printing the Labels

The Manual Station Scale Label report is sent to the report printer. An
example is shown next.
Manual Station Scale Label Report

230 12/21/16
To Print Manual Station Labels (except Scales)
Use this procedure to print labels for everything except scales (examples:
buttons for feeding materials, turning on vibrators, opening scale gates, etc.).

1. Open the IO Assignments form.

2. In the grid on the left side of the form, select the appropriate
manual station record.
Selecting Manual Station Record

3. At the top of the form, check the Edit Labels box. This makes the
Label-Top and Label-Bottom columns editable and grays out the
Type and Name columns so you don’t accidentally edit this
information.
Edit Labels Checkbox

4. In the Label-Top and Label-Bottom columns, add/modify labels

for the appropriate I/O points.
Label Columns

5. Click on the Save icon on the toolbar (or press <Ctrl + S> to
save your changes.
6. Open the Reports/Utilities form.
7. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section at the top left of the
form, select Miscellaneous.

12/21/16 231
Selecting the Group

8. In Printer field midway down the left side of the form, make sure
the report printer is selected.
Selecting Report Printer

9. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section further down on

the left side of the form, select Manual Station Labels.

Note: If you are printing labels for a Phase V Manual Station, select
“Phase V Manual Station Labels” instead.

Selecting the Process

10. On the right side of the form, select the Manual Station and the
number of copies to print.

232 12/21/16
Selecting the Manual Station

11. Click the “Run Section” button. The label report is displayed in the
Report Viewer window.
12. Click the printer icon at the top left of the Report Viewer window.
Printing the Labels

The Manual Station Label report is sent to the report printer. An example
of this report is shown next.

12/21/16 233
Manual Station Label Report

234 12/21/16
Logger Records - Requesting

This utility generates a list of all error messages that have not been
acknowledged (meaning, the user did not click OK to clear the message).

1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

2. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section, select

Miscellaneous.
3. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section, select Request
Logger Records.
4. On the right side of the form, select the Plant and click the “Run
Section” button.
A list is displayed showing all error messages that have not been
acknowledged.

12/21/16 235
Spectrum V4 Mix Designs Import

Topics
Overview of Spectrum V4 Mix Designs Import
Importing Spectrum V4 Mix Designs

Overview of Spectrum V4 Mix Designs Import

This utility imports mix designs from Version 4 Spectrum systems into
COMMANDbatch. For the import to be successful, the following rules must be
followed:
• The V4 Spectrum and COMMANDbatch systems must use the same
measurement system (US or Metric).
• The V4 mix design data must be output to a comma-delimited (.csv), tab-
delimited, or fixed-width file and saved on removable media (such as CD-
ROM) so that it can be transferred to the COMMANDbatch PC.
• The V4 mix design output data must reside in a spreadsheet in the
following format:

Start Length Data

Field Label Column (Max) Type Description
Mix Code 1 10 String Mix Design name and code
Mix 12 40 String Mix Design Description
Description
Plant Code 53 2 String
Price per Unit 56 10 Numeric The selling price for one cubic unit
(yard or meter) of this mix design.
Taxable Flag 67 1 Char “Y” allows this Mix to be taxed on
a delivery ticket.
“N” will make this Mix tax exempt.
Mixer Time 69 5 Numeric Displayed for central mix plants
and can be entered for mixes that
have different mixing times.
Mixer Code 75 1 Char Used for central mix plants with
(Not Used) more than one mixer and forces
this mix into a particular mixer.
Ingredient 1 77 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 1 88 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 2 99 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code

236 12/21/16
Start Length Data
Field Label Column (Max) Type Description
Ingredient 2 110 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 3 121 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 3 132 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 4 143 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 4 154 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 5 165 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 5 176 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 6 187 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 6 198 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 7 209 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 7 220 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 8 231 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 8 242 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 9 253 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 9 264 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 10 275 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 10 286 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 11 297 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 11 308 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix
Ingredient 12 319 10 String The name of the Material to use
Code
Ingredient 12 330 10 Numeric Amount of material to include in
Amount Mix

12/21/16 237
Importing Spectrum V4 Mix Designs
1. Insert the media containing the V4 mix design data into the
COMMANDbatch PC.

2. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

3. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section, select
Miscellaneous.
4. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section, select V4 Data
Import.
5. On the right side of the form, click the Run Section button.
The Data Import window is displayed.

6. In the File to Import field, select the import file to import then
click the Load button at the bottom of the window.
The window now looks similar to the following example.
(For ease of illustration, only two mix designs with two materials are
shown in the example. Your data might contain many mix designs with
several materials each.)

238 12/21/16
7. Click the Preview Data button to pull up the Import Data Preview
window showing the mix design data you are about to import.

8. Verify that this is the mix design data you want to import then
close the Import Data Preview window.
9. Click the Import button.
The data is imported and stored in the appropriate database tables.

12/21/16 239
The Data Import window now looks something like the following example.

The following information appears in the Description section at the top of

the Reports/Utilities form.
Running... 
Completed!
10. Close the Data Import window then close the Reports/Utilities
form.
The V4 mix design import process is now complete.

240 12/21/16
RTC Utilities

This Process Group on the Reports/Utilities Form allows you to perform the
following operations:
Restart Real Time Monitor
Restart Ethernet/IP Driver
Shutdown RTC
Re-boot RTC
Restart RTC
Upgrade RTC

RTC Tasks
The following operations can be performed from the RTC Tasks process on the
Reports/Utilities form:
Restart Real Time Monitor
Restart Ethernet/IP Driver

Restart Real Time Monitor

This utility allows you to restart rt_mon on the RTC.

1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

2. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section, select RTC Utilities.

3. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section, select RTC
Tasks.
On the right side of the form, filtering criteria and Run Section buttons
appear for the Restart Real Time Monitor and Restart Ethernet/IP Driver
utilities.
4. Click the “Run Section 1” button for the Restart Real Time Monitor
utility.
A DOS window opens while the restart is in progress then closes when the
restart is complete.

Restart Ethernet/IP Driver

This utility allows you to restart eip_scan on the RTC.

1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

2. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section, select RTC Utilities.

12/21/16 241
3. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section, select RTC
Tasks.
On the right side of the form, filtering criteria and Run Section buttons
appear for the Restart Real Time Monitor and Restart Ethernet/IP Driver
utilities.
4. Click the “Run Section 2” button for the Restart Ethernet/IP
Driver utility.
A DOS window opens while the restart is in progress then closes when the
restart is complete.

RTC Utilities
The following utilities can be performed from the RTC Utilities process on the
Reports/Utilities form:
Shutdown RTC
Re-boot RTC
Restart RTC

Shutdown RTC
This utility shuts down all tasks on the RTC but doesn’t reboot the RTC. This
comes in handy after you have run the End of Week process. Simply run the
Shutdown RTC utility then turn off the RTC computer on your way out the
door.

Note: The End of Day process backs up the database.

1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

2. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section, select RTC Utilities.

3. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section, select RTC
Utilities.
On the right side of the form, filtering criteria and Run Section buttons
appear for the Shutdown RTC, Re-boot RTC, and Restart RTC utilities.
4. Click the “Run Section 1” button for the Shutdown RTC utility.
The RTC is completely shut down. You can now either turn off the power
or restart the RTC.

Re-boot RTC
This utility stops and restarts the RTC. This is used primarily for
troubleshooting purposes (example: when a new network card is installed).

1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

2. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section, select RTC Utilities.

242 12/21/16
3. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section, select RTC
Utilities.
On the right side of the form, filtering criteria and Run Section buttons
appear for the Shutdown RTC, Re-boot RTC, and Restart RTC utilities.
4. Click the “Run Section 2” button for the Re-boot RTC utility.
The RTC is stopped and restarted.

Note: The RTC should be rebooted during the End of Day process to
ensure proper communications with the COMMANDbatch PC.

Restart RTC
This utility should be used (instead of the Re-boot RTC utility) on
COMMANDbatch vRTC systems to perform a “soft restart” of the RTC. With a
soft restart, the RTC code is restarted but the QNX operating system is not.

1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

2. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section, select RTC Utilities.

3. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section, select RTC
Utilities.
On the right side of the form, filtering criteria and Run Section buttons
appear for the Shutdown RTC, Re-boot RTC, and Restart RTC utilities.
4. Click the “Run Section 3” button for the Restart RTC utility.
The RTC is stopped and restarted but the QNX operating system is not.

Note: The RTC should be rebooted during the End of Day process to
ensure proper communications with the COMMANDbatch PC.

Upgrade RTC
If you need to upgrade the RTC with the latest RTC code:

1. Copy the latest RTC version and patch files to:

C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\BCP
Examples of RTC files:
spec628C.P.F and 628C_PATCH01.P.F
2. Open the Reports/Utilities form.
3. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section, select RTC Utilities.
4. In the “Select Report or Process to Run” section, select Upgrade
RTC.
5. On the right side of the form, click the “Run Section” button.

12/21/16 243
A DOS window opens and the upgrade process begins. The utility first
determines if the RTC is at the current version and patch level. If it is, the
upgrade process terminates. If the RTC needs upgraded, the process
begins and will take a few minutes. When the upgrade is complete, the
DOS window closes.

244 12/21/16
Ticket Export

The Ticket Export utility lets you transfer ticket data to a file to be used by an
external accounting system. This utility is set up on the Exports tab of the
System Parameters form then run on the Reports/Utilities form.

Topics
COMMANDbatch Setups for Ticket Export
To Export Ticket Data
Path and Filename Variables for Ticket Export

See Also:
Export Data Fields

12/21/16 245
COMMANDbatch Setups for Ticket Export
Go to the Exports tab of the System Parameters form and enter the following
information.

Export Format
Format in which ticket data will be exported: Choices are:
AC2000 Exports ticket data in the AC2000 format.
COMMANDbatch/ Exports ticket data in the COMMANDbatch format. Can also
Spectrum be used to export ticket data in the GivenHansco format.
Custom Exports ticket data in a custom format.
(See Custom Export SP for details.)
Eagle Exports ticket data in the Eagle format.
(See Eagle Specific Fields for details.)
MYOB SalesItem Exports ticket data in the MYOB Interface format.
- AUS. Format
ViewPoint Exports ticket data in a the ViewPoint format.

Custom Export SP
If “Custom” was selected as the Export Format, a custom SP must be entered
in the Custom Export SP field.

Notes: • If “MYOB SalesItem - AUS. Format” was selected as the Export

Format , enter MYOB_SalesItem_Export_SP in this field.
• If “ViewPoint” was selected as the Export Format, this field is
automatically populated with ViewPointTicketExport_SP.

• If you need to export more than 5 Extra Products, enter

SpectrumExport_ExtraProd_SP in this field.

Export Path
Path to the folder where ticket data will be exported. The Export Path is
combined with the Export Filename to form the full path to the export file.
Example:
Export Path = C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom
Export Filename = ticket.dat

246 12/21/16
Full Path = C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom\ticket.dat
You can also use Path and Filename Variables for Ticket Export to create paths
based on the day of the week, day of the month, or month of the year.

Export Filename
Name of the destination export file (which is a text file). The default filename
is Ticket.dat.

You can also insert a {time} token into the Export Filename string to create
a destination filename that includes the time the file was created (in hhmmss
format).
Example: If the file creation time is 12:10:09,
{time}_Ticket.dat becomes
121009_Ticket.dat

Update Ticket Status

Checked only if you want to mark “exported” tickets so they won’t be
exported the next time you run Ticket Export.

Note: You can override this setting by unchecking the “Exported” option
on the Reports/Utilities form the next time you run Ticket Export.

Export Date Format

Defaults to mm/dd/yy. The other choice is dd/mm/yy.

Note: If the Export Format is “MYOB SalesItem - AUS”, the date format is
hard-coded as dd/mm/yy.

Eagle Specific Fields

No Delimiters
Eagle ticket export only. If this box is checked, no delimiters are included in
the data. Examples of delimiters: CR (carriage return), LF (line feed), and
commas. By default, this box is unchecked.

No Record Code
Eagle ticket export only. If this box is checked, the Record Code “Tr” is not
included at the beginning of an Eagle ticket record. By default, this box is
unchecked.

Quotation Character
Eagle ticket export only. Quotation character to be used for Eagle ticket data.
By default, this field is blank, meaning the normal (“) character is used.

12/21/16 247
Date Format
Eagle ticket export only. Date format for Eagle ticket data. Choices are:
“05/22/98”,”13:22:33”
“MON MAY 22 1998”,”13:22:33”

248 12/21/16
To Export Ticket Data
1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.
2. Under “Select Report/Process Group” at the top left of the form,
select Ticket Export.
— Filtering criteria and a “Run Section” button for Ticket Export are
displayed on the right side of the form.
3. Specify the following information:

From and To dates These fields default to the first and last day of the
current month. But you can use the drop-down
calendar to select other dates. Only tickets within
this date range will be exported.

Company Defaults to the primary company for the current user

Ticket Type: Check COD to include only tickets for COD

COD and/or Charge customers.
Check Charge to include only tickets for customers
on credit.
Check both COD and Charge to include all tickets.

Ticket Status The following options are checked by default:

• Open
• Ready
• Canceled
• Held
• Voided
• Exported **

** Uncheck this option if you want to re-export

tickets already exported.

File Name Defaults to the Export Path and Export Filename

specified on the Exports tab of the System
Parameters form. The exported file is a text file.
Note: The path and filename together make up the
complete export destination.

4. Click the “Run Section” button.

When the export process is finished, the following information appears in
the Description section at the top of the Reports/Utilities form.
— Running... 
Completed!

12/21/16 249
Note: The date format used for the export file defaults to the format
selected in the Date Format field of the Exports tab on the System
Parameters form.
Exception:
The date format for “MYOB Interface” ticket exports is hard-coded as
dd/mm/yy. Tickets exported for the MYOB Interface use the Australian
format, which is much different that the U.S. version.

See Also:
Export Data Fields

250 12/21/16
Path and Filename Variables for Ticket Export
Environment Variables
When COMMANDbatch is installed, the following “Environment Variables” are
created with the default destination folders as indicated.
— %CAICommonDataDir%
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\
— %CAICustomDir%
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom
— %CAIdotNETDir%
C:\Program Files (x86)\CAI\COMMANDbatch\dotNET Modules
— %CAIHelpDir%
C:\Program Files (x86)\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Help
— %CAIInstallDir%
C:\Program Files (x86)\CAI\COMMANDbatch\
— %CAILicenseDir%
C:\ProgramData\CAI\Commandbatch\Custom
— %CAIPreWatSys%
C:\Program Files (x86)\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Precision Water
System
To use one of the above destinations for ticket export, enter the appropriate
environment variable in the Export Path field of the System Parameters
form. Tickets will be exported to this destination folder and stored in the file
entered in the System Parameter form’s Export Filename field.
Example:
If %CAICustomDir% is entered as the Export Path and ticket.dat is the
Export Filename, tickets will be exported to:
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom\ticket.dat

Path and Filename Variables

The following variables can be used in the Export Path and Export Filename
fields on the System Parameters form’s Export tab to automatically name the
folder and/or filename where tickets will be exported.

{dayofweek}
Can be inserted into the Export Path string to create a destination folder with
the current day of the week (SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, or SAT) in the
folder name.

12/21/16 251
Example: If the current day is Tuesday,
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom\{dayofweek} becomes
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom\TUE
Can also be inserted into the Export Filename string to create a destination
file with the current day of the week (SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, or
SAT) in the filename.
Example: If the current day is Tuesday,
{dayofweek}_Ticket.dat becomes
TUE_Ticket.dat

{dayofmonth}
Can be inserted into the Export Path string to create a destination folder with
the current day of the month (01 through 31) in the folder name.
Example: If the current day of the month is June 7,
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom\JUN{dayofmonth}
becomes
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom\JUN07
Can also be inserted into the Export Filename string to create a destination
file with the current day of the month (01 through 31) in the filename.
Example: If the current day of the month is June 7,
{dayofmonth}_Ticket.dat becomes
07_Ticket.dat

{monthname}
Can be inserted into the Export Path string to create a destination folder with
the current month (JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL, AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV,
or DEC) in the folder name.
Example: If the current month is June,
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom\{monthname} becomes
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom\JUN
Can also be inserted into the Export Filename string to create a destination
file with the current month (JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL, AUG, SEP,
OCT, NOV, or DEC) in the filename.
Example: If the current month is June,
{monthname}_Ticket.dat becomes
JUN_Ticket.dat

252 12/21/16
{time}
Can be inserted into the Export Filename string to create a destination
filename that includes the time the file was created (in hhmmss format).
Example: If the file creation time is 12:10:09,
{time}_Ticket.dat becomes
121009_Ticket.dat

12/21/16 253
Material Records Export

The Material Record Export utility lets you transfer batch results records to a
file. These records are exported in the Spectrum format. You can export to the
default file on the COMMANDbatch computer’s C: drive, or you can enter a
different path and filename.

Notes about Users:

• To export tickets with a COMMANDbatch user account other than 'sa', you
must have a Windows "User" account with a password of mudxxxxx. You
do not need to be logged on to the "User" account but it must exist.
If you are adding the "User" account for the first time or have changed
the password back to mudxxxxx, you will have to run the "Apply
Database Patches" section in the DButility to create a proxy account.
If the Windows "User" account does not exist or the password is not
mudxxxxx, you must use the COMMANDbatch 'sa' account to export
tickets.
• For users authorized to modify the layout of exported data, the section
“Export Data Fields” shows the layout of the standard data.

To Export Material Records

1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

2. Under ‘Select Report/Process Group’ at the top left, select

“Material Record”.
Filtering criteria and a Run Section button for Material Record Export
appear on the right side of the form.
3. Specify the following information:
From and To dates
These fields default to the first and last day of the current month. But you
can use the drop-down calendar to select other dates. Only material
records within this date range will be exported.
Company
Defaults to the primary company for the current user login but you can
select another company if it is authorized for your login.
File Name
You can enter your own path and file name destination, but, by default,
\Mat_Rec.{dayofmonth} is appended to the Export Path specified on
the Ticket Export tab of the System Parameters form to make up the
complete export destination.

254 12/21/16
Example:
C:\Temp\Mat_Rec.{dayofmonth}
Where:
{dayofmonth} represents the numerical day of the month (1
through 31) when the export takes place. This number appears at
the end of the stored file name (example: Mat_Rec.05).
4. Click the “Run Section” button.
— When the export is complete, the following information appears in
the Description section at the top of the Reports/Utilities form.
Running... 
Completed!

Note: The date format used for records in the export file defaults to
the format selected in the Date Format field of the Exports tab
on the System Parameters form.

See Also:
Export Data Fields

12/21/16 255
Eagle Performance Data Export

The Eagle Performance Data Export utility lets you transfer performance data
in Eagle-style format to a file. This utility is run from the Reports/Utilities
form.

To Export Eagle Performance Data

1. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

2. In the ‘Select Report/Process Group’ section, select

“Miscellaneous”.
3. In the ‘Select Report or Process to Run’ section, select “Eagle
Performance Data Export”.
Filtering criteria and a Run Section button appear on the right side of the
form.
4. Specify the following information:
From and To dates These fields default to the current date. But you can use the
drop-down calendar to select other dates. Only records
within this date range will be exported.
Plant Code Defaults to the primary plant for the current user login but
you can select another plant if it is authorized for your
login.
File Name Defaults to the Export Path specified on the System
Parameters form’s Export tab. The export filename defaults
to “Perform.txt”.
For example, if the Environment Variable
%CAIInstallDir% is specified as the Export Path on the
System Parameters form, the File Name field defaults to:
C:\Program Files
(x86)\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Perform.txt.
(See Path and Filename Variables for more information
about Environment Variables.)
You can change the export path and filename in the File
Name field for the current export session, but it will not
remain changed after you exit the export utility.

5. Click the “Run Section” button.

When the export process is finished, the following information appears in
the Description section at the top of the Reports/Utilities form.

256 12/21/16
Running... 
Completed!

Note: Only records that contain drop history are exported.

See Also:
Export Data Fields

12/21/16 257
Export Data Fields

This section lists each field included in the standard ticket and material record
exports. It also lists fields included in the MYOB Interface and ViewPoint ticket
exports.
Three standard ticket layouts are provided, one for COMMANDbatch/
Spectrum, one for Eagle, and one for AC2000.
Fields included in the Material Record and Eagle Performance Data exports are
also listed.

Topics
COMMANDbatch Ticket Export Fields
Eagle Ticket Export Fields
Material Record Export Fields
Eagle Performance Data Export Fields
AC2000 Ticket Export Fields
MYOB Interface Ticket Export Fields
ViewPoint Ticket Export Fields

COMMANDbatch Ticket Export Fields

Each record of exported ticket data represents one ticket and its associated
ticket products. Data is ASCII character-based and contiguous, starting at an
offset from the beginning of the record and extending for a specific length,
depending on the field contents.

Note: For compatibility with existing systems, ticket data exported

from COMMANDbatch uses the same format as ticket data from
Spectrum legacy batch control system.

Fields within a record are comprised of the following Data Types:

Data Type Description

258 12/21/16
Data Type Description
Numeric Field Length number of Characters, with leading
blanks and right justified. Example: 185 in a Field
with a Length of 5 will result in 'blank blank 185'
Decimal Decimal fields will contain a Decimal (.) point as
part of the Length with a precision dependent upon
the actual Data (mostly 2 positions) They will be
leading-blank filled and right-justified.

COMMANDbatch Ticket Export Fields

Data Field Name Data Type Length Offset Description/Comment

DATE Data 8 1 Leave Plant or Ticketed Date
TIME Time 5 9 Leave Plant or Ticketed Time
CUSTOMER CODE Text 10 14 Customer Code
ACCOUNT# Text 10 24 Customer Accounting Code
CUSTOMER NAME Text 30 34 Customer Description
JOB NAME/PROJECT Text 30 64 Project Description
NAME
CUST ADDRESS 1 Text 30 94 Job Address Line 1
PO NUMBER Text 10 124 PO Number (Alphanumeric)
USER DEF 3 Text 10 134 Blanks
ORDER CODE/JOB Text 2 144 Order Code
NUMBER
COD FLAG Char 1 146 'Y' or 'N'
CUST ACCOUNT Text 4 147 Blanks
STATUS
TAX CODE Text 4 151 Tax Code
PRODUCT EXTENDED Decimal 8 155 Mix Extended Price
PRICE
PRODUCT CODE (MIX Text 10 163 Mix Code
DESIGN)
LOAD SIZE Decimal 5 173 Load Size in the form: 9.00
UNIT PRICE Decimal 7 178 Mix Unit Price
ORDERED Decimal 7 185 Mix Ordered Amount
DELIVERED Decimal 7 192 Mix Delivered Amount
LOAD NUMBER Numeric 5 199 Load Code
TRUCK CODE Text 4 204 Truck Code
DRIVER CODE Text 5 208 Driver Code
SLUMP Decimal 4 213 Slump
TICKET NUMBER Numeric 6 217 Ticket Number
PLANT NAME Text 2 223 Plant Code
TAX TOTAL Decimal 8 225 Tax Total

12/21/16 259
Data Field Name Data Type Length Offset Description/Comment
PREVIOUS TOTAL Decimal 8 233 Previous Ticket's Total
SUB TOTAL Decimal 8 241 Sub-Total
DISCOUNT TOTAL Decimal 8 249 Discount Total
TICKET TOTAL Decimal 8 257 This Ticket's Total
GRAND TOTAL Decimal 8 265 Previous + This Ticket's Total
Blank Field 3 273 0.0
BLANK FIELD Blank 1 276 blank
LEFT PLANT TIME Time 5 277 Leave Plant Time (hh:mm)
ON JOB TIME Time 5 282 Arrive Job Time (hh:mm)
LEFT JOB TIME Time 5 287 Return Time (hh:mm)
RETURN TIME Time 5 292 Arrive Plant Time (hh:mm)
USER DEFINE ONE Text 10 297 Batch Setup User Short 1
USER DEFINE TWO Text 10 307 Batch Setup User Short 2
USER DEFINE THREE Text 10 317 Batch Setup User Short 3
USER DEFINE FOUR Text 10 327 Batch Setup User Long 1
USER DEFINE FIVE Text 10 337 Batch Setup User Long 2
RESALE PRODUCT 1 Text 10 347 Extra Product 1
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 1 Decimal 7 357
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 1 Decimal 7 364
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 1 Decimal 7 371
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 1 Decimal 6 378
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 1 Decimal 7 384
EXTENDED PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 2 Text 10 391 Extra Product 2
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 2 Decimal 7 401
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 2 Decimal 7 408
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 2 Decimal 7 415
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 2 Decimal 6 422
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 2 Decimal 7 428
EXTENDED PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 3 Text 10 435 Extra Product 3
CODE

260 12/21/16
Data Field Name Data Type Length Offset Description/Comment
RESALE PRODUCT 3 Decimal 7 445
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 3 Decimal 7 452
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 3 Decimal 7 459
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 3 Decimal 6 466
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 3 Decimal 7 472
EXTENDED PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 4 Text 10 479 Extra Product 4
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 4 Decimal 7 489
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 4 Decimal 7 496
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 4 Decimal 7 503
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 4 Decimal 6 510
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 4 Decimal 7 516
EXTENDED PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 5 Text 10 523 Extra Product 5
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 5 Decimal 7 533
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 5 Decimal 7 540
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 5 Decimal 7 547
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 5 Decimal 6 554
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 5 Decimal 7 560
EXTENDED PRICE
LONG_BLANK_FIELD Blanks 11 567 Blanks
CUSTOMER ADDRESS Text 30 578 Job Address Line 2
LINE 1
CUSTOMER ADDRESS Text 30 608 Job Address Line 3
LINE 2
CITY Text 15 638 Job City
STATE Text 3 653 Job State
ZIPCODE Text 10 656 Job Zip Code
BLANK FIELD Char 1 666 Blank

12/21/16 261
Data Field Name Data Type Length Offset Description/Comment
RESALE PRODUCT 1 Text 30 667 Extra Product 1 Description
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 2 Text 30 697 Extra Product 2 Description
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 3 Text 30 727 Extra Product 3 Description
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 4 Text 30 757 Extra Product 4 Description
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 5 Text 30 787 Extra Product 5 Description
DESCRIPTION
Discount Percent Specific 6 817 0.00
(always '000.00')
End-of-Record 1 823 CR

Optional fields to use for 6-12 additional Resale Products:

Note: When all of the following optional fields are used for Resale Products,
the End-of-Record Offset number becomes 1341.

Data Field Name Data Type Length Offset Description/Comment

RESALE PRODUCT 6 Text 10 823 6th Extra Product
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 6 Text 30 833
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 6 Decimal 7 863
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 6 Decimal 7 870
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 6 Decimal 7 877
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 6 Decimal 6 884
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 6 Decimal 7 890
EXTENDED PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 7 Text 10 897 7th Extra Product
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 7 Text 30 907
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 7 Decimal 7 937
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 7 Decimal 7 944
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 7 Decimal 7 951
LOAD SIZE

262 12/21/16
RESALE PRODUCT 7 Decimal 6 958
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 7 Decimal 7 964
EXTENDED PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 8 Text 10 971 8th Extra Product
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 8 Text 30 981
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 8 Decimal 7 1011
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 8 Decimal 7 1018
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 8 Decimal 7 1025
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 8 Decimal 6 1032
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 8 Decimal 7 1038
EXTENDED PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 9 Text 10 1045 9th Extra Product
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 9 Text 30 1055
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 9 Decimal 7 1085
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 9 Decimal 7 1092
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 9 Decimal 7 1099
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 9 Decimal 6 1106
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 9 Decimal 7 1112
EXTENDED PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 10 Text 10 1119 10th Extra Product
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 10 Text 30 1129
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 10 Decimal 7 1159
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 10 Decimal 7 1166
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 10 Decimal 7 1173
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 10 Decimal 6 1180
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 10 Decimal 7 1186
EXTENDED PRICE

12/21/16 263
RESALE PRODUCT 11 Text 10 1193 11th Extra Product
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 11 Text 30 1203
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 11 Decimal 7 1233
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 11 Decimal 7 1240
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 11 Decimal 7 1247
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 11 Decimal 6 1254
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 11 Decimal 7 1260
EXTENDED PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 12 Text 10 1267 12th Extra Product
CODE
RESALE PRODUCT 12 Text 30 1277
DESCRIPTION
RESALE PRODUCT 12 Decimal 7 1307
ORDERED
RESALE PRODUCT 12 Decimal 7 1314
DELIVERED
RESALE PRODUCT 12 Decimal 7 1321
LOAD SIZE
RESALE PRODUCT 12 Decimal 6 1328
UNIT PRICE
RESALE PRODUCT 12 Decimal 7 1334
EXTENDED PRICE
End-of-Record 1 1341 CR

264 12/21/16
Eagle Ticket Export Fields
Each record in Eagle-formatted ticket export data represents a ticket and is
delimited by a carriage return / line feed pair. Field contents are comma (,)
delimited and one of the following types:

Data Type Description

String delimited by a comma character and a quotation
mark character at both the beginning and ending
of the field unless they are the first or last field.
Example: ,”1/2 Rock”,
Numeric delimited by only comma characters at both ends
of the field unless they are the first or last field.
Example: ,12000,
Date / Time string time stamp is divided into two strings as:
,”MON MAY 22 1989", “13:22:33”,

Eagle Ticket Export Fields

Data Field
Name Data Type Length Description/Comment
record_code String 2 always "Tr"
ticket_id String 8 Begins with “L” if non-dispatch
ticket
stamp Date / Time 23 2 strings 15, 8, Load End
string
order_id String 8
customer_id String 8
mix_id String 8
load_size Numeric 5 (4 + dp, 12.34)
resold Numeric 5 (4 + dp, 12.34)
is_cod Char 1 "Y" or "N"
time_batched Date / Time 23 2 strings 15, 8, Load Start
string
time_due Date / Time 23 2 strings 15, 8, Required On Job
string Time
truck_number Numeric 5
unit_price Numeric 9
tax Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 12345.678)
Agg1_name String 8
Agg1_amount Numeric 9
Agg1_units String 3
Agg2_name String 8
Agg2_amount Numeric 9

12/21/16 265
Data Field
Name Data Type Length Description/Comment
Agg2_units String 3
Agg3_name String 8
Agg3_amount Numeric 9
Agg3_units String 3
Agg4_name String 8
Agg4_amount Numeric 9
Agg4_units String 3
Agg5_name String 8
Agg5_amount Numeric 9
Agg5_units String 3
Cem1_name String 8
Cem1_amount Numeric 9
Cem1_units String 3
Cem2_name String 8
Cem2_amount Numeric 9
Cem2_units String 3
Cem3_name String 8
Cem3_amount Numeric 9
Cem3_units String 3
Admix1_name String 8
Admix1_amount Numeric 9
Admix1_units String 3
Admix2_name String 8
Admix2_amount Numeric 9
Admix2_units String 3
Admix3_name String 8
Admix3_amount Numeric 9
Admix3_units String 3
Admix4_name String 8
Admix4_amount Numeric 9
Admix4_units String 3
Admix5_name String 8
Admix5_amount Numeric 9
Admix5_units String 3
Admix6_name String 8
Admix6_amount Numeric 9
Admix6_units String 3
Water1_name String 8

266 12/21/16
Data Field
Name Data Type Length Description/Comment
Water1_amount Numeric 9
Water1_units String 3
Water2_name String 8
Water2_amount Numeric 9
Water2_units String 3
Extra_id1 String 8
Extra_qty1 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 123456.78)
Extra_price1 Numeric 9
Extra_tax1 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 12345.678)
Extra_id2 String 8
Extra_qty2 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 123456.78)
Extra_price2 Numeric 9
Extra_tax2 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 12345.678)
Extra_id3 String 8
Extra_qty3 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 123456.78)
Extra_price3 Numeric 9
Extra_tax3 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 12345.678)
Extra_id4 String 8
Extra_qty4 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 123456.78)
Extra_price4 Numeric 9
Extra_tax4 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 12345.678)
Extra_id5 String 8
Extra_qty5 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 123456.78)
Extra_price5 Numeric 9
Extra_tax5 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 12345.678)
Extra_id6 String 8
Extra_qty6 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 123456.78)
Extra_price6 Numeric 9
Extra_tax6 Numeric 9 (8 + dp, 12345.678)
Is_modified String 1
Is_voided String 1
Percent_moist1 Numeric 5 (4 + dp, 123.4, signed)
Percent_moist2 Numeric 5 (4 + dp, 123.4, signed)
Percent_moist3 Numeric 5 (4 + dp, 123.4, signed)
Percent_moist4 Numeric 5 (4 + dp, 123.4, signed)
Percent_moist5 Numeric 5 (4 + dp, 123.4, signed)
Driver_id String 8
Agg1_target Numeric 9

12/21/16 267
Data Field
Name Data Type Length Description/Comment
Agg2_target Numeric 9
Agg3_target Numeric 9
Agg4_target Numeric 9
Agg5_target Numeric 9
Cem1_target Numeric 9
Cem2_target Numeric 9
Cem3_target Numeric 9
Admix1_target Numeric 9
Admix2_target Numeric 9
Admix3_target Numeric 9
Admix4_target Numeric 9
Admix5_target Numeric 9
Admix6_target Numeric 9
Water1_target Numeric 9
Water2_target Numeric 9
Is_Local Char 1
Total Water Numeric 9
Reference ID String 8
Type Code String 2
Is Metric Char 1

268 12/21/16
Material Record Export Fields
Each Material Record Export record represents one ticket and its associated
ticket products and batch material usages. Each Record is terminated by a
carriage return / line feed pair. Data is ASCII character-based with each field
separated by the comma(,) character.
The original Spectrum implementation included the Batch Lines or Mix
Material information in the 55 characters at the end of each Record.
COMMANDbatch does not include the Batch Lines in the final 55 characters,
since the file is only utilized for accounting purposes. Fields within a record
are comprised of the following Data Types:

Data Type Description

Date 8 Characters in the format MM/DD/YY. The leading
Character is Zero (0) filled. Therefore the Month
(MM) will result in 01 thru 09, 11, and 12.
Time 5 Characters in the format HH:MM. The leading
Character is Zero (0) filled. Therefore the Hours
(HH) will be 00 thru 09 or 10 thru 23.
Char 1 Character in length. 0 thru 9 or A thru Z.
Text Text Data Type fields are Right justified and trailing
blank filled to extend for the Field's length.
Numeric Field Length number of Characters, with leading
blanks and right justified. Example: 185 in a Field
with a Length of 5 will result in 'blank blank 185'
Decimal Decimal fields will contain a Decimal (.) point as
part of the Length with a precision dependent upon
the actual Data (mostly 2 positions) The will be
leading blank filled and right justified.

Material Record Export Fields

Data Field Name Data Type Length Description/Comment

Customer Code Text 40
Project Code Text 10
Ticket Date Date 8
Ticket Time Time 5
Plant Code Text 3 Alternate Plant Code
Ticket Number Text 8
Truck Number Text 10
Driver Number Text 5
Load Size Decimal 6 xxx.xx
Mix Code Text 10
Slump Decimal 5 xx.xx
Water Adjust Text 5 LOAD_LINE.Trim_Qty 00000

12/21/16 269
Data Field Name Data Type Length Description/Comment
Water Cement Decimal 5 Water Cement Ratio 00.00
Material Text 10
Material Units Text 3
Target Amount Decimal 6 Blank blank blank 0.0
Actual Amount Decimal 6 Blank blank blank 0.0
SSD Mix Text 6 000000
Units of Measure Text 3
Actual Water Decimal 6
Moisture Decimal 6 Moisture_Percent
Material Tolerance Char 1
Fast Feed Cycles Text 2 00
Time Feed Cycles Text 2 Number of Timed Feeds xx
Slow Feed Cycles Text 2 Number of Slow Feeds xx
Jog Feed Cycles Text 2 Number of Jog Feeds xx
Drop Number Text 2 xx
Number of Drops Text 2 Total of Fast, Time, and Jog Feeds xx
MF Target Decimal 6 BATCH_LINE.Net_Target_Amt xxxx.x
MF Actual Decimal 6 BATCH_LINE.Net_Batched_Amt xxxx.x
Starting Preact Decimal 6 First Drop_History.Actual_Preact xxxx.x
Feed Rate Decimal 6 FIrst Drop_History.Close_Flow xxxx.x
Batch Flag Char 1 X = Manual
N = No Batch Weights / No Print
P = Print Ticket / No Batch Weights
B = Batch Weights / No Print
Y = Print Ticket and Batch Weights
Batch Status Char` 1 Y = Batch
N = Not Batched
Simulate Status Char 1 S = Simulate
B = Actual Batch
T = Training
Manual Feed Flag Char 1 M = Manual
A = Automatic
Inventory Flag Char 1 Y = Inventory updated
N = Inventory not updated
Spare Char 55

270 12/21/16
Eagle Performance Data Export Fields
Each record in Eagle performance export data is delimited by a carriage return
/ line feed pair. Field contents are comma (,) delimited and one of the
following types:

Data Type Description

Here is the layout of data fields for the Eagle Performance Data Export utility.
COMMANDbatch Eagle Style Perform.8 Export format

Data Field
Name Data Type Length Description/Comment
record_code string 2 always "Pr"
ticket_id string 8 Begins with “L” if non-dispatch
ticket
mix_id string 8
batch_number sumeric 9
drop_number numeric 5
load_size numeric 5 4 + dp, 12.34
is Metric string 1 Y = Metric, N = Customary
reserved string 1 always N
batch_start string(s) 23 2 strings 15, 8, Load Size
start_stamp string(2) 23 2 strings 15, 8, Matl start
start_of_drop numeric 9 master start tick in 100ths
material string 8
target numeric 9
actual numeric 9
status string 6 Under, Over, Done, Manual
gate_open numeric 9 100ths of sec. from Start
start_of_flow numeric 9 100ths of sec. from Start
low_flow numeric 5 elapsed 100ths of sec. from 0
gate_close numeric 9 100ths of sec. from Start
jogs numeric 5 total number of jogs

12/21/16 271
Data Field
Name Data Type Length Description/Comment
end_of_drop numeric 9 100ths of sec. from Start
start_of_disc numeric 9 100ths of sec. from Start
end_of_disc numeric 9 100ths of sec. from Start
start_tare numeric 9 scale weight @ start of disc
end_tare numeric 9 scale weight 15, 8, end time
end_stamp numeric 23 2 strings 15, 8, end time

AC2000 Ticket Export Fields

Data Field Name Max Length Output

TI.Plant_Code 2 Plant Code
TI.Description 30 Plant Name
LOC.Address_Line1 30 Location Address 1
LOC.Address_Line2 30 Location Address 2
LOC.City 20 Location City
LOC.State_Code 2 Location State
LOC.Postal_Code 10 Location Zip
Plant Phone Number 12 - Not Used -
C.Customer_Code 10 Customer Code
C.Description 30 Customer Name
C.Address_Line1 30 Customer Address Line 1
C.Address_Line2 30 Customer Address Line 2
C.City 20 Customer City
C.State_Code 2 Customer State Abr.
C.Postal_Code 10 Customer Zip Code
Customer Phone 12 - Not Used -
TI.Order_Code 10 Order Code (Ship To)
ORD.Project_Description 30 Project Description
ORD.Project_Description 30 Project Description
ORD.Address_Line1 30 Order Address 1
ORD.Address_Line2 30 Order Address 2
ORD.Address_Line3 30 Order Address 3
ORD.COD_Flag 3 “Yes” or “No”
TI.Qty_UOM 2 Order Unit of Measure
TI.Load_Size 5 Order Load Size
Number of Tickets 5 Number of Tickets for Order
Order Loads ToDate 5 0.0 - Not Used -
Order Total Amounts 7 0.0 - Not Used -
Order Amount Today 7 0.0 - Not Used -

272 12/21/16
Data Field Name Max Length Output
Order Amount To Date 7 0.0 - Not Used -
TI.Slump 7 Slump
TI.Slump_UOM 2 Slump Unit of Measure
Percent Air 4 0.00 - Not Used -
Percent Calcium 4 0.00 - Not Used -
TI.Truck_Code 4 Truck Code
TI.Truck_Type 4 Truck Type
TI.Leave_Plant_TDS 8 “00:00:00” Truck Time Left Plant
TI.Req_On_Job_TDS 8 “00:00:00” Truck Time On Job
TI.Return_TDS 8 “00:00:00” Truck Time Left Job
TI.Arrive_Plant_TDS 8 “00:00:00” Truck Time In Yard
D.Driver_Code 3 Driver Code
Driver Name 30 - Not Used -
TI.Ticket_Code 8 Ticket Number
TI.Load_Code 8 Load Unique Number
Voic (set below) 1 - Not Used -
Redirected 1 - Not Used -
Adjusted 1 - Not Used -
Truck Changed 1 - Not Used -
Modified Flag (set below) 1 - Not Used -
Load Deleted (Aborted) Flag 1 - Not Used -
Load Simulated Flag 1 - Not Used -
Load Manual Flag 1 - Not Used -
Load Reprinted Flag 1 - Not Used -
TI.Load_Code 8 Load Number
TI.Load_Start_TDS 8 “00:00:00” Load Start Time
Load Batch Time 8 “00:00:00” - Not Used -
Load WComplete to Disch 8 “00:00:00” - Not Used -
Load D Start to D Compl 8 “00:00:00” - Not Used -
Load D Compl to done 8 “00:00:00” - Not Used -
TI.Load_End_TDS 8 “00:00:00” Load End Time
TI.Ticketed_TDS 8 “00/00/00” Batch Date
Weather 30 - Not Used -
Current User 30 - Not Used -
Weigh Master 30 - Not Used -
TI.Load_Code 8 Load Unique Number
Print Format 1 “A”
Formula Class 8 “class”
Formula Strength 8 8 Blanks - Not Used -
Formula Agg size 8 8 Blanks - Not Used -
Formula Mix Time 3 0 - Not Used -

12/21/16 273
Data Field Name Max Length Output
Formula Max Water 5 0.00 - Not Used -
Formula Tax Type 10 - Not Used -
Last Truck Code 4 - Not Used -
Last Time 8 - Not Used -
Tax Zone 10 - Not Used -
TI.Tax_Total 8 Tax Total
Tax Amount 2 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Amount 3 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Amount 4 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Amount 5 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Amount 6 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Amount 7 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Amount 8 8 0.00 - Not Used -
TI.Tax_Total 8 Tax Sub Total
Tax Sub Total 2 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Sub Total 3 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Sub Total 4 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Sub Total 5 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Sub Total 6 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Sub Total 7 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Tax Sub Total 8 8 0.00 - Not Used -
TI.Sub_Total 7 Sub Total
TI.Tax_Code 10 Tax Code
TI.Tax_Total 6 Tax Total
TI.Ticket_Total 7 Ticket Total
Cost Today 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Cost To Date 8 0.00 - Not Used -
TI.Load_Size 8 Load Size
Amount on Truck 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Unsold Amount 8 0.00 - Not Used -
Customer User Field 1 20 ““ - Not Used -
Customer User Field 2 20 ““ - Not Used -
Order User Field 1 16 ““ - Not Used -
Order User Field 2 16 ““ - Not Used -
Order User Field 3 16 ““ - Not Used -
Order User Field 4 16 ““ - Not Used -
Order User Field 5 16 ““ - Not Used -
Order User Field 6 16 ““ - Not Used -
Formula User Field 1 20 ““ - Not Used -
Formula User Field 2 20 ““ - Not Used -
Truck User Field 1 20 ““ - Not Used -

274 12/21/16
Data Field Name Max Length Output
Truck User Field 2 20 ““ - Not Used -
Driver User Field 1 20 ““ - Not Used -
Driver User Field 1 20 ““ - Not Used -
TICKET LINE ITEMS
(The following data is repeated for 2000 Total Ticket Line Items (1-13)
each ticket line.)
Item Code Item Code
Description Description
User Product Code - Not Used -
Order Qty Order Qty
Unit Price Unit Price
Extended Price Extended Price
Ordered Qty Ordered Qty
Amount To Date - Not Used -
Taxable - Not Used -
Water On Truck 3 0 - Not Used -
Added Ice 3 0 - Not Used -
Water Trim 5 0 - Not Used -
Water Add Maximum 4 0 - Not Used -
Percent Slurry 3 0 - Not Used -
Percent Hot Water 3 0 - Not Used -
Temper Water 3 0 - Not Used -
Aggregate Sum Amount 6 0 - Not Used -
Cement Sum Amount 6 0 - Not Used -
Water Sum Amount 6 0 - Not Used -
Total Sum Amount 6 0 - Not Used -
Water Cement Ratio 5 0.000 - Not Used -
Truck Tare Weight 6 0 - Not Used -
Truck Gross Weight 6 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare Time 8 “00:00:00” - Not Used -
Bottle Status 13 ““ - Not Used -
Scale Tare 1 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 1 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 2 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 2 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 3 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 3 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 4 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 4 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 5 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 5 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 6 Start 5 0 - Not Used -

12/21/16 275
Data Field Name Max Length Output
Scale Tare 6 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 7 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 7 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 8 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 8 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 9 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 9 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 10 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 10 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 11 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 11 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 12 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 12 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 13 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 13 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 14 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 14 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 15 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 15 End 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 16 Start 5 0 - Not Used -
Scale Tare 16 End 5 0 - Not Used -
LOAD LINE MATERIALS
(The following data is repeated for 2000 Total (6 Aggs, 3 Cems, 3 Wats, 6 Adxs)
each load line material.)
Ingredient Item Code Ingredient Item Code
Net Target Amount Net Target Amount
Net Batched Amount Net Batched Amount
Amount UOM Amount UOM
Design Entry Qty Design Entry Qty
% Off Tolerance - Not Used -
Off Tolerance Flag - Not Used
Weight of Moisture - Not Used -
Total Moisture Percent Total Moisture Percent
Ingredient Description Ingredient Description

276 12/21/16
MYOB Interface Ticket Export Fields
Each record in the MYOB ticket export data is tab-delimited with a CR/LF after
each customer break.

MYOB Field COMMANDbatch Field Comments

Co./Last Name TICKET.Customer_Code
First Name N/A
Addr 1 - Line1 TICKET.Billing_Address_Line1 1st 64 chars
Addr lines not to exceed 255
chars total
Line2 TICKET.Billing_Address_Line2 1st 64 chars
Line3 TICKET.Billing_Address_Line3 1st 64 chars
Line4 TICKET.Billing_City + 63 chars
TICKET.Billing_City +
TICKET.Billing_State_Code, +
Billing_Postal_Code
Invoice #
Date TICKET.Ticketed_TDS dd/mm/yyyy
Customer PO TICKET.PO_Num
Ship Via N/A
Already Printed N/A
Item Number TICKET_LINE.Item_Code
Quantity TICKET_LINE.Load_Size
Description TICKET_LINE.Item_Description
Price TICKET_LINE.Unit_Price
Discount TICKET_LINE.Discount_Per_UOM_
Amount
Total TICKET_LINE.Ext_Price
Job TICKET.Job_Code
Comment TICKET.Delivery_Instructions
Journal Memo "TKT #" + TICKET.Ticket_Code + "
TRK #" & Truck_Code
Slsmn Last Name N/A
Slsmn First Name N/A
Shipping Date TICKET.Ticketed_TDS dd/mm/yyyy
Tax Code TICKET.Tax_Code
Tax Amount TICKET_LINE.Tax_Amount
Freight Amount N/A
Freight Tax Code N/A
Freight Tax N/A
Amount
Sale Status N/A
Currency Code N/A
Exchange Rate N/A

12/21/16 277
MYOB Field COMMANDbatch Field Comments
Terms - Payment is N/A
Due
Discount Days N/A
Balance Due Days N/A
% Discount N/A
% Monthly Charge N/A

278 12/21/16
ViewPoint Ticket Export Fields
Each record line in the export represents one ticket and one ticket product. If
there are multiple products on a ticket, the entire record will be listed for each
product on separate lines.
The data output in fields 155 - 198 contains the different product entries. All
other fields remain the same per ticket (i.e. a ticket with 3 products will
output 3 lines in the export).

Data Field Name Data Type Length Offset Description/Comment

DATE Data 8 1 Leave Plant or Ticketed Date
TIME Time 5 9 Leave Plant or Ticketed Time
CUSTOMER CODE Text 10 14 Customer Code
ACCOUNT# Text 10 24 Customer Accounting Code
CUSTOMER NAME Text 30 34 Customer Description
JOB NAME/ Text 30 64 Project Description
PROJECT NAME
CUST ADDRESS 1 Text 30 94 Job Address Line 1
PO NUMBER Text 10 124 PO Number (Alphanumeric)
USER DEF 3 Text 10 134 Blanks
ORDER CODE/JOB Text 2 144 Order Code
NUMBER
COD FLAG Char 1 146 'Y' or 'N'
CUST ACCOUNT Text 4 147 Blanks
STATUS
TAX CODE Text 4 151 Tax Code
PRODUCT Decimal 8 155 Extended Price
EXTENDED PRICE
PRODUCT CODE Text 10 163 Code
LOAD SIZE Decimal 5 173 Load Size
UNIT PRICE Decimal 7 178 Unit Price
ORDERED Decimal 7 185 Ordered Amount
DELIVERED Decimal 7 192 Delivered Amount
LOAD NUMBER Numeric 5 199 Load Code
TRUCK CODE Text 4 204 Truck Code
DRIVER CODE Text 5 208 Driver Code
SLUMP Decimal 4 213 Slump
TICKET NUMBER Numeric 6 217 Ticket Number
PLANT NAME Text 2 223 Plant Code
TAX TOTAL Decimal 8 225 Tax Total
PREVIOUS TOTAL Decimal 8 233 Previous Ticket's Total
SUB TOTAL Decimal 8 241 Sub-Total

12/21/16 279
Data Field Name Data Type Length Offset Description/Comment
DISCOUNT TOTAL Decimal 8 249 Discount Total
TICKET TOTAL Decimal 8 257 This Ticket's Total
GRAND TOTAL Decimal 8 265 Previous + This Ticket's Total
Blank Field 3 273 0.0
BLANK FIELD Blank 1 276 blank
LEFT PLANT TIME Time 5 277 Leave Plant Time (hh:mm)
ON JOB TIME Time 5 282 Arrive Job Time (hh:mm)
LEFT JOB TIME Time 5 287 Return Time (hh:mm)
RETURN TIME Time 5 292 Arrive Plant Time (hh:mm)

280 12/21/16
End-Of Processes

“End-Of” processes allow you to run daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly reports
then archive, purge, and back up the databases. These processes help ensure
that the database does not get too large, that regular backups are performed,
and that you have regular inventory and mix production reports.

Tip!
Settings on the Archive Control form control how Archive and Purge
and other End of Day functions operate.

Topics
End of Day Process
End of Week Process
End of Month Process
End of Year Process
Database Backup Options

See Also:
Adding Reports to the End Of Day Process

12/21/16 281
End of Day Process

Caution!
DO NOT shut down the PC while the End of Day process is
running! Doing so may cause database corruption.

COMMANDbatch is shipped with an End of Day process already set up. It

includes the Material Inventory, Material Usage, Ticket Summary, and Mix
Production reports, as well as backup routines for the COMMANDbatch
databases.
Authorized users can modify the End of Day process so that it includes other
reports or utilities (see Adding Reports to the End Of Day Process).

Note: In a dual-plant environment, the End of Day process needs to be

executed from the Host PC.

The End of Day process:

• Checks the database for errors (corruption). If any are found, a message
box is displayed until the user closes it. The End of Day process is
stopped and archive/purge and backups will not be performed. The user
should contact Command Alkon Service to resolve the issue.
• Runs the following reports for the current day: Material Inventory,
Material Usage, Ticket Summary, Mix Production.
• Archives and purges the EBATCH database then backs up all databases.
• Writes the backed up databases to USB. You can also back up to other
media such as a local or network drive. To do this, edit the “Write
Backups to CD” process step under Reports/Utilities as explained in
Database Backup Options.

Note: If you have purchased Command Alkon’s Plant Watcher application,

you can run the Plant Performance Report from a command line using
one of the following commands:
(From the Plant Watcher Server)
PlantWatcherConsole.exe -runp “PPR Report Name”
(From the Plant Watcher Client)
PlantWatcherConfiguration.exe -runp “PPR Report Name”
Where: PPR Report Name is the case-sensitive Profile name of the PPR

• If Command Alkon's ECM (Enterprise Content Management) is setup,

certain reports are printed in PDF and copied to a designated local or
network folder.
• Reboots the RTC. (For Dual-Plant systems, perform the following
procedure to reboot the RTC’s for both plants.)

282 12/21/16
Important!
To cause End of Day to reboot the RTC’s at both plants:
• On the Reports/Utilities form, select the End of Day process.
• At the bottom of Reports/Utilities, click “Modify Process Steps”.
• Select the Re-boot RTC process on the Process Steps form.
• Select the LookUp sequence and delete the text under the
Default column as shown in the following screen example.

• Save your changes and close the Process Steps form.

The second field of the Re-boot RTC section of the End of Day
process will now be blank. Previously, it contained “Sys1”, meaning
only the RTC for Sys1 would be rebooted. Now all RTCs will reboot.

12/21/16 283
To Run the End of Day Process

1. Insert a CD into the DVD drive on the COMMANDbatch PC.

2. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

3. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section, select End of Day.
Processes for running the Material Inventory and Mix Production reports
and the database backup routines appear.
The default date range for reports is: (today’s date) to (today’s date).
4. In Printer field midway down the left side of the form, make sure
the report printer is selected. (Your system’s default printer is
selected by default.)
5. Click the “Run Group” button at the bottom of the form. (You
might need to scroll down to see this button.)

REPORTS
• If records are found for a report, the report is printed.
• If no records are found for a report, the following message appears.

DATABASE BACKUP
• The DBUtility window appears and the backup routine starts.
• The Forms, Application, and Archive databases are backed up to:
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom\DBBackup\
Examples of filenames for the backed up databases:
EBATCH_200802100927.bak
EBATCH_FORMS_200802100927.bak
EBATCH_ARCHIVE_200802100927.bak
where:
— EBATCH, EBATCH_FORMS, and EBATCH_ARCHIVE are the database
names
— 2008 is the Year
— 02 is the Month
— 10 is the Day
— 0927 is the Time

284 12/21/16
CD WRITING WIZARD
When the CD Writing Wizard window appears:
6. Enter a name for the backup (example: Jun03_2008) and click
Next.
• The EBATCH, EBATCH_FORMS, and EBATCH_ARCHIVE backup files are
zipped up into a CBBackup.zip file (along with the contents of the
Custom folder except for Custom\DbBackup) and copied to the CD.
• A progress bar indicates how many minutes/seconds are left to complete
writing to CD.
• When writing to CD is complete, the CD-RW tray ejects, and a CD Writing
Wizard completion window appears.
7. Reclose the CD-RW tray and click Finish on the CD Writing Wizard.

Note: If you don’t close the CD-RW tray, the following message prompts
you to close it and click Retry - to verify the contents of the CD.

8. Remove the CD.

Tip!
Store the CD in a safe place and DO NOT use it for other backups.

RTC REBOOT
• A DOS window opens and the RTC is rebooted.
• When the reboot is finished, the End of Day process is completed and the
Description section at the top of the Reports/Utilities form displays:
Running...
Completed!

12/21/16 285
End of Week Process

Caution!
DO NOT shut down the PC while the End of Week process
is running! Doing so may cause database corruption.

The End of Week process is the same as the End of Day Process except:
• You select End of Week in the “Select Report/Process Group”.
• The Material Inventory and Mix Production reports for the week are run.
• The RTC is NOT rebooted.
You can modify the End of Week process to include other reports or to back up
to other media such as a local or network drive.

End of Month Process

Caution!
DO NOT shut down the PC while the End of Month process
is running! Doing so may cause database corruption.

The End of Month process is the same as the End of Day Process except:
• You select End of Month in the “Select Report/Process Group”.
• The Material Inventory and Mix Production reports for the month are run.
• The RTC is NOT rebooted.
You can modify the End of Month process to include other reports or to back
up to other media such as a local or network drive.

End of Year Process

Note: The standard End of Year process is described below. If you need to
modify this process, contact the Command Alkon Service Department.

The End of Year process:

• Check the database for errors (corruption). If any are found, a message
box is displayed until the user closes it. The End of Day process is
stopped and archive/purge and backups will not be performed. The user
should contact Command Alkon Service to resolve the issue.
• Runs the Material Inventory and Mix Production reports for the year.
• Archives and purges the EBATCH database.
• Backs up the EBATCH and EBATCH_ARCHIVE databases.

286 12/21/16
• Renames the backed up EBATCH_ARCHIVE database to
EBATCH_YEAR_(current year).
• Copies the EBATCH database to create a new EBATCH_ARCHIVE.
• Reruns Archive/Purge.
• The RTC is NOT rebooted.
• Allows you to write all backed up databases to a USB device.

Note: You can also back up to other media such as a local or network
location. To do this, edit the “Write Backups to CD” process step
under Reports/Utilities as explained in Database Backup Options.

COMMANDbatch is shipped with an EOY process already set up. It includes the
Material Inventory report, the Mix Production report, and a database backup
and EOY Maintenance routine. Authorized users can modify the End of Year
process so that it includes other reports.

To Run the End of Year Process

1. Insert a CD into the DVD drive on the COMMANDbatch PC. A CD

Writer action box appears. Click Cancel.

Caution!
DO NOT insert a CD containing the previous year’s backups!
If you do, that year’s data will be overwritten.

2. Open the Reports/Utilities form.

3. In the “Select Report/Process Group” section, select End of Year.
Processes for running reports, backing up the databases, and running the
EOY Maintenance routine appear on the right side of the form.
The date range for reports defaults to the first and last day of current
year. If you are running the EOY process at the beginning of a new year,
change these dates to the first and last day of the previous year.
4. In the Printer field midway down the left side of the form, make
sure the report printer is selected. (Your system’s default printer
is selected by default.)
5. Click the “Run Group” button at the bottom of the form.

END OF YEAR ROUTINE

The following window appears with EBATCH_YEAR_(current year) shown
as the Database Name.

12/21/16 287
EOY Maintenance window

6. As instructed, please read the information in the End of Year

Maintenance window.
7. If you are running the EOY process on or before the end of the
year you want to archive, click Accept.
If you are running the EOY process at the beginning of a new year
(example: January 6, 2009), you will need to change the year in the
Database Name box to the previous year (example: 2008). Then click
Accept.
The DBUtility (now active):
• Archives and purges databases.
• Backs up Application and Archive databases to:
C:\ProgramData\CAI\COMMANDbatch\Custom\DBBackup\
• Renames EBATCH_ARCHIVE database to EBATCH_YEAR_(current year)
Backup database files are now:
EBATCH.bak
EBATCH_YEAR_(current year).bak

REPORTS
• If records are found for a report, the report is printed.
• If no records are found for a report, the following message appears.

288 12/21/16
CD WRITING WIZARD
When the CD Writing Wizard window appears:
8. Enter a name for the backup (example: Jun03_2008) and click
Next.
• The EBATCH, EBATCH_FORMS, and EBATCH_ARCHIVE backup files are
zipped up into a CBBackup.zip file (along with the contents of the
Custom folder except for Custom\DbBackup) and copied to the CD.
• A progress bar indicates how many minutes/seconds are left to complete
writing to CD.
• When writing to CD is complete, the CD-RW tray ejects, and a CD Writing
Wizard completion window appears.
9. Reclose the CD-RW tray and click Finish on the CD Writing Wizard.

Note: If you don’t close the CD-RW tray, the following message
prompts you to close it and click Retry - to verify the contents of
the CD.

10. Remove the CD.

Tip!
Store the CD in a safe place and DO NOT use it for other backups.

The End of Year process is now complete and the Description section at
the top of the Reports/Utilities form displays:
Running...
Completed!

12/21/16 289
Database Backup Options
Additional Backup Options can be used with the “Write Backups to CD”
process step of the End of Day/Week/Month/Year processes. For example, the
-u argument can be used to back up to a local or network drive.
By default, databases are backed up to USB using the following command:
ebcdburn.exe -x -c -sEBATCH EBATCH_FORMS EBATCH_ARCHIVE
The following example shows the command modified to back up to a D: drive:
ebcdburn.exe -x -c -sEBATCH EBATCH_FORMS EBATCH_ARCHIVE -q -m
-u”D:\”

To edit the “Write Backups to CD” process step:

1. Select the End of Day group on Reports/Utilities.

2. Click the “Modify Process Steps” button at the bottom left of the
form to pull up the Process Steps form.
3. Scroll over to the Command column and click on ebcdburn.exe.
4. Press <Alt + E> to pull up the Expanded Text for Command
window.
5. Modify the text as needed then click OK.
6. Save your changes to the Process Steps form and close it.
Backup Options

290 12/21/16
Adding Reports to the End Of Day Process
Only authorized users should modify the End of Day process.

1. Select the “End Of Day” group at the top left of the Reports/
Utilities form, then click the “Modify Process Steps” button.

2. On the Process Steps form that appears, click the Summary

button at the top middle of the form then click the Details button.
3. Scroll down to the first blank line in the grid as shown next.

12/21/16 291
4. In the Type column of the new blank row, select “Report”, and in
the Command column, select the report you want to add.

5. Click the Save button at the top left of the COMMANDbatch main
window.
Report parameters for the added report are automatically created in the grid
at the bottom of the Process Steps form; and the report will now be generated
when the End Of Day process is run.

292 12/21/16
Glossary of Terms

This document provides a lexicon of terms used in Command Alkon software

applications, marketing literature, and technical documentation.

Click on a Letter below to find entries starting with that letter.

Characters/Numbers

A-B-C-D-E-F-G-H-I-J-K-L-M-N-O-P-Q-R-S-T-U-V-W-X-Y-Z

Note: Entries starting with Characters or Numbers are listed first.

Characters/Numbers
% Concentration
Percentage of standard volume weight that is dissolved admix.

“A” Line
A dimensional line in a tunnel where rock projections are not permitted inside
the tunnel itself.

“B” Line
A dimensional line in a tunnel outside of which excavation is not paid for.

A
A/D Converter (A/D or ADC)
Analog-to-digital converter. An instrument which converts real-world analog
signals into a digital format that can be processed by a computer.

A/R
Accounts Receivable.

Abort
Aborting a load stops all batching operations for the current load and any
loads queued up after it. Remember that material left in any plant devices will
have to be handled manually.

12/21/16 293
Abrasiveness
The capabilities of one material to cause wear on another by rubbing or
grinding.

Accelerators
An action or additive that accelerates the strength of concrete at an early age.
Adding additional cement, or curing at higher temperatures, can also increase
concrete strength. CaCL (Calcium Chloride) is the material most commonly
used and should be added in solution form to prevent pop out in the hardened
concrete. CaCL is not recommended for use in pre-stressed concrete, concrete
with embedded aluminum, massive concrete placements, concrete with alkali
aggregate reaction, or a floor-shape seated to receive a dry shape metallic
finishes.

Access shaft
Temporary access shafts are commonly provided to allow entry of personnel
and occasionally equipment to the interior of an immersed tunnel.

Acrylic Resin
One of a group of thermoplastic resins formed by polymerization of esters or
amides of acrylic acid; used in concrete or masonry construction as a bonding
agent or surface sealer.

Actual Batch
If the COMMANDbatch Default Simulate Status is set for an actual batch,
concrete is created, and inventory and delivered amounts are affected by each
batch.
See Also:
Simulated Demo Batch
Training Batch

Additives
Same as Admixtures (also called Admixes). Chemicals or other items that can
be added to a concrete mix to change its properties. An additive can change
set times, flowability or pumpability, internally reinforce hydrated concrete, or
induce air bubbles for freeze thaw resistance, or change the color of concrete.

Adjust
Amount of water to trim per load, negative or positive. Also used to increase
water to add on the job.
See Also:
Trim

294 12/21/16
Admixtures (also called Admixes)
Same as Additives. Ingredients that are added to enhance one or more
properties of concrete. Admixtures increase workability, reduce bleeding,
speed up or slow down set times, etc. Admixtures are classified as air
entraining, chemical, or finely divided.

Aeration
The process of injecting air into material as it feeds through the gates of a silo
or a scale or down a slide. This keeps the material from clumping and slowing
or preventing the steady flow of material.

After Hours Charges

Fee for deliveries before/after the normal delivery hours.

Aggregate (also called Agg)

Rock. Granular ingredients in concrete such as sand, gravel, crushed stone.

Aggregate Hopper
Bin that holds an aggregate material.

Agitate
A method for preventing a concrete mix from separating. A concrete drum
agitates the mix.

Air Entraining Admixtures

Used to entrain a relatively stable system of microscopic air bubbles in
concrete to improve workability or durability. Should be used for concrete
exposed to freezing and de-icing chemicals. The bubbles are made during the
mixing and remain stable by the admixture.

Air ring
Perforated manifold ring inside the nozzle of wet-mix Shotcrete equipment
through which high pressure air is introduced into the material flow.

Alert
Another word for notification message or software-generated message or
warning.

Ambient Compensation
Instrument design such that changes in ambient temperature do not affect
the instrument readings.

12/21/16 295
Ambient Conditions
Conditions around a transducer (pressure, temperature, etc.). Pressure of the
air surrounding a transducer. Average temperature of surrounding air that
comes into contact with the test equipment and instruments.

Ambient Temperature Sensor

This device is used for monitoring and recording the outside air temperature.
This information can be used to determine the amount of ice or admixtures to
add to a load to achieve the proper strength, temperature, or workability.

Annual Quote
A quote for prices of products to be delivered to any location for a set period
of time. This quote is not tied to a Job. Many suppliers quote prices to their
customers for non-specific deliveries - a 'blanket' quote - then set up a Project
to be used on orders and tickets for the customer.

Ashlar Masonry
Contains carefully worked stones set with fine, close joints. Can be laid with or
without mortar.

Aspect ratio of fiber

The ratio of length-to-diameter (or equivalent diameter) of the fiber.

Asphalt
Black petroleum residue, which can range from solid to semi-solid at room
temperature. When heated to the temperature of boiling water, it becomes
pourable. It is used in roofing materials, for surfacing roads, for lining the
walls of water-retaining structures such as reservoirs and swimming pools,
and in the manufacture of floor tiles. Asphalt should not be confused with tar,
a similar looking substance made from coal or wood and incompatible with
petroleum derivatives.

Assignment Dispatch
A method of dispatching/recycling a predetermined number of trucks to the
same job until it is complete without regard for the customer’s actual unload
rate.
See Also:
Demand Dispatch

ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials.

296 12/21/16
Auto Add Charges
Auto Add Charges are automatically added whenever a product with an auto-
add charge is selected on an order. An example would be an Environmental
Charge added to each order. Another example would be a Minimum Load
Charge to be added to orders with load sizes smaller than a specified amount.

Auto Bin Switching

If Auto Bin Switching is enabled, COMMANDbatch automatically switches to a
secondary bin containing the same material if the primary bin runs low.

Automatic Batching
If Auto Bin Switching is enabled, the system automatically switches to a
secondary bin if the primary bin runs low.

Automatic Moisture Compensation

When Automatic Moisture Compensation is enabled, the batching computer
uses measurements from the Command Alkon Moisture Probe to
automatically adjust material and water targets during a batch.

Axleing
Weighing a large truck on a short scale by moving the truck across the scale
axle by axle, then combining the resulting weights.

Axial Load
Load applied along or parallel to and concentric with the primary axis.

B
Balance Forward
Accounting transaction created for moving customer account balances
between accounting systems.

Batch
The single weighing of materials (concrete or asphalt) to make a Load. In a
central mix plant, more than one batch may be required to make a load
because of the capacity of the mixer.

Batchbooks
Instead of maintaining hundreds of independent mix designs, it is possible to
use “base batchbooks” to determine the desired quantities of aggregates and
water in terms of a mathematical function of cement content. This
mathematical function, called a “polynomial” equation, uses cement weight as
the independent variable.

12/21/16 297
Cement mix materials are normally maintained in separate “cement
batchbooks”, with cement weight being the independent variable in the
batchbook format. However, it is possible to use no cement batchbook at all
and include the cement in the base batchbook instead.

Batch Control System

Electronic and computer-based equipment that sends signals to the plant and
receives signals from the plant. Controls the operation of certain batch plant
equipment (scale gates, mixers, flowmeters, etc.).

Batching Cycle
In this cycle, materials are weighed or metered into scales, holding hoppers,
or bottles then discharged.

Batch Setup
In COMMANDbatch, this refers to the computer screen where a load of
concrete is prepared for batching (includes selecting the Load Size and Mix
Design).

Batch Weights
Record of the design, target, and batched amount of each material used in a
load of concrete. This information can be printed at the bottom of delivery
tickets and on batch weight reports.

BCP
Batch Control Processor, a.k.a. RTC (Real Time Controller). The computer that
controls the operation of batch plant equipment and performs the necessary
real-time operations for the batching process. (RTC is the preferred name.)

Note: The term “BCP” is no longer used in COMMANDbatch. “RTC” is used

instead.

Belly Dump
A hauling truck that discharges its load via a belly port.

Bin
Device designed to hold cement or aggregates for batching.

Bin Switching
(See Auto Bin Switching.)

Blanket
A type of purchase order that contains multiple purchases over a range of
dates

298 12/21/16
Bleeding
The separation of water from an unhardened mix: The process of diffusion of
a soluble colored substance from, into, and through a paint or varnish coating
from beneath, thus producing an undesirable staining or discoloration. Used
similarly to refer to the transfer of soluble material from bitumen impregnated
roofing materials, in lime-rich water, causing staining of soffits of concrete
slab roofs.

Blower
A piece of equipment that pressurizes air and distributes it to plant Aeration
devices.

Bond
Adherence between materials such as bricks/mortar, or plies of felt, or
between felts and other elements of roof systems, which use bitumen or other
materials as the cementing agent.

Boot
Material being loaded into a truck passes through a boot, which fits into the
top of the truck's mixer drum.

Bottles
Device designed to hold liquid admixtures for batching.

Break
Related to the strength tests. Concrete samples are taken in cylinders. The
concrete is left to dry. After the appropriate amount of time (24 hours, 7 days,
14 days, 28 days etc. -- the concrete keeps getting stronger), the concrete
cylinder is placed in a vise-type machine that exerts pressure on the cylinder
until it breaks.
1) The number of pounds per square inch required to break the cylinder is
recorded.
2) A test whereby a concrete cylinder is destroyed by applying measured
pressure until failure.
3) A gap in concrete delivery where the job runs out of concrete.

Brick
Another name for the RTC (Real Time Controller), which is in essence a mini
computer that “does the math” for COMMANDbatch. See RTC for a complete
description.

12/21/16 299
Buildability
The extent to which the design of a building facilitates ease of construction,
subject to the overall requirements for the completed building.

Building Control (on-site)

Responsibility of government or government agency or designated
professional, who by periodic checking ensures that work on site is in
accordance with approved construction plans and regulations.

Building Services Design

Design of the building services elements within a construction. Normally
specialist building services engineers will be responsible for this work on large
projects. On smaller projects, the architect may assume this responsibility.

Bulkhead
An airtight partition of steel or concrete used to retain air pressure within a
tunnel. The man locks and muck locks are constructed through the bulkhead.

Bull Float
A device to manually smooth the concrete after Screeding but before
troweling and/or brooming.

C
Capillarity
Absorption of a liquid due to surface tension. "Rising damp" in walls is caused
by capillary rise of the water in small pores of the walling materials.

Cartage
Ways to quantify haul charges. Cartage charges are amounts charged or paid
for the delivery of a product. In some cases, largely dependant on company
practices, cartage is separate from the cost or price of products.

Casting Basin
A place where elements for immersed tunnels can be fabricated in the dry,
and which can be flooded to allow the elements to be floated out and taken
away. Generally used for concrete tunnels.

Cell
Test cells of 500 feet length are constructed for various combinations of
bituminous, concrete and aggregate. They represent a wide range of
pavement types with varying combinations of surface, base, subbase,
drainage and compaction.

300 12/21/16
Cement (also called Cem)
A constituent of concrete. Cement is the glue that holds concrete together.

Cement Content
Quantity of cement contained in a unit volume of concrete or mortar,
preferably expressed as weight per cubic measure (examples: kilograms per
cubic meter, pounds per cubic yard, sacks per cubic yard etc.).

Cement Content Pricing

A method of pricing concrete where the price is determined by the cement
content of the mix. Generally a single mix is quoted. All other mixes
purchased are priced based the single mix and the cement content difference.
Cement content can be expressed in kg, lbs or the traditional sack (94 lbs).
See Also:
Content Down Price
Content Up Price

Central Dispatch
All dispatch resources, order taking, scheduling, ticketing, and truck tracking
are in one location. These people control a number of plants.

Central Mix Operations

Any plant that pre-mixes concrete in a centralized drum, and then loads it in
the truck.

Charge Rate
Percentage of the plant’s discharge rate at which concrete can be loaded into
a particular truck. The default is 100%.

Charging
The process of discharging materials into a mixer.

Chemical Admixtures
Classified by the function they perform: water reducing, retarding,
accelerating, any combination of the former.
See Also:
Additives
Admixtures (also called Admixes)

12/21/16 301
Choke Feeding
With Choke Feeding, the gates are held fully open until the scales are empty.
Choke Feeding is used when the truck or mixer can handle very fast discharge
rates.

Chute
The half-pipe attached to the back of a rear discharge concrete truck (the
dumping end) to direct the concrete to the desired location.

Clock In / Clock Out

Going on or off the clock for the purpose of tracking total hours worked. Also
known as Punch In/ Punch Out.

COD
Cash On Delivery. An order payment method that requires the customer to
pay for the ticket/order at time of delivery.

COMMANDassist
Also known as Remote Access. Allows COMMANDbatch systems with internet
access (high speed preferred) to connect to Command Alkon’s support
network so that technical support staff can:
• Troubleshoot and resolve problems.
• Answer questions and provide training on specific topics.
• Manually download and assist with the installation of software updates.
• Modify plant automation.

Common Services
Common services are those services provided by the management contractor
to each works contractor on an identical basis. They include, for example,
hoisting, welfare facilities, and temporary roads.
Compactibility
This test is performed by dropping fresh concrete through two cylinders into a
hopper. The hopper is weighed and emptied then refilled from the same batch
of fresh concrete in layers and heavily vibrated to remove air. The compaction
factor is then calculated using the mass of the concrete at different stages of
the test.
See Also:
Flow
Slump
Vebe

302 12/21/16
Competitive Tender
(See Traditional Contracting.)

Completion Flag
An indicator for a lien location that shows all required information has been
collected. For example, all the information that is identified as “required” in
the configuration system, has been filled out in the lien location editor, and all
related flags have been fulfilled.

Concrete
A mixture of water, sand, cement, rock, and sometimes additives.

Concrete Calculator
A software form that calculates the cubic yards (or cubic meters) of concrete
needed on an order. Enter the dimensions on the form and the amount is
calculated.

Concrete Mixer
Trucks with a large revolving drum or barrel used for mixing (dry batch
operations) or agitating (central mix operations). Internally, spiral blades
inside the drum use the “Archimedes Screw” principle to mix or discharge the
concrete.

Concrete Tunnel
Term applied to a tunnel not designed to leave the fabrication facility until the
external concrete structure is essentially complete. Steel plate, if used, is
usually limited to acting as a waterproofing membrane.

Consortia
A grouping together of three or more organizations, generally of differing
skills, with the objective of carrying out a specific project.

Constituent
Any physical ingredient in a concrete mix.

Constructability
A system for achieving optimum integration of construction knowledge in the
construction process and balancing the various project and environmental
constraints to achieve maximization of project goals and construction
performance.

12/21/16 303
Construction Activity
The process of creating a project or part of a project by the employment of
construction resources.

Construction Contract
An agreement entered into for the construction, repair, renovation or
restoration of a building or civil engineering work.

Construction Costs
All costs that arise from the resources used in the construction of a
construction project, excluding the costs of the land.

Construction Design
Development of the conceptual design into the more detailed design (working
drawings) undertaken by an architect, construction engineer, architectural
technician, professional builder, etc.

Construction Industry
All parties in the industry engaged in designing, executing and maintaining
buildings including those supplying materials.

Construction Management
The overall management of the processes required to bring the site operations
of a project to a satisfactory conclusion, typically carried out either by a
private consultant or an employee of the project client. This is a management
form of contract synonymous with management contracting except that works
contractors are appointed as direct contractors to the client, rather than as
subcontractors to the contract manager.

Construction Management Contract

This contract is similar to a Management Contract except that the client is the
employer in each works construction contract.

Construction Manager
The person or firm responsible for the execution of a construction project.

Construction Materials
All materials, elements and components used for the construction of projects
that are incorporated into the final constructed product.

Construction Method
The mode of carrying out a construction process to arrive at a finished
element, operation or product.

304 12/21/16
Construction Process
The designing and construction of a project from the conception of the project
in a client's mind to its completion for commissioning and use.

Consultancy Service
In relation to construction materials, this includes the processes and the
survey and assessment of the condition of built constructions.

Consultants
The client's advisers on design, cost and other matters. Such advisers might
include project managers.

Content Down Price

Refers to the amount the price should be reduced if a mix contains less than
the “standard” amount of cement.

Content Up Price
Refers to the amount the price should be increased if the mix exceeds the
standard amount of cement.

Continuous Mixer
A mixer into which the concrete ingredients (cement, aggregates, fiber, water,
etc.) are measured volumetrically and fed continuously (usually into an auger-
type mixer).

Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge

This feature allows the same batch to be run over and over until Continuous
Run / Continuous Discharge is terminated. Continuous Run can be used
without Continuous Discharge. A ready mix plant, for example, can turn on
Continuous Run but not Continuous Discharge so that the same mix is
batched but discharge is not initiated until a truck is in place. A products
plant, on the other hand, can turn on both Continuous Run and Continuous
Discharge so that product is continually batched and discharged into forms.
Also, for loads created from an order (at ready mix plants), Continuous Run
stops when the delivered amount equals the ordered amount.
See Also:
Freewheeling

Contract Administration Management

Process by which a formal contract for design or construction services is
administered, including the issuing of instructions, change control procedures,
payment, and the measuring and reviewing of progress.

12/21/16 305
Contract Manager
A manager appointed by a contractor to be responsible for managing a
number of site contracts.

Contractor
A person or organization which, as a party to a contract, is responsible for the
organization, management, and execution of that construction comprised in
the contract with the employer.

Contractor Completion Flag

An indicator that all required information has been collected for a specified
contractor.

Contribution
The sale monies remaining after materials and delivery have been subtracted,
overhead and profit remain.

Control Node
Term used for one or more COMMANDbatch batching PC’s assigned to a
Control System.

Control System
Think of a control system as a collection of one or more COMMANDbatch
batching PC’s (or Control Nodes) connected to a central batch control
processor.

Core test
Compression strength test on a concrete sample cut from hardened concrete
using a core drill.

Corrosion
Deterioration of a metal by chemical or electrochemical reaction with its
environment. Occasionally used, incorrectly, to apply to non-metallic
materials, for example Concrete.

Cost-Benefit Analysis
Identifying and quantifying the costs and benefits and, where possible,
ascribing values to them. It is used particularly for non-marketable goods.

Cost Control
The process of controlling the cost of a project within a predetermined sum
throughout its various stages from inception to completion.

306 12/21/16
Cost of a Project
Totality of expenditures implied by the implementation of that project. If
expenditures are spread over time, they must normally be discounted, which
is indicated by using the term “discounted cost”.

CPM
The CPM (Concrete Production Manager) interface allows COMMANDseries and
COMMANDbatch to exchange Ticket and Production Data in XML (Extensible
Markup Language) format. The interface is built upon EDX (Enterprise Data
Exchange), Command Alkon’s open integration platform that serves as a “data
bus” by routing messages to subscribers using a standard Publish and
Subscribe method. In short, EDX allows full integration between Command
Alkon applications and/or third party systems.

Crazing
Network of surface cracks (BS 3446). Used generally to describe surface
cracking of concrete surfaces and paint film. Also used specifically to describe
the fine network cracking of ceramic glazes by, for example, differential
thermal expansion between glaze and tile body, or moisture expansion of the
body.

CRC
Short for Cyclical Redundancy Checking. Calculations or tests on data
transmissions.

CTS
Clear To Send. A signal used in serial communications that indicates the serial
port is okay to transmit data. Used with RTS.

Cumulative Weights
Target and batched amounts are totaled for all materials in an Item Group
(example: AGG1 group).
See Also:
Net Weights

Customer
The contractor or person purchasing materials from your company, regardless
of whether there is an account set up or a COD sale.

Customer Job
During order entry, this refers to a customer job number. The idea is to assist
the contractor in allocating costs to the proper project. This may be a required
field depending on your system’s configuration.

12/21/16 307
D
Dampening
A method that smooths the instantaneous fluctuations of scale readings. For
instance, some scales exhibit very jittery readings due to vibration within the
scales’ physical structure or overly sensitive load cells.

Dampness
Condition of being slightly wet (not wet enough for liquid water to be evident).
Examples include wetness caused by condensation on a porous substrate or
water transmitted up a porous wall by Capillarity.

Deadheading
The act of dispatching an empty, loadless truck to a given location due to a
shortage of trucks at the location.

Decumulative Scale
Reverses the weighing process for targeted scales. Instead of weighing “up”
to the target weight, the system weighs “down” to the decumulative weight.
Materials are weighed directly from the scale into the truck/mixer. This
eliminates the need for overhead bins.
Although a bin is not “physically” used, the decumulative scale acts as both a
bin and a scale.
See Also:
Reverse Weigh Silos

Deductions
Deductions taken from hauler pay. Usually associated with COMMANDseries
cartage.

Delivered
Amount of material produced for delivery to a site.

Delivery Plant
The plant from which the load is actually delivered. It may not be the pricing
plant or the scheduled plant.

Delivery Rate
Amount of materials requested over a given time frame. Can be expressed as
minutes between trucks, quantity per hour, or a specific number of trucks with
spacing for the “first round.” May also be specified as “picked up” (see FOB.)

308 12/21/16
Demand Batching
A method that can be used by products plants to automatically start a load
when a station sends a call. The incoming call activates an IO Points in the
batch controller and includes the mix design, load size, and sequence.

Demand Dispatch
A method of dispatching trucks to a job as needed, not on a recycling basis,
such as Assignment Dispatch.

Demolition Permit
Permission required to demolish buildings within areas with development
plans. Permission is obtained by Building Committee.

Dense-Stream Conveying
A method of conveying wet mix through a Shotcrete machine’s delivery line
without compressed air.

Density Meter
A device that measures the amount of usable water in a reclaim pond based
on specific gravities. A reclaim pond consists of water and sediment rinsed
from trucks with the gravel screened out.

Design & Build

Design & Build (or Design & Construction) is a form of construction
procurement whereby the contractor who constructs the works, also
undertakes all of, or a proportion of, the design of the works under one
contract.

Design & Manage

An extension to management contracting in which a design responsibility is
included as well as construction.

Design Quantity
Amount of a material required per cubic yard (or cubic meter) of a mix design.
This amount is usually supplied by a third party Quality Assurance specialist.
Changes to design quantity can have an effect on the Design Strength.

Design Strength
Strength of the concrete produced with a particular mix design. This
information is usually supplied by a third party Quality Assurance specialist.

Destination/Reused Ticket
The delivery ticket on which the material is reused.

12/21/16 309
Dialog Definition
For serial scale indicators that have not been pre-approved for use with
COMMANDbatch, the Dialog Definition is a file that contains user-editable
information which must match the serial string sent from the scale device.
This user-editable information includes but is not limited to:
• sign (+, -, or none)
• weight value number of digits (i.e. nnnnnn)
• uom (Unit of Measure: lb, kg, tn, oz)
• gross_net - whether the weight value is gross or net

Diaphragm Wall
Wall built by concreting within a deep and narrow trench the sides of which
are held in place by a thixotropic slurry.

Dipstick
The dipstick is an instrument used to calculate the elevation profile of the
road.

Direct-Metered Water
Water that is metered directly into the truck.

Discharge Cycle
The process of discharging scales and bottles into a truck or mixer. Direct-
metered admixes and water can also be added during this cycle.

Discharge Point
A discharge point is the last part of the batching sequence where blended
materials are discharged.
A discharge point IS NOT an actual device; it is simply the last step in the
batching sequence where batched materials are discharged into a truck or
some other device that delivers the material to the job or pour.
For ready-mix plants, TRUCK is the typical discharge point. For a large pour
such as a dam project where the plant could discharge directly into the dam,
the discharge point could be called something else.

Dispatch Truck
The nature of this function can vary and is controlled by a user-preference
setting. Under one setting, this function assigns a truck to a specific order.
This is useful when a truck enters the pit; the Weighmaster assigns the truck
to its next load.

310 12/21/16
Under another setting, the Central Dispatch user can dispatch truck(s) at
night for the first load or multiple loads for the next day, all without changing
time analysis information or truck status. Several trucks can even be
dispatched to a single order under this setting.

Diverter
A device that directs material to one of several directions. For instance: A
diverter can direct material from a scale into one of two or more mixers or
from a scale to a mixer or truck.

Dosage
Amount of a material to be added to an order/ticket per unit of another
specified material group (such as CEM).

Drip Pan
A collection device that is extended under the Boot at a central mix plant while
a batch is being run. The device prevents materials such as caustic cement
from dripping onto the ground and possibly leaching into nearby streams and
runoffs. It also prevents material from dripping onto trucks as they pull under
the plant.

Dry Plant
A concrete plant where the materials are weighed and discharged into the
truck. The concrete is mixed by the truck. Advantages are lower plant cost.
Disadvantages are higher truck wear and tear, slump controlled by each
driver, poorer mixing.
Some plants have both a Wet and a Dry side, and one or the other side can be
selected.
See Also:
Wet Plant

Dry Batch Operation

A business model, whose plants load dry constituents into its trucks’ drums,
adds water, and mixes the concrete in the drum.

Dry-Mix Shotcrete
Shotcrete in which the mixing water is added at the nozzle.

12/21/16 311
Dry Side Temper
Water added to a batch after all materials are loaded into the truck.

Dry Up Load
If a load that is batched into a truck is too moist (slump is too high), another
load can be created to “dry up” the load. The dry up load might consist of
aggregate and/or cement materials that are compatible with the mix.

DTNS
Data Transport and Notification Service. The service by which data is
transferred between the COMMANDbatch computer and the RTC.

Dual Plant Software with Host

This option allows two Client PC's to be connected to a central Host PC. The
Client PC's share data stored in a central database on the Host PC.
COMMANDbatch and Microsoft SQL Server are installed on all PC's so that if
the Host PC becomes unusable, one of the Client PC's can be temporarily
converted to a Host PC. Depending on user permissions, batches can be run
from the Client PCs.

Dumped Concrete
Concrete that is returned, has not been paid for, and discarded. If the
concrete was paid for, sent back and discarded, it is not considered dumped.

Durability
The capability of concrete to resist weathering action, chemical attack,
abrasion, and other conditions of service.

Dust Collector
A device that collects cement dust in and around the gates of a bin or scale as
dry material is discharged into a truck or mixer. Keeps dust and caustic
cement off trucks.

Dust Plenum
A protective device that surrounds the boot in a dry mix plant as part of a dust
collection system.

E
Early Strength
Strength of Shotcrete at various times during the first few hours after
shotcrete placement.

312 12/21/16
ECM (Enterprise Content Management)
Command Alkon’s ECM product can be used to electronically capture delivery
tickets, invoices, statements, material receipts, invoices from third parties,
credit or employment applications, etc. Archived documentation can be
quickly and automatically accessed from Command Alkon systems and other
business applications and easily routed for review and approval.

Economic Control
Ensuring project costs are kept within budget and measuring ongoing
progress of work in order to facilitate payment of contractors and sub-
contractors.

EDX (Enterprise Data Exchange)

EDX (Enterprise Data Exchange) is Command Alkon’s open integration
platform that serves as a “data bus” by routing messages to subscribers using
a standard Publish and Subscribe method. In short, EDX allows full integration
between Command Alkon applications and/or third party systems.

EDXID
EDXIDs are used with CPM and other interfaces that use Command Alkon’s
open integration EDX (Enterprise Data Exchange) technology to share ticket
and production data among Command Alkon applications and/or third party
systems.

Effectiveness
Effectiveness is related to the age of a material. The older the material, the
less effective it becomes. This applies mostly to admixes.

Efflorescence
White salts brought to the surface of porous building materials by water
movement.

Embedded Strain Gauge

A sensor that measures static and horizontal strains in concrete and asphalt
layers by means of five different models placed in various locations and
orientations.

End Tare
Scale reading after all materials are discharged. Confirms that the scale is
within an acceptable empty range and ready for the next batch. Check your
state's requirements for Start and End Tares.

Fast Batch Tolerance

In COMMANDbatch, fast batch tolerances only apply to multi-batch loads and
provide a wider batching tolerance for all batches except the last batch of the
load.
See Also:
Small Batch Tolerance

Fast Feed
The process of feeding material at a faster flow rate as long as the target has
not been reached and there is sufficient time to stop Fast Feed well short of
the target to account for Preact (airborne material that has not yet reached
the scale).
See Also:
Timed Feed
Jog Feed

314 12/21/16
Fast Tracking
A means of reducing project time by the overlapping of design and
construction. Each trade's work commences as its plans and specifications are
substantially completed.

Fatigue
The weakening of a material caused by repeated or alternating loads; may be
used in conjunction with either static or dynamic loading.

Feasibility Study
An initial study of a project, or method of operation, in outline form to
determine the physical and economic feasibility.

FHWA
(US) Federal Highway Administration.

Fiber Reinforced concrete

Concrete containing randomly dispersed fibers that are added while mixing.

Fibers
Fibers for reinforcing concrete are defined as short, discrete length of steel,
glass, carbon, or synthetics, with any of several cross sections. They are
sufficiently small to be randomly dispersed in unhardened concrete.

Final Design
The fully detailed project as constructed; the design on which the drawings for
construction are based.

Finely Divided Mineral Admixtures

Powdered or pulverized materials that are added to concrete before or during
mixture to change or improve some of the plastic hardened characteristics of
concrete. Added as a partial replacement to concrete. Most often used to
increase workability, increase sulfate resistance. Most common mineral
admixtures are fly ash, blast furnace slag, and condensed silica fume.

Fissure
Crack or split.

Five Sack Pricing

Also known as Cement Content Pricing, this is based on the content of cement
in the mix (5 sacks, or 470 pounds of cement), and may go up or down based
on a base price.

12/21/16 315
Fixed Price Contract
A fixed price contract may be a lump sum contract or a measurement contract
based on fixed prices for units of specific work.
Flow
This test is performed be raising a slump cone and measuring the largest
diameter of the flow and the time at which the flow first reaches a certain
diameter marking.
See Also:
Compactibility
Slump
Vebe

FOB
Free On Board. A shipment that is picked up by the customer. It is loaded
without charge, and delivery is not included in the price paid by the customer.

Foot Blocks
Blocks of wood or pre-cast concrete placed under ribs or posts in horseshoe-
shaped or non-circular tunnels to provide bearing.

Footer
A base for a wall or structure that provides support for the structure.

Freewheeling
Freewheeling occurs when a load is started while another one is running.
During freewheeling, as soon as a device is empty, it starts weighing up
material for the next load.
To run the same batch over and over, Continuous Run / Continuous Discharge
is used.

Front End Loader

A type of tractor whose front end is equipped with a large tilting bucket on the
end of movable arms to lift and move material.

Front Discharge Truck

A front discharge truck unloads concrete from the front. Requires a highly
skilled driver to unload concrete this way.

FWD
(Falling Weight Deflectometer) Instrument that determines the structural
condition of each pavement layer.

316 12/21/16
G
Gain
Refers to the ‘gain’ value for the A/D converter on the LCI (Load Cell
Indicator) card of E-Z CAL Manual Stations.
The calibration process sequences through the A/D gain values 1,2,4 and 8 to
arrive at the highest gain value that will not generate an over-range condition.

G/L
General Ledger. Transactions are posted to these accounts.

Generic Mix
A Mix Design that describes the constituents and quantities in a general
manner. Unique constituents can be specified for each plant, making the mix
specific.

Girder or Rib (Lattice)

A steel arch (lattice) normally erected at regular centers as the tunnel
advances. It is sequentially erected from component parts as the lining is
progressively formed and encapsulated within the Shotcrete. It is normally
provided in the crown section to provide temporary protection to miners from
the risk of collapse. The girders can be fully circumferential.

Gob Hopper
A hopper located between the mixer and the truck in a central mix plant.
Batched concrete is discharged into the gob hopper then manually discharged
into the truck.

Grad Size
Another term for Scale Division. The accuracy of a scale. A scale with a grad
size of 20 lbs would be accurate within 20 lbs. Not to be confused with
Tolerance, which is used for target weight calculations.

Gravity Drop
The charging (loading) of weigh hoppers or trucks by dropping the material
rather than conveying or other mechanical means.

Grey Water
Recycled concrete water which contains oversaturated cement and fine
aggregate. If slurry water is used in a batch, the targets of each material in
the slurry water must be reduced to maintain the proper composition of the
mix.
Also called Slurry Water.

12/21/16 317
Gross Margin
The money that remains from a sale after materials have been subtracted,
leaving markup.

Gross Mode Loading

Refers to the process of loading a vehicle to a specific gross weight. Where
possible, the load out system will take a new tare weight and add sufficient
material to bring the gross weight up to the target value. This method tends
to optimize the truck's capacity.

Grout
A construction material used to embed rebars in masonry walls, connect
sections of pre-cast concrete, fill voids, and seal joints (like those between
tiles). Grout is generally composed of a mixture of water, cement, sand and
sometimes color tint which is applied as a thick liquid and hardens over time,
much like mortar.

GST
Goods and Services Tax. The European version of a Sales Tax.

Gunite
Original name for Shotcrete (sprayed concrete); sometimes still used
(inappropriately) for fine-aggregate Dry-Mix Shotcrete.

H
Holding Tank
Holds and discharges metered water.

Honeycombing
Defective condition in which the concrete contains interconnecting large voids
due to loss or lack of mortar.

Horizontal Clip Gauge

Sensor that measures the width of concrete joint openings.

Hose
A wash hose on a truck for rinsing out the drum and chutes. Also, a pump
hose for pumping concrete.

Hundred Weight
The amount of a material, typically an admix, used in a mix can be based on
each 100 lbs (or kgs) of another material, typically cement.

318 12/21/16
I
Inching Discharge
With Inching Discharge, the gates are pulsed open and closed to create a
smooth flow of material from the scales. Inching Discharge helps to avoid
overflowing the truck or mixer. To avoid overflowing a truck, you can assign a
percentage of the discharge rate to the truck. The discharge rate is then
automatically reduced to what the truck can handle.

Inspect Mode
Enabling Inspect Mode allows you to adjust weights on the Batch Setup form
when running test batches for state scale inspections (in the U.S).

Note: Inspect Mode should NOT be enabled for normal batching

operations.

Integration
Allows different software solutions to exchange information without exporting
or importing data.

Integrity
Building Pathology: soundness, with no part or element deficient.

Interstitial
Occurring within the thickness of some material element. Usually used in the
context of “interstitial condensation”, meaning condensation which occurs
within the thickness of a building element or within its component materials.

Invoice
A listing of delivery tickets with extended prices and taxes for a specific job or
date range.

IO Points
IO points represent physical limit switches or on/off or open/close outputs
connected to feed gates, scales, or other plant equipment.

IP
Short for Internet Protocol, a data-oriented protocol used for communicating
data across a packet-switched internetwork.
See Also:
TCP/IP

12/21/16 319
Item
Any commercial good sold. Generally refers to concrete, aggregates, asphalt,
and other products. Also includes other miscellaneous products and charges
such as excess unloading, overtime, etc.

J
Job
A construction site or location that is being bid upon.

Job Specific
Specific to deliveries to one Job site; prices good only for that Job.

Job Status
The current position of the job in the pre-build sequence; designing, obtaining
quotes, awarding the job, beginning construction, delayed, cancelled.

Joint (F Joint)
Position where two or more building materials, components or assemblies are
put together, fixed or united, with or without the use of extra jointing
products.

Jog Feed
Jog Feed is typically used for aggregates and cements and opens and closes
the gate enough to allow small jog bites of material to fall through. The time
duration the gate opens and closes depends on the Jog Target Amount, Jog
Open Time and Jog Delay Time values.
The system automatically adjusts the Jog Open Time by the Jog Adjust Time
to achieve the Jog Target Amount.
Jog Feed can start if ALL of the following are true:
• Jog Feed is enabled.
• Fast and/or Timed Feed finishes without getting the material to target
(i.e. the target is below both the Min. Amt. to Fast Feed and the Min.
Amount to Timed Feed).
• The Maximum Number of Jogs is a non-zero value.
See Also:
Fast Feed
Timed Feed

320 12/21/16
Justification
Location of a field of data on printed tickets relative to the column location.
Choices are typically Left, Right, or Center.

K
There are no glossary entries starting with “K”.

L
LAN
Local Area Network. A collection of PCs that are connected via a cable to a
server. The server usually answers all data requests and updates each station.
Usually the groups of PCs are located in one building.

Laser Screed
A device for smoothing concrete. Used for sidewalks, driveways or other
surfaces in which the concrete needs to be as smooth and level as possible. A
laser screed is a set of lasers that help level a machine.

Layer
A term used for a discrete thickness of Shotcrete (sprayed concrete), built up
from a number of successive passes of the nozzle and allowed to set.

LCID
Locale ID. Created by Microsoft to control language/locale settings on
Windows computers.

Leftover Concrete
Also called Returned Concrete, this is concrete remaining on board after
unloading. The customer may have over-ordered, the concrete may have
been rejected, the truck could not unload all or part of the load, etc. The
disposition of the material is not known at this time. It may be discarded or
reused.
See Also:
Resold Concrete
Returned Concrete
Reused Concrete

Lender Completion Flag

An indicator that all required information has been collected for a specific
lender. This flag applies to the Lender and Lien location Lender levels.

12/21/16 321
Live Bottom Batcher
A weighing device with a variable-speed belt in the bottom to discharge
material (typically aggregate) onto an incline conveyor. Live bottom batchers
are used with compact, highly mobile, low-profile plants.

Load
The total amount of concrete or asphalt that is being or has been batched for
delivery in a truck or transfer to forms (as in a production plant).
See Also:
Batch

Load Meter
A device that monitors the power usage of the motors driving a mixer.

Load Size
Amount of concrete to be delivered in the truck. Cannot exceed the maximum
load size for the plant.

Load Size, Maximum

The maximum load size a truck is allowed to haul. A warning message in
COMMANDseries is displayed if the load size is equal to or greater than this
quantity on a ticket. Load sizes are specified in the truck file.

Load Size, Minimum

The minimum load size a truck is allowed to haul and still be profitable. A load
that is under the minimum load size will trigger a warning in COMMANDseries
that tells users that the load size is equal or below a specified quantity. Load
sizes are specified in the truck file.

Load Size, Scheduled

A truck’s normal load size.

Loading Status
One of several possible statuses for a truck. A truck in the Loading Status is in
the process of being loaded with material.

Lot/Block Number
Home builders often account for the costs of houses by identifying the lot and
block number of the house. Lot/block serves as an address. This may be a
required field in COMMANDseries depending on system configuration.

322 12/21/16
LPT1
Plug on the back of the computer where the printer cable is normally
connected.

LTPP
Long Term Payment Preference
Long Term Pavement Performance

Lump Sum Contract

With a lump sum contract, the contractor agrees to perform the work for one
fixed price, regardless of the ultimate cost.

Lump Sum Tender

A tender at a fixed price to which a contractor undertakes to carry out all the
work specified on the drawings and in the contract documents.

M
Maintenance Management
Preparing ongoing programs for the planned maintenance of constructions
and managing the implementation of these works.

Maintenance Projects
Ongoing repair and maintenance of existing constructions increasingly being
incorporated within the broader activity of facilities management.

Management
Effective use and coordination of resources such as capital, plant, materials,
and labor to achieve defined objectives with maximum efficiency.

Management Contract
A contract in which management is regarded as a separate discipline and
responsibility from that of construction. Construction (works) contractors
contract with a management contractor, who is therefore their client or
employer.

Management Contracting
The method of carrying out a construction project whereby a contractor is
appointed at the pre-construction stage and paid on a fee basis to manage
and deliver the project. The fee comprises a percentage for profit and fixed
overheads. All construction work is carried out by the sub-contractors,
selected and appointed in consultation with the client and his professional
advisers.

12/21/16 323
Management Contractor
The management contractor is appointed by the client to work alongside the
design and cost consultants, providing a construction management service on
a number of professional bases. The management contractor does not
undertake either design or direct construction work. The design requirements
are met by letting each element of the construction to a specialist sub-
contractor.

Management Fee
An agreed upon sum for management services.

Management Information
Information for management decision making.

Management of Construction
Embraces all those job functions necessary to plan, control and coordinate the
design, execution and long term care of construction projects.

Management Style
Approach adopted by managers in exercising authority, encouraging
participation in decision-making, motivating staff, delegating authority,
communication information and maintaining control.

Management Technique
A means used by managers, to define and assist with the solution of a
problem.

Map Page
A precise delivery point, one square mile or so. This file and associated field in
order entry refer to a specific geographic location. It is common to make the
graphic grids consistent with a map book that the driver can carry. A Map
Page generally refers to a page and coordinates to more closely identify a
load’s exact location. Each map page contains the travel time from each plant
- by time of day and by season of the year.
See Also:
Zone

Masonry
The science, art, craft and trade of building in natural or artificial stone. The
term is often extended to work in brick and tile. Ancient examples of immense
irregular blocks of stone, laid together without mortar, have been found
throughout Europe, the Americas, Africa, and Asia. The ancient Greeks and
Romans developed masonry techniques that are still used today.

324 12/21/16
Materials Management
The creation of conditions to bring about the optimum use of all materials
available for the construction of a project to ensure availability at the right
time and control of inventory.

Materials Manager
Focused management process used to manage mix designs and raw
materials.

Metered Feed
Liquid materials such as water and admixtures can be added to a load of
concrete via a metering device which delivers the required quantity in small
increments (pulses) and within acceptable tolerances.

Metered Water
Metered water is fed directly into the truck or mixer when the batch is
discharged. In some cases, water is fed into a holding tank then released
when the batch is discharged.
See Also:
Weighed Water

Method Statement
A statement of the construction methods and resources to be employed in
executing construction work. The statement is normally closely linked to the
Tender program.

Milk Run
A single delivery with multiple stops. Delivering wet mortar is an excellent
example of this where .2 to 1.0 m3 may be delivered to each of 10 sites.

Mix
Concrete Mix. Usually made up of aggregate, cement, and water. Sometimes
admixtures are added to change the properties of the concrete.

Mixer
A mixing device in a central mix plant that blends materials in a load of
concrete before discharging the mix into a truck.

Mix Design
A recipe for one unit (cubic yard or meter) of concrete. Batching plants can
use several different mixes, depending on the requirements of the job
(strength, sidewalk, bridge, road, government project, etc.). Mix designs are
sometimes maintained by QC (Quality Control) personnel.

12/21/16 325
Mix Design Interface
Also known as mix download. The mix download method is: download from
the item master file, download from orders, upload from order. Output
Destination: batch panel output; file output: European; document format:
European.

MMM
Short for Manual Material Monitor. A process within a Batch Control System
that records amounts of materials manually fed.

MnDOT
Abbreviation for Minnesota Department of Transportation (http://
mnroad.dot.state.mn.us/).

Moisture Probe
A probe device mounted in the side of a bin to measure the moisture content
of aggregate materials such as sand. The probe uses the principle of
microwave energy absorption to measure moisture content.

Mortar
Mixture of lime and/or cement with sand and water, used either as a binding
material for bricks and stone or as a plaster.

Motion Detection
Motion Detection ensures that a scale's reading is stable before its value is
recorded.

N
NATM or SCL
New Austrian Tunneling Method called Sprayed Concrete Lining.

Negotiated Contract
In a negotiated contract, the client selects at the outset one main contractor
with whom to negotiate. In essence, the arrangement is the same as that for
a two-stage Tender.

Net Weights
Target and batched amounts are totaled for each individual material.
See Also:
Cumulative Weights

326 12/21/16
Net Mode Loading
The process of loading a certain quantity of material into a truck and or a
trailer.

Neutron Probe
Sensors that measure the total frozen and unfrozen moisture content in the
pavement.

Next Number
The next number in a sequence of numbers. Affects the numbering scheme
for orders, tickets, invoices, etc. COMMANDseries uses next numbers to
determine what sequence to use for what type of document.

Nose Plug
A nose plug is extended over the charging point of a mixer when it is ready to
be loaded. This prevents material and dust from spilling out of the mixer.

notification message
Another word for Alert or software-generated message or warning.

Novation
A hybrid variation of design and build procurement in which the client
appoints a designer (architect) to develop a concept design and submit the
designer to the contractor.

Nozzle
Attachment at end of the delivery hose from which Shotcrete is jetted at high
velocity.

Nozzleman
Worker on who manipulates the Shotcrete nozzle, controls consistency with
the dry process, and controls final disposition of the material.

NTEP
National Type Evaluation Program. NTEP performs evaluations of weighing
and measuring devices for compliance with NIST Handbook 44. Many States
require an NTEP Certificate of Conformance for any device to be installed in a
commercial application.
(Source: http://www.balances.com/and/legalfortrade.html)

12/21/16 327
O
Online Analytical Processing (OLAP)
A category of software technology. OLAP enables analysts, managers, and
executives to understand data through fast, consistent, and interactive access
to many data models. These models reflect the dimensionality of the
enterprise as understood by the user.
COMMANDview, a COMMANDseries component, employs OLAP in a multi-user,
client/server implementation and offers rapid response to queries regardless
of database size or complexity. OLAP helps the user synthesize enterprise
information through comparative, personal viewing, and through historical
and projected analysis of various “what-if” data model scenarios.

OLAP Server
A high-capacity, multi-user information engine designed to support and
manipulate multi-dimensional data structures. Every data item is located and
accessed based on the intersection of the dimension members defining that
item. Server design and data structure are optimized for rapid ad-hoc
information retrieval, as well as for fast, flexible calculation and
transformation of raw data based on formulaic relationships.
The OLAP Server may either physically stage the processed multi-dimensional
information to deliver consistent and rapid response times to end users, or it
may populate its data structures in real-time from relational or other
databases, or offer a choice of both. Current technology and the end user
need for consistent and rapid response times suggest that staging the multi-
dimensional data is often the preferred method.

Open Tender
A Tender received as a result of advertising for competitive tender.

Order
A request for a specific type and amount of material for a specific time and
day.

Original/Originating Ticket
The delivery ticket for which the material was originally batched.

Out of Service
A truck is not in service, more than likely parked in the yard or being repaired.

Oven Dry
The condition in which the pore spaces within an aggregate are filled only with
air. This condition is achieved by baking out the aggregate until all of the
surface and absorbed moistures are driven off.

328 12/21/16
See Also:
SSD

Overhead Costs
Fixed administrative operating costs such as property leases, building/
equipment maintenance, etc. It has nothing to do with aggregate and/or
overhead hoppers.

Overhead Hoppers
A bin used to accumulate aggregate prior to discharging into a truck.

Overhead Loadout
Loading an asphalt or aggregate truck from a storage bin. The truck may or
may not be sitting on a scale (weighbridge). The COMMANDseries Overhead
Loadout System is composed of three parts: A graphical interface with scale
readouts and silo information, a text entry form, and the communication
interface to the Libra Generation 2 Load Out Control System.

Owner Completion Flag

An indicator that all required information has been collected for an owner.

P
Packet
A unit of transmitted data in a TCP/IP protocol transmission.

Pass
Distribution of a stream of materials over the receiving surface during
shotcreting. A layer of Shotcrete is built up by making several passes.

Pave Tech Van

Vehicle with three cameras that record video images of the pavement surface,
pavement profile, rutting and faulting. Performance (Fr.: Performance). A
quantitative expression of behavior related to use.

Percent Concentration
Percentage of standard volume weight that is dissolved admix.

Piezo Accelerometer
Sensor that measures the vertical acceleration of concrete slabs under
dynamic loadings. The resulting data, when integrated twice, yields
deflections.

12/21/16 329
Planning
The process of establishing the sequence and relationship of a series of
operations prior to the commencement of construction work.

Plant
A production plant or material storage location.

Plant Dispatch
Personnel who take orders and schedule, ticket and track trucks for their
plant.

Plant Zone
References the delivery zone in which a particular plant resides.

PO
Short for Purchase Order.

Pocket
Hand written or computer printed orders are often stored in a carrousel rack
with places or pockets for each order. These pockets are organized by time of
day, day of the week, or numerically. COMMANDseries displays a field on the
tracking screen for the pocket number.

Pocket Number
A field on the tracking screen that identifies the Pocket number of the order
card carousel that stores the order.

Poll
Information is exchanged between two systems using a polling method. The
information exchange is not dynamic; instead, every 5 or 10 seconds, the
system checks, or polls, the other system for new information.

Polynomials
Instead of having to maintain hundreds of mix designs, “batchbooks” can be
used to determine the desired quantities of aggregates and water in terms of
a mathematical function of the cement content. This mathematical function,
called a “polynomial” equation, uses cement weight as the independent
variable.

Post
The process of creating permanent changes to a customer’s transaction
balances from transaction batches.

330 12/21/16
Preact
In a typical gravity-fed batch plant, the feeding of aggregate material is
stopped at a point short of the target weight to compensate for airborne
material that has not reached the scale. This is referred to as Preact.
The column of airborne material grows shorter as the pile in the scale grows
taller – meaning Preact is smaller for large batch sizes.

Pre-Bagged Shotcrete Mix

Pre-bagged concrete or Shotcrete mix supplied in bags with all ingredients
oven-dried and pre-mixed.

Pre-Batched
Amount of material previously batched that included the current load to derive
the full delivered quantity.

Pre Qty
In COMMANDseries ticketing, this refers to the amount of concrete left on
board for reuse (resale).
See Also:
Reused Concrete

Precision Water System (PWS)

Command Alkon's Precision Water System allows users to perform bake-outs
and configure and calibrate up to 12 moisture probes. Bake-outs and moisture
probe calibrations can be accomplished on a variety of materials, including
coarse aggregates.
PWS converts the signal or output voltage from a probe to a value that
represents the material's actual moisture percentage.
PWS is comprised of Command Alkon 7102 Moisture Probes (in multiples of
2), a Bus Controller mounted inside a NEMA-rated junction box, and the
Precision Water System software application which is installed with
COMMANDbatch.

Pricing Plant
The pricing for a delivery comes from this plant. It may not be the delivery
plant, especially if the load is delivered from another plant through the
producer’s choice.

Procurement
The amalgam of activities undertaken by the client to obtain a building or civil
engineering work.

12/21/16 331
Produced
Amount of material actually batched at a plant.

Product, Associated
Any item that goes into the concrete or is dependent upon the concrete
quantity for dosing or pricing. Accelerators, retarders, superplasticizer, fiber
mesh, color, delivery charges, after hours charges, surcharges, temperature
control charges are all associated products.

Product, Extra
Any product sold outside of concrete or its constituents (example: rebar).

Professional Construction Management

A term used in the U.S. to describe an arrangement whereby the tasks of
planning, design and construction are integrated by a project team comprised
of the owner, construction manager, and the design organization.

Professional Constructor
One of the following:
• Responsible master of the discipline that comprises the whole of the
construction process as well as its essential parts.
• Possessing such skills founded on knowledge acquired through prescribed
education and refined by experience, or earned equivalently as a
recognized practitioner.
• One who initiates, develops, produces or delivers, in whole or essential
part, construction works at prices, times, and standards of quality which
assures advantage to clients and society as a whole.

Profit
Money remaining from a sale after materials, delivery and overhead have
been subtracted.

Progress Analysis
Breakdown of a project into identifiable components so that it is possible to
control the process of construction.

Progress Control
The process of measuring actual progress against predicted planning and
scheduling.

Project
In the concrete industry:

332 12/21/16
• A project contains information about ongoing jobs that may require
multiple orders. In this regard, a project serves as a template for orders
created from it. A project also provides a way to designate, and thus
control, items that are shipped on its orders.
Other definitions include:
• A job that has been won and awarded to a company.
• A combination of activities of different specialized groups, directed at a
non-repetitive result with a clear beginning and end.

Project Brief
The project embodiment of the selected option for the fulfillment of a stated
requirement for a facility or works.

Project Documentation
Systematic arrangement of information about a project during its course.

Project Management
Overall planning and coordination of a project from inception to completion
aimed at meeting the client's requirements and ensuring completion on time,
within cost and to required quality standards. Project management is typically
carried out either by a private consultant or an employee of the project client.

Project Manager
The person or firm appointed by the Client responsible for planning,
coordinating, and controlling a project from inception to completion, as well as
meeting the client's requirements and ensuring completion on time, within
cost and to required quality standards.

Project Supervision
Supervision and approval of the work of suppliers and other organizations
working on site. Typically carried out either by a private consultant or an
employee of the client.

Proxy
Used in reference to COMMANDlien, and has to do with payment terms.

Public Tender
See Open Tender.

Pump
a) Concrete pump truck or standalone form. Concrete is poured into a
pump’s hopper then pumped through its pipes. A pump is used to put

12/21/16 333
concrete in places where a truck cannot maneuver - up on a roof, deep
in a hole etc.
a) A means of placing concrete where it is literally pumped like water to
its final placement. This could also refer to a water or slurry pump in a
plant.

Punch In/ Punch Out

Going on or off the clock for the purpose of tracking total hours worked. Also
known as Clock In / Clock Out. Applies to drivers and trucks. If a truck is
punched out, it is out of service.

Q
Q/C
Stands for Quality Control. Also known as Quality Assurance.

Quality Control
Also know as Quality Assurance. Work undertaken by a contractor, the client's
representative or, possibly, an insurance company to ensure the quality of
materials and work on site is accomplished in accordance with the agreed
upon specifications and accepted standards.

Quantity Delivered
The actual quantity “sold” to the contractor. It is determined when the ticket is
generated, not when the truck arrives on the job site. If concrete was rejected
and the customer credited, the rejected amount will not show in the total.

Quantity Ordered
Quantity the customer ordered. This quantity will print on the ticket and
display on the Tracking screen. Many customers continuously order less than
they need.

Quantity Scheduled
The maximum quantity that the customer has agreed to, or that the
dispatcher has entered to ensure that enough loads have been planned to
accommodate the order.

Quote
A written offer to a contractor for a specific Job.

Quoted Deductions
Used in COMMANDcartage. A deduction that spans a period of time. For
example, a driver may buy a new set of tires for his truck from the quarry,

334 12/21/16
and will pay for them over a period of time through deductions from his hauler
pay.

R
Ready-Mix Concrete or Shotcrete
Concrete or Shotcrete ingredients mixed by a concrete batch plant and
delivered to the site in ready-mix trucks ready for placing or shooting.

Rear Discharge Truck

Material is discharged from the back of a the concrete truck.

Rebar
Long bar(s) of steel used to strengthen hydrated (hardened) concrete.

Rebound
Loose material from the shotcreting process that has not adhered to the
excavated surface or the panel of Shotcrete being formed. It can provide
planes or zones of weakness in the shotcrete lining if it sets, is not cleared
away and is subsequently incorporated into later panels.

Recap
A report that recapitulates the day’s business and lists each order with it's
associated tickets.

Recipe
Another name for a Mix Design.

Recirculating Screw
A large augur in the bottom of a cement scale that mixes the cement while it
feeds then pushes the cement toward the gate when the cement is
discharging.

Reclaimer System
A system in which concrete can be recycled, rather than dumped on the
ground. Reclaimers may wash away water, sand, and cement, allowing a plant
to reclaim the constituents. In some systems, an attempt is made to capture
the water and cement (a combination known as slurry water). The slurry
water (and other materials) can then be reused.

12/21/16 335
Rehabilitation Project
Work associated with the rehabilitation and refurbishment of buildings,
normally the responsibility of people who have developed a particular
expertise in this area.

Rejected Concrete
Concrete that is refused for any reason, usually because it is too wet (high
slump) or past its allotted age.

Relay
Electromagnetic switch that turns one or more isolated switches on or off.

Remote Access
Also known as COMMANDassist. Allows COMMANDbatch systems with internet
access (high speed preferred) to connect to Command Alkon’s support
network so that technical support staff can:
• Troubleshoot and resolve problems.
• Answer questions and provide training on specific topics.
• Manually download and assist with the installation of software updates.
• Modify plant automation.

Remote Batching
Remote Batching allows an operator at a location away from the main plant to
create and run batches. In some setups, batches cannot be started until the
driver presses the “AUTHORIZE” button in the plant. This setup is particularly
useful when the operator is out of sight or earshot of the plant. By pressing
the “AUTHORIZE” button, the driver verifies that plant equipment is ready and
that no intruders (particularly children) are around the equipment.
See Also:
SMS (Soft Manual Station)

Remote Client
Also known as Second Client Access. Allows remote users (up to 3 additional
concurrent users) access to COMMANDbatch data. Remote client users can
perform the following tasks without interfering with normal batching
operations:
• Run batches (ONLY IF the Remote Batching option is purchased and the
Driver Authorization box is installed).
• Create, update, and delete COMMANDbatch data (customers, mixes,
other products, pricing, orders, etc.).
• Modify plant automation (bin tuning, discharge tuning, device
sequencing, etc.).

336 12/21/16
• Troubleshoot problems using built-in diagnostic tools (Weigh-Up
Diagnostics, Discharge Diagnostics, Sequence Tracer, Custom Equation
Monitor, Ticket Format Helper).
• Preview and print most reports.

Resident Engineer
The site representative or Engineer responsible for issuing instructions and
drawings to the contractor's representative.

Resistivity Probe
Sensors that measure depths of freezing and thawing fronts in the pavement
structure.

Resold Concrete
Also called Reused Concrete, this is concrete that has been returned from a
previous job and is used in a new load.
See Also:
Returned Concrete

Retarders
Admixes that slow down the hydration (setting or hardening) of concrete.
Generally used on hot days or for mass pours.

Retarding Admixtures
Used to delay the rate at which concrete sets. Used during times of extreme
heat or if a special finish design is needed.

Returned Concrete
Pertains to concrete returned by the truck selected for the current load. May
or may not be resold or reused. In some states (U.S.), returned concrete can
be resold.
See Also:
Leftover Concrete
Resold Concrete
Reused Concrete

Reused Concrete
Same as Resold Concrete but probably a more accurate term as concrete can
be reused but not resold if it is delivered in addition to the original quantity.

12/21/16 337
Reverse Weigh Silos
In this setup, scales are located on the legs of the silo. The amount of material
loaded is determined by measuring the weight of material plus the silo before
the drop is started and throughout the drop. When the total weight has been
reduced by the target amount of material to be loaded, the load is finished.
See Also:
Decumulative Scale

Rolling Overtime Errors

A driver’s total hours may be calculated over a number of consecutive days.
The driver is allowed to drive a certain number of hours over a certain number
of days. If the driver’s actual hours exceed this number of hours, the excess is
considered the driver’s rolling overtime hours. This definition is opposed to
excess daily hours or excess hours worked in a seven-day week.

Roster
List of assignments for trucks and orders. Usually created at night in
preparation for the next day. To roster a truck is to assign specific loads or
deliveries to it. Rosters can change as the day progresses. The loads can be
picked up from multiple plants, in any order or sequence.
Rostering is performed either by focusing on the plants to which a truck can
be sent (plant-focused), or by focusing on the sequence of loads assigned to a
truck (load-sequence focused).
To roster an order is to assign trucks to it.

Round Trip
A truck is assigned to a specific order, and that truck goes back and forth
between the plant and the job site delivery loads until the order is fulfilled.
You can round trip more than on truck to an order.

Rounding Method
Used for load size calculations. Load sizes can be rounded up, down, or not at
all.

RTC
The RTC (Real Time Controller) is a mini computer that “does the math” for
COMMANDbatch. The RTC makes calculations such as batch targets and feed
cutoffs and sends this data along with other time-sensitive information to the
COMMANDbatch PC. The COMMANDbatch PC handles the “supervisory” side of
batch operations, including preparing batches, running reports, and
maintaining the database.
In the past, the RTC was casually referred to as a “Brick” because it was
physically housed in a metal unit about the size of a masonry brick. In newer

338 12/21/16
versions of COMMANDbatch, the physical “brick” has been replaced by a
virtual RTC (vRTC), a virtual image of the RTC that is installed on the
COMMANDbatch PC and communicates with the supervisory side via a virtual
network adapter.

RTS
Request To Send. A hardware signal used in serial communications that
indicates the serial port is requesting to send data. Used with CTS.

Rubble Masonry
Uses irregular and coarsely jointed quarried or field stone.

S
Scale Dampening
See Dampening.

Scale
Scales are used to weigh up materials such as aggregates, cements, and
water according to the amounts specified in the mix design. The materials are
then either discharged directly into a mixer, a truck, or onto a conveyor belt
that loads the truck.

Scale Division
Another term for Grad Size. The accuracy of a scale. A scale with a grad size
of 20 lbs would be accurate within 20 lbs. Not to be confused with Tolerance,
which is used for target weight calculations.

Scheduled Plant
The order is scheduled from this plant. It may not be the actual delivery plant.

Scoreboard
Truck numbers for upcoming loads can be displayed on a scoreboard located
in the yard and/or in the drivers' lounge.

Screeding
The leveling and smoothing of the top layer of a material that is poured, such
as concrete, so that the material is the same height as the forms, or guides,
that surround it. (Source: http://www.wisegeek.com/what-is-screeding.htm)
See Also:
Bull Float

12/21/16 339
Second Client Access
Also known as Remote Client. Allows remote users (up to 3 additional
concurrent users) access to COMMANDbatch data. Remote client users can
perform the following tasks without interfering with normal batching
operations:
• Run batches (ONLY IF the Remote Batching option is purchased and the
Driver Authorization box is installed).
• Create, update, and delete COMMANDbatch data (customers, mixes,
other products, pricing, orders, etc.).
• Modify plant automation (bin tuning, discharge tuning, device
sequencing, etc.).
• Troubleshoot problems using built-in diagnostic tools (Weigh-Up
Diagnostics, Discharge Diagnostics, Sequence Tracer, Custom Equation
Monitor, Ticket Format Helper).
• Preview and print most reports.

Separate Contracts
With separate contracts, the client's professional adviser lets contracts for the
work with separate contractors. This arrangement was common place prior
the emergence of the general contractor.

Sequence
In COMMANDbatch, a sequence defines the order in which feeding and
discharge occur for devices used to batch a load of concrete. The sequence
specifies when devices start and stop, as well as the quantity of material that
should be fed.
Only one primary sequence code can be used at a time. For example, if a
plant consists of a “wet” side and a “dry” side, a separate sequence would be
used for each side. The wet sequence would be assigned to wet mix designs,
and the dry sequence to dry mixes.
A sequence consists of steps stored as Start, Stop/Hold, and Quantity
equations. Each equation consists of conditions listed in a particular order.
Typically, COMMANDbatch is shipped with template-type wet, dry, and normal
sequences (abbreviated as W, D, and N, respectively). This makes it easier for
the installer to modify these sequences to suit the plant’s needs.
See Also:
The online help for the Sequences forms
The Sequences Setup Guide

340 12/21/16
Serial Moisture Probe
A serial probe uses an external measuring device instead of an E-Z CAL
display to provide moisture readings in serial instead of analog output.

Serial Scale
A serial scale uses an external device instead of the E-Z CAL Manual Station
display to provide scale readings in serial instead of analog signal. A serial
scale can be used when all of the E-Z CAL displays are being used.

Serial Tender
The awarding of similar projects to a contractor following a competitive tender
on a master bill of quantities. This master bill becomes a standing open offer
for the client to accept a number of contracts. Each contract is separate and
priced separately.

Settle Time
Number of seconds the system should wait before checking the weight on the
scale. This “settle” time gives the scale time to stop bouncing up and down
after being loaded. Obviously, accurate readings cannot be obtained until the
scale is allowed to settle.

Settlement Sheet
A report that describes payments and deductions to haulers for the delivery of
materials.

Shotcrete
A mixture of cement, aggregate, and water projected pneumatically at high
velocity from a nozzle onto a surface to produce a layer or layers of concrete.
Shotcrete normally incorporates admixtures, especially accelerators, and may
also include fibers. Also called Sprayed Concrete.
See Also:
Dry-Mix Shotcrete
Gunite
Wet-Mix Shotcrete

Shrinkage
Decrease in length or volume.

Silicate Fume
An extremely fine by-product of the manufacture of silicon metal. Produced by
the condensation of gases escaping from the electric-arc furnace. Silicate
fume is used in concrete and Shotcrete to improve their properties. In

12/21/16 341
shotcrete, silicate fume reduces rebound, increases thickness per pass, and
improves properties of the hardened shotcrete.

Silo
A cylindrical storage container for cement, flyash, slag, or other materials.
COMMANDseries interfaces to three types of Silos: Truck Scale, Weigh
Batcher, and Reverse Weigh.

Simulated Demo Batch

If the COMMANDbatch Default Simulate Status is set for a simulated batch,
concrete is not created but inventory and delivered amounts are affected.
See Also:
Actual Batch
Training Batch

Site Coordination
Also know as Site Direction. Responsibility for the coordination of day-to-day
operations on site in accordance with the project and the predetermined
program, typically carried out by an employee of the contractor.

Site Management
The overall management of the processes required to bring the site operations
of a project to a satisfactory conclusion, typically carried out either by private
consultant or an employee of the project client.

Site Manager
The person responsible on behalf of the client for controlling and coordinating
all the work of others in order to bring the site operations of a project to a
satisfactory conclusion.

Site Works
All work carried out within the site of a construction project.

Slag
A type of stone, small 1/4 - 1/2 inch.

Slinger
Type of aggregate truck that uses a conveyer belt-type discharge system. A
slinger truck might be requested for dumping aggregate into a hard to reach
place.

342 12/21/16
Slump
Slump is defined as the number of inches (or millimeters) concrete will sag, or
slump, when a special test cone filled with the concrete is turned upside down
and the cone pulled off the concrete.
In other markets this is called ‘consistency’. Consistency for concrete can be
stated different ways. Examples are: slump, flow, workability. We mostly use
‘slump’.
During a slump test, fresh concrete is placed in a cone which is typically 12"
high, 8" in diameter at its base and 4" at its peak. The cone is filled in 3 lifts
with each lift rodded 25 times. The cone is then pulled off and the concrete
allowed to slump, or roll down the cone shape. The distance the cone of
concrete slumps is measured and is recorded as the slump.
See Also:
Compactibility
Flow
Vebe

Slurry Water
Recycled concrete water which contains oversaturated cement and fine
aggregate. If slurry water is used in a batch, the targets of each material in
the slurry water must be reduced to maintain the proper composition of the
mix.
Also called Grey Water.

Small Batch Tolerance

In COMMANDbatch, small batch tolerances are used when the cumulative
scale batching target is less than (Scale Capacity x Small Batch Size
Percentage).
See Also:
Fast Batch Tolerance

Small Batch Size

In COMMANDbatch, this is the percentage of the scale/meter capacity below
which small batch tolerances are used. If this value is zero, large (normal)
batch tolerances are used.

SMS (Soft Manual Station)

A component of COMMANDbatch, the SMS is a software generated view of the
physical Manual Station which allows an operator at a location away from the
main plant to manually feed materials without being located next to the
physical Manual Station at the remote plant.

12/21/16 343
See Also:
Remote Batching

Sold/Billable
The amount of material sold and billed to a customer.

Specific Gravity
The ratio of the weight of a given volume of aggregate to the weight of an
equal volume of water. Specific gravity is used for calculating a mix design's
yield. It is also used in Slurry Water calculations.

Spray Bar
A collection of nozzles mounted along a bar located near the boot where
material is discharged into a truck. During discharge, water is sprayed from
the nozzles to collect fine particles of cement that are released into the air.
The Spray Bar is required in some states in the U.S.

Sprayed Concrete
A mixture of cement, aggregate, and water projected pneumatically at high
velocity from a nozzle onto a surface to produce a layer or layers of concrete.
Sprayed concrete normally incorporates admixtures, especially accelerators,
and may also include fibers. Also called Shotcrete.

Spraying
Process of placing Shotcrete (sprayed concrete) by projecting the shotcrete
from the nozzle to the surface receiving the shotcrete (also called shooting or
gunning).

SSD
Short for “Saturated Surface Dry”. The condition in which all of the pore
spaces within an aggregate are full of water, but no water is present on the
surface.
See Also:
Oven Dry

Start Tare
Scale reading when a batch is started. Must be within the acceptable tolerance
range for the material being weighed. Check your state's requirements for
Start and End Tares.
See Also:
End Tare

344 12/21/16
Structural Design
Design of the structural elements of large constructions by a structural
engineer. In smaller and less complex constructions this work is normally the
responsibility of other construction professionals.

Sub-Contractor Completion Flag

An indicator that all required information has been collected for a specified
sub-contractor.

Sundry Charges
Miscellaneous charges to customers.

Superplasticizer
A wetting agent that increases the concrete's flowability (slump) without
adding water or altering the Water/Cement Ratio. Superplasticizers increase
the flowability more than water reducers. This admix has a short life of 30-60
minutes, followed by a rapid slump loss. Because of this, they are often added
at the job site.

Surcharge
Any extra fee charged for a product. Usual surcharges are extra costs for fuel
or environmental costs.

T
Tare
The weight of an empty truck or scale. This weight can include material that
clings to the inside of the truck or scale after discharge.

Target
The amount of a material needed in one cubic yard (or meter) of a mix. The
target amount can be recalculated if adjustments have been made to another
material. For example, if the amount of cement needed in a mix is changed,
the target for the water material would be recalculated.

TCP/IP
Communications protocols used for transferring data over the Internet and
over a Local Area Network.
See Also:
IP

12/21/16 345
Temper
Water added to a batch after all materials are in the mixer or truck.

Temperature Gun
A device that captures the temperature of concrete, most likely in a mixer,
without any physical contact with the concrete.

Temper Meter
A device that monitors the amount of water manually fed into a mixer.

Tender
An offer which incorporates the sum of money, time and other conditions
required to carry out the contract obligations in order to complete a project or
part of it.

Tendering
The management and commercial function of determining the tender based
upon the estimate and other details prepared by the contractor's estimator
and other personnel.

Thermal Shock
Force, arising out of thermal expansion or contraction, which causes
disruption of a material on sudden heating or cooling.

Thin-Stream Conveying
A method of pneumatic conveyance from the Shotcrete machine by which
either dry mix or wet mix is conveyed through the delivery line by compressed
air.

Ticket
Short for “delivery ticket”, which is printed and given to the driver. Also called
a Tag or docket. The ticket includes, at a minimum, the product(s) ordered
and the delivery address. It can also include the amounts of materials batched
to form the mix.
In the past, producers sent copies of the delivery ticket with prices as
invoices; now tickets and invoices are two separate documents.

Ticket Stack
When a dispatcher sends a ticket, it may appear on the screen of a batching
computer. That screen is called a ticket stack.

346 12/21/16
Timed Feed
A timed opening of a single gate for a time duration based on historical Drop
Records. Timed Feed starts after Fast Feed has completed and the amount left
to feed is still well short of the target.
See Also:
Jog Feed

To Job Status
The status of a truck enroute to a job site.

Tolerance
Range above or below its Target that a material's weight can vary and still be
acceptable.

Tracepoints
Transactions in an error log that show what an application was doing before it
terminated.

Traditional Contracting
Method of construction procurement in which independent professionals (i.e.
architects, engineers, quantity surveyors) are employed by the client to
complete the design work. The client then enters into a separate contract with
a contractor to execute the designed construction. The contractor is selected
on some basis of competition.

Training Batch
If the COMMANDbatch Default Simulate Status is set for a training batch,
Concrete is not created, and inventory and delivered amounts are not
affected.
See Also:
Actual Batch
Simulated Demo Batch

Transfers
Material moved to another site within the company. No revenues are collected
- the material is not sold.

Trim
Amount or percentage of a material to be added or subtracted per mix unit
(yard or cubic meter). Also used to increase water to add on the job.
See Also:

12/21/16 347
Adjust

Truck Scale Silo

A silo consisting of a flat scale beneath the silo gates. The truck is tared prior
to loading, and the load-out system monitors the total weight on the scale to
determine how much material has been loaded as material is dropped into the
truck.

Turnkey
A contract whereby the client has entered into an agreement with a single
administrative entity, who provides the design and construction under one
contract, and frequently effects land acquisition, financing, leasing, etc.

Two-Stage Tender
In this type of Tender, three or four contractors with appropriate experience
are separately involved in detailed discussions with the client's professional
advisers regarding all aspects of the project. Price competition is introduced in
the second stage.

Typed Status
COMMANDseries term: The old term for Printed Status in which a truck has
received it's delivery ticket but has not been loaded yet.

U
Ulink (short for Universal Link)
The Ulink interface supports communications from a dispatching computer to
any batching computer capable of handling the Ulink protocol. Typical
information that can be sent includes batching instructions, ticket printing
information, and mix designs.
The Ulink interface can also support the return of batch weights to the
dispatching computer for analysis and inventory control. The interface can be
configured to return batch weights in the fields listed in the Ulink specification,
or it can be customized to use other fields.
Also, incoming inventory transactions can be returned to the dispatching
computer for inventory control purposes.

UOM
Short for unit of measure (example: lb, kg, gl, oz, ml).

USACE
U.S. Army Corp of Engineers.

348 12/21/16
Usage Code
This term applies to concrete and identifies the use of the concrete. It is used
in various reports to analyze the use of the concrete by region, customer type,
and other purposes.

V
VAT
Value Added Tax. A tax that is charged whenever a product’s value or selling
price is increased. Only the amount of the increase is taxed.
Vebe
This test is performed by placing a conical slump mould of concrete on a
vibrating table. The cone is removed and a clear plastic disc is placed on the
top of the concrete. The vibrating table is started and the time it takes for the
disc to be fully in contact with the concrete is measured.
See Also:
Compactibility
Flow
Slump

Vibrator
A device attached near the gates of a bin, silo, or scale that produces enough
vibration to keep material from clumping as it feeds or discharges.

Void
A method for removing a charge or payment without deleting the record.

vRTC
Abbreviation for Virtual RTC. See RTC for a complete description.

W
Waiver Amount
A finance charge that is not considered large enough to be charged to the
customer.

WAN
Wide Area Network. A configuration in which a plant’s PCs are located in
different buildings, with the server housing a central database. Remote PCs
can be connected to the server via telephone lines or even satellite link.

12/21/16 349
Washout
A mix, typically rock and water, used for washing out a truck.

Water Reducers
Chemical that reduces the amount of water in a mix.

Water/Cement Ratio
In COMMANDbatch, two calculations of Water/Cement ratio can be printed:
Design and Actual.
• Design Water/Cement ratio is the water/cement ratio of the amounts
specified in the mix design.
Equals: TOTAL DESIGN WAT WGT / TOTAL DESIGN CEM WGT
• Actual Water/Cement ratio is water/cement ratio of the amounts actually
batched.
Equals: TOTAL ACTUAL WAT WGT / TOTAL ACTUAL CEM WGT
Actual Water/Cement ratio can be followed by one of the following codes
on the printed ticket:
T - (for “Theoretical”) means you can add water up to the TO ADD
amount without changing the stated W/C ratio.
A - (for “Actual”) means you cannot add water without changing the
stated W/C ratio. This code is displayed if the TO ADD value is zero and
moisture is measured in material bins.
Notes:
• Manual moisture entries will cause “T” to be printed as the Water/Cement
calculation code.
• Actual water/cement ratio can be printed on the top half of the ticket if
the ticket is set up that way.

Water Reducing Admixture

Reduces the amount of mixing water required to produce concrete at a given
slump. Used to improve strength by reducing the mixture of water and
concrete. Can also increase workability, but may affect setting time.

Water Vapor
The gas phase of water.
Water vapor creates pressure like any other gas. Cold air has a relatively low
vapor pressure, while warm air (with larger amounts of water vapor) has a
greater pressure. Water vapor penetrates building materials, traveling from
areas with higher vapor pressure to areas with lower vapor pressure.

350 12/21/16
Weigh Batcher Silo
Material is dropped from the silo into a scale over the truck. The material is
weighed in the scale and then dropped into the truck.

Weighbatcher
Another term for a scale or device that weighs and discharges material into a
truck or mixer.

Weighbridge
Another term for a scale.

Weighed Water
Water fed into a scale at the start of a batch and weighed.
See Also:
Metered Water

Weight per Volume

Weight of a gallon/liter of water: 8.345 gallons for U.S. systems; 1.000 liters
for Metric systems.

Wet Plant
Also called Central Mix, this is a concrete plant where materials are weighed
and discharged into a mixer at the plant and thoroughly mixed before being
loaded into a truck. The truck keeps the concrete agitated so that materials do
not segregate. Advantages are greater slump control, improved mixing, better
dust control and lower wear and tear on the truck. Disadvantages are higher
cost.
Some plants have both a Wet and a Dry side, and one or the other side can be
selected.
See Also:
Dry Plant

Wet-Mix Shotcrete
Shotcrete (sprayed concrete) in which all of the ingredients, including water
and fibers, are mixed then conveyed through a delivery hose, either
pneumatically or by positive displacement, then projected at high velocity
onto the surface being shot.

Will Call
A type of order that has been placed by a customer but cannot be shipped
until it is released. Similar terms are “provisional”, “Will Ring” and “TBC” (To
Be Confirmed).

12/21/16 351
Windows
An operating system for PCs developed by Microsoft Corporation, Redmond,
Washington.

X
There are no glossary entries starting with “X”.

Y
Yield
One of the following:
• Volume of concrete resulting from the combinations of the weighed
constituents. Concrete is sold by the Cubic Meter or Cubic Yard. A cubic
meter of concrete contains 1,000 liters worth of material while a cubic
yard contains 27 cubic feet.
• Permanent deformation which a material undergoes when it is stressed
beyond its elastic limit.

Z
Zone
A market or delivery area. A zone is intended to be the larger market area; A
zone can consist of several Map Pages. Tax location information is also derived
from the zone.

352 12/21/16
Index

A
Abort 162
From Load Summary 163
Using Abort Button 162
Alarms 226
Auto Batching 121
Abort 162
Adjusting Batch Information BEFORE Batch Start 137
Batch Adjustments AFTER Load Start 164
Changing Materials 174
Confirm Tolerance 159
Continuous Run / Discharge 170
Copy a Ticket on Batch Setup 176
Discharge Start 168
Dry Up Load 158
Freewheeling 173
Hold/Resume 161
Idle Time Reconciliation 157
Inventory Recordation When Manual Feeds Occur During Auto-Batching 160
Load Start 154
Start a Load from a Current Load 155
Load Statuses 131
Low Inventory Can Be Used to Prevent Load Start 156
Performing Washout 175
Preparing a Batch 135
Reprinting a Ticket 169
Trimming Materials 144
B
Batch Adjustments BEFORE Starting a Batch 137
Batch Bar Buttons and Connection Statuses 127
Batch Graphics
Hold/Resume
Device 161
Refresh Device Hold State 161
System 161
Batch Weights 207
Customizing Batch Weights Reports 216
Options 211
Overview 208
Printing 209
Printing Multiple 210
What to Print 215

12/21/16 353
Batching Cycle 122
Batching Overview 122
Bottle Not Empty Alerts 214
C
Change Material Targets during a Batch 164
Change Truck and Driver during a Batch 165
Change Truck Charge Rate during a Batch 165
Changing Materials during a Batch 174
Checking Your COMMANDbatch Version 15
Choke Feeding 126
Continuous Discharge 170
Start 171
Stop 172
Continuous Run 170
Start 171
Stop 172
Continuous Run / Discharge 170
Enable 170
Customers 218
D
Design Quantities 137
Discharge Cycle 126
Discharge Start 168
Dry Up Load 158
E
Eagle Performance Data Export 256
Editing on Batch Setup 137
End of Processes 281
Adding Reports to the End of Day Process 291
Backup Options 290
End of Day 282
End of Month 286
End of Week 286
End of Year 286
Export Data Fields 258
AC2000 Ticket Data 272
COMMANDbatch/Spectrum Material Records 269
COMMANDbatch/Spectrum Ticket Data 258
Eagle Performance Data 271
Eagle Ticket Data 265
MYOB Interface Ticket Data 277
F
Fast Feed 123
Field Dropdown Lists 43

354 12/21/16
Field Level Help 44
Field Right Click Menus 43
Filtering
for All records 51
on a Date field 52
on a Text field 51
to view Deleted records 52
Filtering Records 51
Forms 30
Field Colors 43
Field Drop Down Lists 43
Field Right Click Menus 43
Field-Level Help 44
Grid vs. Form Area 30
Grid vs. Subform 33
Opening 34
Opening from Menu Bar 34
Opening with 36
Opening with Explorer 35
Opening with Pull Down Menus 37
Records vs. Fields 41
Scroll Bars 40
Switching 39
Tabs 32
Workspaces 56
Freewheeling 173
G
Glossary 293
H
Hold/Resume 161
Device 161
Refresh Device 161
System 161
I
Idle Time Reconciliation 157
Inching Discharge 126
Introduction 9
Audience 9
Purpose 9
Revision Summary 10
Inventory
Checking On-Hand Amounts 220
Editing Manual Material Events 224
Entering Adjustments 221
Entering Receipts 221
Managing 220

12/21/16 355
Reconciling Manual Material Events 225
Setting On-Hand Amounts 223
Inventory Display on Batch Graphics 201
Operation 205
Setups 202
Item-Specific Unit Conversions 119
J
Jog Feed 124
L
Load Start 154
Start a Load from a Current Load 155
Load Statuses 131
Logger Records - Requesting 235
Logging In
to COMMANDbatch 14
Logging Manual Events when a Connection Goes Down 132
Low Inventory Can Be Used to Prevent Load Start 156
M
Main Screen 17
Manual Station Labels 228
Printing Labels (except for Scales) 231
Printing Scale Labels 228
Material Records Export 254
Material-Device Assignments - Checking 120
Materials
Adding on Batch Setup 137
Materials and Mixes 71
Copying Materials 117
Copying Other Products 118
Entering Admix Designs 113
Entering Admixes 88
Entering Aggregates 74
Entering Cements 81
Entering Item-Specific Unit Conversion Factors 119
Entering Mix Designs 106
Entering Other Products 103
Entering Waters 96
Mix Entry UOM Defaults 72
Vendors 72
Menus - Customizing 21
All Forms Menu 25
AutoRun Forms 28
Menu Bar 21
Open Forms Menu 21
Renaming a Folder 29
Mix Design Integrity

356 12/21/16
Material Limit Check 188
Material Limit Check - COMMANDbatch Setups 190
Material Limit Check - Disabling the Max Limit Check 191
Water/Cement Ratio Checks 178
Water/Cement Ratio Checks - COMMANDbatch Setups 180
Water/Cement Ratio Checks - Disabling 181
Water/Cement Ratio Checks - Disabling for a Mix Design 181
Yield Checks 182
Yield Checks - COMMANDbatch Setups 185
Yield Checks - Disabling 187
Mix Integrity Checks 177
Enabling 192
Mix Design vs. Batch Setup WCR and Yield Calculations 196
Reviewing Mix Design Integrity Alarms 199
To Minimize Mix Quality Warnings 197
Modified Records 50
Moisture
Adjusting Moisture for an Aggregate 141
Multi-Batching 124
O
Online Help 59
Accessing Manuals and Setup Guides 68
Accessing Release Notes 68
Browing Help Topics 65
Fields and Buttons 62
Forms 60
Links to Common Batching Tasks 68
Printing Topics 67
Searching for Topics 66
Task Help from a Form 64
P
Plants
Changing 16
Preact 122
Preparing a Batch 135
Creating from an Order 136
Creating without an Order 135
Pull Down Menus 18
R
Records
Adding, Editing, Deleting, Saving 45
Copying 55
Creating a Template 55
Filtering 51
Marked Modified 50
Report

12/21/16 357
Running 227
Reprinting a Ticket
From Batch Setup 169
From Ticket Editor 169
Restart Ethernet/IP Driver 241
Restart Real Time Monitor 241
RTC
Upgrade 243
RTC Tasks 241
Restart Ethernet/IP Driver 241
Restart Real Time Monitor 241
RTC Utilities 242
Re-boot RTC 242
Restart RTC 243
Shutdown RTC 242
S
Screen vs. Form 17
Scroll Bars 40
Sequencing 124
Shortcut Keys 69
Slump
Changing Mix Slump 141
Status Bar 20
SYSTEM UP
For ALL Connections 133
SYSTEM UP Custom Equation
RTC Connection Only 132
T
Template Record - Creating 55
Ticket
Canceling 219
Copying from Ticket Editor 218
Editing 218
Reprinting from Ticket Editor 218
Ticket Editing 218
Ticket Export 245
Path and Filename Variables 251
Setup 246
To Export Ticket Data 249
Ticket Printing 207
Tickets and Batch Weights 207
Timed Feed 123
To 164
Tolerance Error Symbols 214
Toolbar 19

358 12/21/16
Trimming Materials 144
Automatically Trimming a Single Admix 144
Automatically Trimming a Water Reducer 145
Automatically Trimming Admix Designs 144
Manually Trimming Materials 151
Setting Up Ulink Admix Trims 146
Truck Charge Rate
Adjusting on Batch Setup 142
U
Upgrade RTC 243
V
V4 Mix Design Import
Importing the Data 238
Overview 236
V4 Mix Designs
Importing 236
W
Washout - Performing 175
Water
Adjusting on a “Per Load” Basis 140
Adjusting on a “Per Yard” Basis 140
Changing In Truck Water Volume 141
Weigh-Up Diagnostics
Drop Record 311
Workspaces 56

12/21/16 359

Demand Batching User Guide: Commandbatch V1.7.3.0 & Later 7/30/12
No ratings yet
Demand Batching User Guide: Commandbatch V1.7.3.0 & Later 7/30/12
12 pages
Erp-Commandbatch Interface Setup Guide
No ratings yet
Erp-Commandbatch Interface Setup Guide
13 pages
Command Batch Automation Booklet NEW
No ratings yet
Command Batch Automation Booklet NEW
20 pages
Database Maintenance Manual: Commandbatch V1.7.3.0 & Later 5/20/14
No ratings yet
Database Maintenance Manual: Commandbatch V1.7.3.0 & Later 5/20/14
41 pages
Normal 5c41fb6297139
No ratings yet
Normal 5c41fb6297139
48 pages
Commandbatch Product Page
No ratings yet
Commandbatch Product Page
12 pages
E-Z View
No ratings yet
E-Z View
18 pages
Data Export/Import User Guide: Commandbatch V1.04 & Later 7/16/08
100% (1)
Data Export/Import User Guide: Commandbatch V1.04 & Later 7/16/08
20 pages
Asn-Commandbatch Interface Setup Guide
No ratings yet
Asn-Commandbatch Interface Setup Guide
15 pages
BPA v3.1
No ratings yet
BPA v3.1
24 pages
Batch
No ratings yet
Batch
39 pages
Intergraph Batch Services For Windows NT: Quick-Start Guide
No ratings yet
Intergraph Batch Services For Windows NT: Quick-Start Guide
39 pages
Operation - Plant It Work
No ratings yet
Operation - Plant It Work
79 pages
T10help (Ewen)
No ratings yet
T10help (Ewen)
9 pages
WinOpi RefMan Ed5 303028EN
0% (1)
WinOpi RefMan Ed5 303028EN
172 pages
I-Matrix Basic For Operator
100% (2)
I-Matrix Basic For Operator
79 pages
Front End Loader Setup Guide
No ratings yet
Front End Loader Setup Guide
10 pages
9 - Batch Operations
No ratings yet
9 - Batch Operations
114 pages
FactoryTalk® Batch Software Suite
No ratings yet
FactoryTalk® Batch Software Suite
8 pages
Factorytalk Batch Components Installation and Upgrade Guide
No ratings yet
Factorytalk Batch Components Installation and Upgrade Guide
88 pages
Mass Batch Processing Guide
No ratings yet
Mass Batch Processing Guide
2 pages
Decumulative Batching Setup Guide: Commandbatch V.104 & Later 11/15/07
No ratings yet
Decumulative Batching Setup Guide: Commandbatch V.104 & Later 11/15/07
38 pages
Control - M Desktop MEM630100UG67468 PDF
No ratings yet
Control - M Desktop MEM630100UG67468 PDF
318 pages
Training of Batching Operators
100% (1)
Training of Batching Operators
52 pages
Command Alkon Training Manual: Concrete Dispatch
No ratings yet
Command Alkon Training Manual: Concrete Dispatch
74 pages
Proficy Batch Upgrate
No ratings yet
Proficy Batch Upgrate
41 pages
Kinetic OrderMgmtUserGuide
No ratings yet
Kinetic OrderMgmtUserGuide
74 pages
Batch-In009 - en - User Guide
No ratings yet
Batch-In009 - en - User Guide
72 pages
Data Recording Setup Guide: Commandbatch V1.7.5.0 & Later 10/14/08
No ratings yet
Data Recording Setup Guide: Commandbatch V1.7.5.0 & Later 10/14/08
12 pages
ControlM Concepts Guide
100% (1)
ControlM Concepts Guide
48 pages
Batch Management: Configuration Steps
50% (2)
Batch Management: Configuration Steps
4 pages
PiT Op Manager-Production
No ratings yet
PiT Op Manager-Production
48 pages
CDZ OSUser
No ratings yet
CDZ OSUser
184 pages
User Guide: IBM Sterling Connect:Direct For z/OS
No ratings yet
User Guide: IBM Sterling Connect:Direct For z/OS
184 pages
Factorytalk Batch View Quick Start Guide
No ratings yet
Factorytalk Batch View Quick Start Guide
22 pages
Spectrum Flyer
No ratings yet
Spectrum Flyer
2 pages
Export Import
No ratings yet
Export Import
20 pages
CONTROL - M For zOS Getting Started Guide PDF
No ratings yet
CONTROL - M For zOS Getting Started Guide PDF
254 pages
Vlink Commandbatch Interface Setup Guide
No ratings yet
Vlink Commandbatch Interface Setup Guide
22 pages
Batch View
No ratings yet
Batch View
129 pages
Control-M For ZOS - 2 Getting Started Guide
No ratings yet
Control-M For ZOS - 2 Getting Started Guide
254 pages
Ba00339gen 2023-00
No ratings yet
Ba00339gen 2023-00
212 pages
FactoryTalk Batch View HMI Controls - Quick Start
No ratings yet
FactoryTalk Batch View HMI Controls - Quick Start
28 pages
Manual ControlM Mainframe
No ratings yet
Manual ControlM Mainframe
1,010 pages
System Manager - User Manual
No ratings yet
System Manager - User Manual
210 pages
PC Setup Win10
No ratings yet
PC Setup Win10
68 pages
Control M
No ratings yet
Control M
1,040 pages
Controlm User Guide
No ratings yet
Controlm User Guide
1,040 pages
Proces rm007 - en P PDF
No ratings yet
Proces rm007 - en P PDF
108 pages
Control M For OS390 and zOS Getting Started
100% (4)
Control M For OS390 and zOS Getting Started
274 pages
As 1442-2007 Carbon Steels and Carbon-Manganese Steels - Hot Rolled Bars and Semi-Finished Products
No ratings yet
As 1442-2007 Carbon Steels and Carbon-Manganese Steels - Hot Rolled Bars and Semi-Finished Products
7 pages
Footnotes
No ratings yet
Footnotes
1 page
MC-101 SoundList Multi01 W PDF
No ratings yet
MC-101 SoundList Multi01 W PDF
51 pages
in Physical Science
No ratings yet
in Physical Science
16 pages
DRRB
No ratings yet
DRRB
1 page
UNPriced BOQ (Civil Works Only) For Proposed Renovation of MHAC - Main House
No ratings yet
UNPriced BOQ (Civil Works Only) For Proposed Renovation of MHAC - Main House
14 pages
Law Students' Guide to Statutory Interpretation
No ratings yet
Law Students' Guide to Statutory Interpretation
13 pages
Safranin Staining Methods 1
No ratings yet
Safranin Staining Methods 1
5 pages
AI Insights for Tech Professionals
No ratings yet
AI Insights for Tech Professionals
23 pages
Practical Modeling For Nonlinear Seismic Response of RC Wall Structures
100% (1)
Practical Modeling For Nonlinear Seismic Response of RC Wall Structures
10 pages
LOTTERY
50% (4)
LOTTERY
2 pages
Construction of The New National Load Dispatch Center-3222
No ratings yet
Construction of The New National Load Dispatch Center-3222
2 pages
Romell Dynasty (Espalier), Vile Parle - Pile Shoring Cost-Offer Rev
No ratings yet
Romell Dynasty (Espalier), Vile Parle - Pile Shoring Cost-Offer Rev
2 pages
Quezon Memorial Circle Phase 1 Revision
No ratings yet
Quezon Memorial Circle Phase 1 Revision
39 pages
Taniguchi 2001
No ratings yet
Taniguchi 2001
14 pages
MHK Comp Spe Ep Cor 0201
100% (1)
MHK Comp Spe Ep Cor 0201
14 pages
S W O T and Porters Five Forces
No ratings yet
S W O T and Porters Five Forces
7 pages
POF
No ratings yet
POF
21 pages
Dry Erase Marker Experiment
No ratings yet
Dry Erase Marker Experiment
9 pages
Essential Construction Books: From Wiley-Blackwell
No ratings yet
Essential Construction Books: From Wiley-Blackwell
7 pages
Ms Saga
No ratings yet
Ms Saga
1 page
Bi - Ia 167140
No ratings yet
Bi - Ia 167140
2 pages
MRF454 80W 30MHz RF Transistor Data
No ratings yet
MRF454 80W 30MHz RF Transistor Data
5 pages
CRLA2 Grade1Scoresheet v1
No ratings yet
CRLA2 Grade1Scoresheet v1
28 pages
lLOWARA SV 3392N - 5 - P - Feb08 - EdD
No ratings yet
lLOWARA SV 3392N - 5 - P - Feb08 - EdD
10 pages
Self Learning Activity Sheets
No ratings yet
Self Learning Activity Sheets
33 pages
QB Grammar
No ratings yet
QB Grammar
13 pages
FS 5 Ep 4
76% (25)
FS 5 Ep 4
12 pages
Schedule For 4th Annual Philip K. Dick Science Fiction Film Festival
No ratings yet
Schedule For 4th Annual Philip K. Dick Science Fiction Film Festival
8 pages
Notes - Working With Functions
No ratings yet
Notes - Working With Functions
13 pages